Agilent E5070B/E5071B ENA Series RF Network Analyzers

Service Guide
Eighth Edition

Manufacturing No. E5070-90370

November 2008
Notices
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights
are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into
another language without the prior written consent of the Agilent Technologies.
Microsoft®,MS-DOS®,Windows®,Visual C++®,Visual Basic®,VBA® and Excel® are
registered
UNIX is a registered trademark in U.S. and other countries, licensed
exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.

Portions ©Copyright 1996, Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.

© Copyright 2005, 2007, 2008 Agilent Technologies

Manual Printing History

The manual’s printing date and part number indicate its current edition. The printing date
changes when a new edition is printed. (Minor corrections and updates that are
incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change.) The manual part number changes
when extensive technical changes are incorporated.
October 2002 First Edition
March 2003 Second Edition
November 2004 Third Edition (Update service information for serial prefix MY422,
and the A20 motherboard change.)
May 2005 Fourth Edition (Added removable HDD and USB (USBTMC)
interface port for serial prefix MY424 and above.)
November 2005 Fifth Edition
May 2006 Sixth Edition
February 2007 Seventh Edition
November 2008 Eighth Edition

2
 Safety Summary
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation,
service, and repair of this instrument. Failure to comply with these precautions or with
specific WARNINGS elsewhere in this manual may impair the protection provided by the
equipment. In addition it violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use
of the instrument.
Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these
requirements.

NOTE E5070B/E5071B comply with INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION

DEGREE 2 in IEC61010-1. E5070B/E5071B are INDOOR USE product.

NOTE LEDs in E5070B/E5071B are Class 1 in accordance with IEC60825-1.

CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT

NOTE This equipment is MEASUREMENT CATEGORY I (CAT I). Do not use for CAT II, III,
or IV.

NOTE This equipment is tested with stand-alone condition or with the combination with the
accessories supplied by Agilent Technologies against the requirement of the standards
described in the Declaration of Conformity. If it is used as a system component,
compliance of related regulations and safety requirements are to be confirmed by the
builder of the system.

• Ground The Instrument

To avoid electric shock hazard, the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected
to a safety earth ground by the supplied power cable with earth blade.
• DO NOT Operate In An Explosive Atmosphere
Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gasses or fumes. Operation
of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard.
• Keep Away From Live Circuits
Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers. Component replacement and
internal adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel. Do not replace
components with the power cable connected. Under certain conditions, dangerous
voltages may exist even with the power cable removed. To avoid injuries, always
disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.
• DO NOT Service Or Adjust Alone
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person, capable of
rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
• DO NOT Substitute Parts Or Modify Instrument
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts
or perform unauthorized modifications to the instrument. Return the instrument to a
Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that

3
 safety features are maintained.
• Dangerous Procedure Warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures
throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.

WARNING Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are presenting this instrument. Use
extreme caution when handling, testing, and adjusting this instrument.

Safety Symbol
General definitions of safety symbols used on the instrument or in manuals are listed
below.
Instruction Manual symbol: the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for
the user to refer to the instrument manual.
Alternating current.
Direct current.
On (Supply).
Off (Supply).
In position of push-button switch.
Out position of push-button switch.
Frame (or chassis) terminal. A connection to the frame (chassis) of the equipment which
normally include all exposed metal structure.
Stand-by.

WARNING This warning sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure, practice,
condition or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in
injury or death to personnel.

CAUTION This Caution sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or
the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or
destruction of part or all of the product.

NOTE Note denotes important information. It calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or
the like, which is essential to highlight.

4
Certification
Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time
of shipment from the factory. Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration
measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and
Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institution’s calibration facility, or to the
calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members.

Documentation Warranty
The material contained in this document is provided "as is," and is subject to being
changed, without notice, in future editions. Further, to the maximum extent permitted by
applicable law, Agilent disclaims all warranties, either express or implied with regard to
this manual and any information contained herein, including but not limited to the implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Agilent shall not be
liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, use, or performance of this document or any information contained herein.
Should Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms
covering the material in this document that conflict with these terms, the warranty terms in
the separate agreement will control.

Exclusive Remedies
The remedies provided herein are buyer’s sole and exclusive remedies. Agilent
Technologies shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or
consequential damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory.

Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available
for Agilent Technologies products.
For any assistance, contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office.
Addresses are provided at the back of this manual.

5
Typeface Conventions
Sample (bold) Boldface type is used when a term is defined or
emphasised.
Sample (Italic) Italic type is used for emphasis.

key / [Sample] key Indicates a hardkey (key on the front panel or

external keyboard) labeled “Sample.” “key” may
be omitted.
Sample menu/button/box Indicates a menu/button/box on the screen labeled
“Sample” which can be selected/executed by
clicking. “menu,” “button,” or “box” may be
omitted.
Sample block/toolbar Indicates a block (group of hardkeys) or a toolbar
(setup toolbar) labeled “Sample.”
Sample 1 - Sample 2 - Sample 3 Indicates a sequential operation of Sample 1,
Sample 2, and Sample 3 (menu, button, or box).
“-” may be omitted.

6
 Contents

1. General Information
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Software Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Organization of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Instrument Covered by This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Power Meter Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Power Meters That Can Be Tested Using This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Equipment Used for the Power Meter Accuracy Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Description of the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
TEST RECORD FOR POWER METER ACCURACY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

2. Performance Tests
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Test Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Softkey Selection Procedure for Performance Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1. FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2. RF OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3. RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4. TRACE NOISE CW TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5. CROSSTALK TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Crosstalk test program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
System Dynamic Range test program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

7
Contents

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
2. RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3. RF Output Level Linearity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
4. Trace Noise CW Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7. Dynamic Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Frequency Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
RF Output Level Linearity Test (@ Port1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Trace Noise CW Test (Magnitude) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Crosstalk Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
System Dynamic Range Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Dynamic Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Uncorrected System Performance Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Frequency Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
RF Output Level Linearity Test (@ Port1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Trace Noise CW Test (Magnitude) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Crosstalk Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
System Dynamic Range Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Dynamic Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Uncorrected System Performance Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Frequency Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
RF Output Level Linearity Test (@ Port1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Trace Noise CW Test (Magnitude) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Crosstalk Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
System Dynamic Range Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Dynamic Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Uncorrected System Performance Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Frequency Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
RF Output Level Linearity Test (@ Port1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Trace Noise CW Test (Magnitude) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Crosstalk Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
System Dynamic Range Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Dynamic Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

8
 Contents

Uncorrected System Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

3. Adjustment
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Warm-up for Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Writing ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Frequency Reference Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Oven Reference Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
IF Range Gain/Phase Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Source Power Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Test Ports Characteristics Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

4. Troubleshooting
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
How to exit from the E5070B/E5071B Measurement View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
To Troubleshoot the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Primary Trouble Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
No Display troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : MY42300633 and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above .
214
Troubleshooting Using Internal Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Power On Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
PLL unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
External reference signal phase unlock (Opt. 1E5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
To Execute the Internal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Internal Test Failure Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Function Specific Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
To Check the Device Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
To Check the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
To Check the Touch Panel (Option 016 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
To Check the LCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
To Check the External Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
To Check the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
To Check the FDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
To Check the Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
To Check the External Trigger Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
To Check the LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
To Check the Printer Parallel Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
To Check the GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
To Check the USB (USBTMC) Interface Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Troubleshooting Using External Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Contents of the external test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Test equipment required for external test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
To Execute the External Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

9
Contents

External Test Failure Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Performance test failure troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Recommended adjustment for performance test failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Performance test failure troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below,
E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
To Identify the Motherboard Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Configure the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Testing DRAM on the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B : MY42300633 and above, E5071B :
MY42301397 and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
To Identify the Motherboard Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Configure the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Testing DRAM on the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

5. Replaceable Parts
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Direct Mail Order System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Exchange Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Top View (Major Assemblies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Top View (Cables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Top View (Miscellaneous Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Top View (Under Power Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Top View (Motherboard and Other Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : MY42300633 and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above
(A27 mass storage disk drive model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Top View (Major Assemblies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Top View (Cables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Top View (Miscellaneous Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Top View (Under Power Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Top View (Motherboard and Other Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and
above. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Top View (Removable Hard Disk Assemblies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Top View (Major Assemblies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Top View (Cables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Top View (Miscellaneous Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Top View (Under Power Supply) for E5070B S/N from MY42401101 to MY42401986, E5071B S/N from
MY42402455 to MY42404509 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Top View (Under Power Supply) for E5070B S/N MY42401987 and above, E5071B S/N MY42404510
and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Top View (Motherboard and Other Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421, E5071B serial prefix
JP1KK, and MY421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Front View (Analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

10
 Contents

Front View (Miscellaneous Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 213) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 313) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 314) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 413) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 414) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above, E5071B serial prefix
MY422 and above. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Front View (Analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Front View (Miscellaneous Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 314) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 414) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Replaceable Parts List (Others) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Cover Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, MY423 and below, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK,
MY423 and below. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Cover Assembly for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above . . 352
A28 FDD Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, MY423 and below, E5071B
serial prefix JP1KK, MY423 and below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
A4 Power Amp. Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
A8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK or MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK or
MY421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
A8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and
above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK or MY421, E5071B serial prefix
JP1KK or MY421 (Opt. 214, 314, 414) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above, E5071B serial prefix
MY422 and above (Opt. 214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above, E5071B serial prefix
MY422 and above (Opt. 314, 414) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
A6 RF Switch/Tempereature Controller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
A2 Receiver Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Receiver Module Assembly (Opt. 31x, 41x). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Analog Motherboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Chassis Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Keyboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
LCD and Inverter Assembly for E5060B S/N MY42401986 and below, for E5061B S/N MY42404509 and
below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
LCD and Inverter Assembly for E5070B S/N MY42401987 and above, for E5071B S/N MY42404510 and
above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Standby Switch Assembly for E5070B S/N MY42401986 and below, for E5071B S/N MY42404509 and
below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Standby Switch Assembly for E5070B S/N MY42401987 and above, for E5071B S/N MY42404510 and
above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

11
Contents

Removable Hard Disk Assemblies for E5070B S/N MY424 1101and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455
and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Cover Assembly (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Cover Assembly (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Label on Rear Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Other Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Power Cables and Plug Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

6. Replacement Procedure
Replacing an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Outer Cover Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42301396 and below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B : MY42301397 thru
MY4232454 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Front Panel Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above 388
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Removal Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Restore Backup Files onto the New Mass Storage Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Calibration of the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Removable Hard Disk Drive Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, for E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Restore Backup Files onto the New Removable Hard Disk Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Calibration of the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, for E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
A28 FDD (Floppy Disk Drive) Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

12
 Contents

Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
A23 Handler I/O Board Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
DIMM Module Replacement for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42301396 and below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
A1 Source Board Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
A2 Receiver Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Module Disassemble Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Board Disassemble Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
A3 Level Vernier Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
B1 Fan & A6 Switch Control Board Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
B1 Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Fan 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Fan 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421, E5071B S/N prefix
JP1KK or MY421 (Option 214, 314 and 414) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

13
Contents

Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Removal Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix MY422 and above, E5071B S/N prefix
MY422 and above (Option 214, 314 and 414). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Removal Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
A8 RF Switch Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
A8 RF Switch (source board side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
A8 RF Switch (receiver board side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
A4 Power Amp. Module Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Removal Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
A10 Analog Motherboard Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Removal Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Removal Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
A24 GPIB Card Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Removal Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N
prefix JP1KK, MY4232454 and below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Removal Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
USB (USBTMC) Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Removal Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4231100 and below, E5071B
S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4232454 and below. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Removal Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Removal Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N

14
 Contents

prefix JP1KK, MY4232454 and below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and
above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY42300632 thru MY4231100, E5071B
S/N prefix JP1KK, MY42301397 thru MY4232454 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B
S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
LCD Backlight Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
A5 Crystal Oven Board (Opt.1E5) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
N Connector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

7. Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

A. Manual Changes
Manual Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

B. System Recovery
System Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Types of system recoveries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Notes on executing the factory recovery function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Procedure to execute the factory recovery for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B
: JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Procedure to execute the factory recovery for E5070B : MY42300633, and above, E5071B : MY42301397
and above. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Procedure to create the user backup image for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B
: JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

15
Contents

Procedure to create the user backup image for E5070B : MY42300633, and above, E5071B : MY42301397
and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Procedure to execute the user recovery function for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below,
E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Procedure to execute the user recovery function for E5070B : MY42300633, and above, E5071B :
MY42301397 and above. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Initial Registration of E5070B/E5071B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Calibration of the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

C. Firmware Update
Firmware Update for revision A.06.51 or lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
How to make E5070B/E5071B Firmware Installation Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
How to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Firmware Update for revision A.08.01 and A.08.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
How to make E5070B/E5071B Firmware Installation Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
How to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Firmware Update for revision A.09.10 or later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Location of the latest E5070B/71B Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
How to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

D. Computer Virus Check

Computer Virus Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Required equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
How to check the drive C and D of E5070B/E5071B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

E. Power Requirement
Preparation for Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Turning the Power ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Turning the power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Turning the power OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

F. Messages
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
A............................................................................... 523
B ............................................................................... 523
C ............................................................................... 523
D............................................................................... 524
E ............................................................................... 524
F ............................................................................... 525
G............................................................................... 526
H............................................................................... 526
I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
L ............................................................................... 528

16
 Contents

M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

17
Contents

18
 1. General Information

1 General Information

The Service Manual is a guide to servicing the E5070B/E5071B ENA Series Network
Analyzer. The manual contains information requisite to do performance tests, adjustments,
troubleshooting, and repairs.

19
 General Information
Precautions

Precautions
This section describes cautions that must be observed in operating the E5070B/E5071B.

Software Installed
The Windows operating system installed in this machine is customized for more effective
operation, and has different functions that are not part of the Windows operating system for
ordinary PCs (personal computers).
Therefore, do not attempt to use the system in ways other than those described in this
manual or to install Windows-based software (including anti-virus software) for ordinary
PCs as doing so may cause malfunctions.
Also note the followings.

• Do not update the Windows operating system installed in this machine to the Windows
operating system for ordinary PCs. Doing so will cause malfunctions.
• Do not attempt to update VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) software installed in this
machine to its equivalent developed for ordinary PCs. Doing so will cause
malfunctions.
• Do not allow any computer virus to infect the system. This machine has no virus check
function nor anti-virus software installed.
Agilent Technologies will not be held liable for any failure or damage arising from
negligence regarding these prohibitions and warnings.

NOTE If the pre-installed software is damaged somehow, resulting in errant behavior by the
machine, perform a system recovery. For further details of system recovery, refer to
Appendix B.

20 Chapter 1
 General Information

1. General Information
Organization of Service Manual

Organization of Service Manual

Tabs are used to divide the major chapter and appendix of this manual. The contents of
each chapter and appendix in this manual is as follows;

Chapter 1 , “General Information,”

The Service Manual is a guide to servicing the E5070B/E5071B ENA Series

Network Analyzer. The manual contains information requisite to do performance
tests, adjustments, troubleshooting, and repairs.

Chapter 2 , “Performance Tests,”

This chapter provides information on how to verify the E5070B/E5071B

performance.

Chapter 3 , “Adjustment,”

This chapter provides the adjustment information for the E5070B/E5071B ENA
Series Network Analyzer to ensure that the it is within its specifications. The
adjustment must be performed Agilent’s qualified service personnel. If you need the
adjustment for your E5070B/E5071B, it should be sent to the nearest Agilent
Technologies service office.

Chapter 4 , “Troubleshooting,”

This chapter provides procedure to isolate a faulty assembly in the E5070B/E5071B

Network Analyzer

Chapter 5 , “Replaceable Parts,”

This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the
E5070B/E5071B ENA Series RF Network Analyzers.

Chapter 6 , “Replacement Procedure,”

This chapter provides procedure for removing and replacing the major assemblies in
the E5070B/E5071B ENA Series Network Analyzer.

Chapter 7 , “Post-Repair Procedures,”

This chapter lists the procedures required to verify the E5070B/E5071B operation
after an assembly is replaced with a new one.

Appendix A , “Manual Changes,”

This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to versions or
configurations of the E5070B/E5071B manufactured earlier than the current printing
date of this manual. The information in this manual applies directly to
E5070B/E5071B units with the serial number that is printed on the title page of this
manual.

Appendix B , “System Recovery,”

This appendix describes how to recover the operating system (Windows 2000) when
the operating system has been damaged.

Chapter 1 21
General Information
Organization of Service Manual

Appendix C , “Firmware Update,”

This appendix describes how to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware. When you
want to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware, refer to this appendix.

Appendix D , “Computer Virus Check,”

This appendix describes an example of how to check the system of E5070B/E5071B

for computer viruses using computer viruses check software.

Appendix E , “Power Requirement,”

Appendix F, “Messages,”

The E5070B/5071B can display error messages as well as messages that indicate the
internal operating status of the equipment. This appendix explains what these
messages mean by listing them in alphabetical order.

22 Chapter 1
 General Information

1. General Information
Instrument Covered by This Manual

Instrument Covered by This Manual

Agilent Technologies uses a two-part, ten-character serial number label (See Figure 1-1)
attached to the instrument's rear panel. The first five characters are the serial prefix and the
last five digits are the suffix.

Figure 1-1 Serial Number Label Example

An instrument manufactured after the printing date of this manual may have serial number
prefix that is not listed on the title page. This unlisted serial number prefix indicates the
instrument is different from those described in this manual. The manual for this new
instrument may be accompanied by a yellow Manual Changes supplement or have a
different manual part number. This sheet contains “change information” that explains how
to adapt the manual to the newer instrument.
In addition to change information, the supplement may contain information for correcting
errors (Errata) in the manual. To keep this manual as current and accurate as possible,
Agilent Technologies recommends that you periodically request the latest Manual Changes
supplement. The supplement for this manual is identified by this manual's printing data and
is available from Agilent Technologies. If the serial prefix or number of an instrument is
lower than that on the title page of this manual, see Appendix A, Manual Changes. For
information concerning, a serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page or in the
Manual change supplement, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies office.

Chapter 1 23
 General Information
Required Equipment

Required Equipment
Table 1-1 lists the recommended equipment for performing maintenance on the
E5070B/E5071B.

Table 1-1 Recommended Test Equipment

Equipment Critical specifications Recommended Model Qty. Use*1

Frequency Counter Frequency: 50 MHz to 3 GHz Agilent 53181A with 1 P,A

Accuracy: < 2.5 ppm Opt.010 & 030*2

Frequency Standard Frequency: 10 MHz, Time Base Agilent 5071A 1 A

Error: ≤ ± 1× 10–10/year

Power Meter No Substitute Agilent E4419A/B*3 or 1 P,A

E4418A/B

Power Sensor No Substitute Agilent 8482A 1 P,A

Power Sensor No Substitute Agilent E4412A 1 P,A

Dynamic Accuracy No substitute Agilent Z5623A with Opt. 1 P

Test Kit H01

Calibration Kit No Substitute Agilent 85032F 1 P,A,T

Short Type-N(m) part of Agilent 4 P,T

85032F/54D/33E/50D with
Type-N adapter

Load Type-N(m) part of Agilent 2 P

85032F/54D/33E/50D with
Type-N adapter

Fixed attenuator (6 50 Ω, N(m)-N(f), VSWR ≤ 1.015 Agilent 8491A w/Opt.006 1 P,A

dB) and H60

Fixed attenuator (10 50 Ω, N(m)-N(f) Agilent 8491A/B/C 1 T

dB)

Handler I/O Test Kit No substitute Agilent p/n E5070-65001 1 T

Cable BNC(m)-BNC(m) Cable, 61 cm Agilent p/n 8120-1839 1 P,A

Coaxial cable with Type-N (m) Agilent N6314A (p/n 1 P,A,T
connectors, 61 cm (24 in), 2 ea. 8120-8862)

Adapter N(m)-BNC(f) Adapter Agilent p/n 1250-0780 1 P,A

Torque Wrench Size: 3/4 inch Agilent p/n 8710-1766 1 P,A

Torque: 136 N-cm

24 Chapter 1
 General Information

1. General Information
Required Equipment

Table 1-1 Recommended Test Equipment

Equipment Critical specifications Recommended Model Qty. Use*1

Personal Computer Windows 95, 98, NT4 or 2000, 1 P,A

with GPIB board VEE5.0 or 6.0
*1.P: Performance Tests, A: Adjustment, T: Troubleshooting
*2.Opt.050 and Opt.124 can be substituted for Opt.030. In this case, a N(m)-BNC(f) adapter is necessary.
*3.The accuracy of a standard E4419A/B or E4418A/B of ±0.02 dB is adequate for all tests/adjustment except
“Dynamic Accuracy Test”. This test requires a power meter with Option G12 or H12 that has been certified to a
higer accuracy specification. If an Option G12 or H12 power meter is not available, a test is provide on “Power
Meter Accuracy Test” on page 26 to verify the accuracy of a standard power meter.

Table 1-2 Alternative Test Equipment

Equipment Critical specifications Model Qty. Use*1

Frequency Counter Frequency: 50 MHz to 3 GHz Agilent 53131/2A with Opt.010 1 P,A
Accuracy: < 2.5 ppm and 030*2

Power Meter No Substitute Agilent E4418A/B*3 1 P

Short Type-N(m) Agilent 11512A 4 P,T

Load Type-N(m) Agilent 909F Opt. 012 4 P

*1.P: Performance Tests, A: Adjustment, T: Troubleshooting
*2.Opt.050 and Opt.124 can be substituted for Opt.030. In this case, a N(m)-BNC(f) adapter is necessary.
*3.If an accurate measurement of the dynamic accuracy specification is not required, a standard power meter can be
used.

Chapter 1 25
 General Information
Power Meter Accuracy Test

Power Meter Accuracy Test

This test is intended for power meters used in testing the E5070B/E5071B. The “Dynamic
Accuracy Test” requires the use of a power meter that has been calibrated to a higher
accuracy than the standard power meter.
Power meters with options G12 and H12 specify an improved instrument accuracy over a
limited power range. (These power meters do not contain unique hardware.) A power
meter may be returned to the factory to have one of these options added to an existing
power meter or to renew the calibration for one of these options.
This test procedure is an alternative to returning the power meter to the factory. When a
power meter passes this test, it is considered to be calibrated for the G12 or H12 option
even though it has not been returned to the factory.

Power Meters That Can Be Tested Using This Procedure

This procedure assume that the E4419B power meter is being tested.

NOTE It is recommended that the revision number for the power meter “Main Firmware” be
Ax.03.00 or higher.

Equipment Used for the Power Meter Accuracy Test

Equipment Type Recommended Model Alternate

or Part Number Model or Part Number

Range calibrator Agilent 11683A None

Precision digital Agilent 3458A Any with the required

voltmeter accuracy and resolution*1

Power sensor Agilent 11730A, p/n Any equivalent

cable 8120-8319

Cable, BNC, 50 Ω Any Any

Adapter for Any Any

connecting BNC
cable to DVM
inputs
*1.Required accuracy and resolution at the following voltage levels:
14 mV input: 0.0100% accuracy, 10 nV resolution
0.14 V input: 0.0050% accuracy, 100 nV resolution
0.45 V input: 0.0030% accuracy, 100 nV resolution

Description of the Test

The power meter accuracy is verified for various power inputs and the actual readings are
recorded in a test record. A range calibrator is used to provide the reference inputs.

26 Chapter 1
 General Information

1. General Information
Power Meter Accuracy Test

NOTE It is recommended that a copy of the test record on page 30 be made, and the values be
recorded on the copy, thus preserving the original for future use.

Test Procedure

NOTE This procedure assumes the use of the recommended equipment model numbers. The
actual steps required, therefore, may differ for other model numbers of equipment used.

Step 1. Setup the equipment as shown in Figure 1-2.

a. Connect the DC REFERENCE OUTPUT connector on the rear panel of the range
calibrator to the DVM voltage input.
b. Connect the POWER METER output of the range calibrator to the input of the power
meter being tested.
c. Switch on the power to the power meter, the range calibrator, and the digital voltmeter.

Figure 1-2 Setup for the Power Meter Accuracy Test

Step 2. Press the power meter: Press [Preset/Local], then Confirm.

Step 3. Perform the following steps for each channel on the power meter:

a. Set to read in dBm: Press [dBm/W], then dBm.

b. Set the ref cal factor to 100%: Press [Zero/Cal], Cal, A/B Ref CF, then set to 100.0, if
necessary.
c. Set the cal factor to 100%: Press [Frequency/Cal Fac], A/B Cal Fac, then set to 100.0,
if necessary.
d. Set readout to 0.001 dBm: Press [Meas Setup], then Resolution 1234, to highlight 4.
e. Set filter step detect on and filter length to 512: Press [System/Inputs], channel Aor B
Input Setting, [More], Ch A/B Filter, Step Det On, Filter On, Mode MAN, Length,
then set the filter length to 512.

Step 4. Setup the digital voltmeter (DVM) as follows:

a. Reset the DVM: Press the blue key followed by Reset.

b. Set the sample period to a value greater than one second: Press NPLC, 5, 0, then Enter.

Step 5. Set the range calibrator controls as follows:

Chapter 1 27
 General Information
Power Meter Accuracy Test

• POLARITY: NORMAL

• RANGE: 1 mW

• FUNCTION: CALIBRATE

Step 6. Allow the equipment to warm up for approximately 30 minutes. Do not change any
connections or control setting during this time.

Step 7. Zero and calibrate the power meter channel to which the range calibrator is connected:

a. The range calibrator’s RANGE switch should be set to 1 mW.

b. Set the range calibrator’s FUNCTION switch to STANDBY.
c. Press [Zero/Cal], then Zero A or Zero B (as appropriate). Wait for the operation to
complete.
d. Set the range calibrator’s FUNCTION switch to CALIBRATE.
e. Press [Zero/Cal], Cal, then Cal A or Cal B (as appropriate). Wait for the operation to
complete.

Step 8. Monitor the drift rate of the power meter reading: Five minutes following calibration, the
meter must read 0.001, 0.000, or -0.001 dBm. If the power meter reading is not one of these
values, allow additional warm up time, then check the drift rate again. The range calibrator
must remain connected to the power meter during this warm up time.

Step 9. Zero and calibrate the power meter channel to which the range calibrator is connected:

NOTE After a channel on the power meter is calibrated, do not allow more than 5 minutes to
elapse before completing the remaining measurement steps for that channel.

a. The range calibrator’s RANGE switch should be set to 1 mW.

b. Set the range calibrator’s FUNCTION switch to STANDBY.
c. Press [Zero/Cal], then Zero A or Zero B (as appropriate). Wait for the operation to be
completed.
d. Set the range calibrator’s FUNCTION switch to CALIBRATE.
e. Press [Zero/Cal], Cal, then Cal A or Cal B (as appropriate). Wait for the operation to
complete.

Step 10. Record the DVM voltage reading as value A in the test record on page 30.

NOTE All DVM readings in this procedure should be recorded showing five significant digits.

Step 11. The reading on the power meter should be 0.000±0.001 dBm.

Step 12. Switch the range calibrator RANGE to 300 μW.

Step 13. Record the DVM voltage reading as value B in the test record.

Step 14. Wait for the power meter reading to settle (no settling drift within 20 seconds).

Step 15. Record the power meter reading as value C in the test record.

Step 16. Switch the range calibrator RANGE to 100 μW.

28 Chapter 1
 General Information

1. General Information
Power Meter Accuracy Test

Step 17. Record the DVM voltage reading as value D in the test record.

Step 18. Wait for the power meter reading to settle (no settling drift within 20 seconds).

Step 19. Record the power meter reading as value E in the test record.

Step 20. If testing a dual-channel power meter, perform Step 7 through Step 19 for the other
channel.

Step 21. Perform the pass/fail calculations indicated on the test record.

NOTE If a channel of the power meter does not pass this test, the power meter cannot be used in
applications that require Option G12 or H12. There are no adjustments that can be
performed to improve the performance of the power meter. Typically, replacing the A6
measurement assembly associated with the failed channel will correct the problem.

Chapter 1 29
General Information
Power Meter Accuracy Test

TEST RECORD FOR POWER METER ACCURACY TEST

Power Meter Tested

Model Number: Test Date:

Serial Number: Tested by:

Test Equipment Used

Range Calibrator: Model No.: Serial No.:

Digital Voltmeter: Model No.: Serial No.:

Test Results

Range Channel A Channel B

Calibrator:
Setting DVM Reading Power Meter DVM Reading Power Meter
(Vdc) Reading (dBm) (Vdc) Reading (dBm)

1 mW A= 0.00±0.001 A= 0.00±0.001

300 μW B= C= B= C=

100 μW D= E= D= E=

Pass/Fail Calculation

300 μW R=B/A = R=B/A =

S=10(C/10) = S=10(C/10) =
% ERROR=((R-S)/R)x100 = % ERROR=((R-S)/R)x100 =
Limits: ±0.13% Limits: ±0.13%
Pass __ Fail __ Pass __ Fail __

100 μW T=D/A = T=D/A =

U=10(E/10) = U=10(E/10) =
% ERROR=((T-U)/T)x100 = % ERROR=((T-U)/T)x100 =
Limits: ±0.10% Limits: ±0.10%
Pass __ Fail __ Pass __ Fail __

30 Chapter 1
 2. Performance Test

2 Performance Tests

This chapter provides information on how to verify the E5070B/E5071B performance.

31
 Performance Tests
Introduction

Introduction
This literature provides the performance test procedures for the Agilent E5070B/E5071B
RF Network Analyzers. The performance test names are listed in Table 2-1. The test
procedures are described sequentially in the following pages.
The test name indicates the tested performance and to which performance group the tested
performance belongs.
Each procedure consists of the following parts:
Description: describes the test procedure.
Specification: describes the performance verified in the test.
Test Equipment: describes test equipment required in the test.
Procedure: describes test procedure step by step.

NOTE Allow the analyzer to warm up for at least 30 minutes before you execute any of the
performance tests.
Perform all performance tests in an ambient temperature of 23 ± 5 °C

NOTE The performance tests should be performed periodically. The recommended test interval is
12 months.
The test interval depends on maintenance of use and the environmental conditions under
which the instrument is used. You may find that the interval could be shortened or
lengthened; however, such a decision should be based on substantial quantitative data.

NOTE Before performing any tests, make extra copies of the calculation sheets and the
performance test record pertaining to the test procedure. These are required in the test
procedure. For explanation of how to use these records, see the calculation sheet and
performance test record at the end of this literature.

NOTE All the test procedures are described without using the optional touch screen LCD features
(option 016) of the E5070B/E5071B. For the option 016 instruments, the touch screen
operating procedures corresponding to the described procedures may be used.

Table 2-1 The E5070B/E5071B performance test procedure

Para. Title

1 Frequency accuracy test

2 RF output level accuracy and flatness test

3 RF output level linearity test

4 Trace noise CW test

5 Crosstalk test

6 System dynamic range test

32 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
Introduction

Table 2-1 The E5070B/E5071B performance test procedure

Para. Title

7 Dynamic accuracy test

8 Uncorrected system performance test

Test Equipment Required

2. Performance Test
The required equipment for the performance test is listed on Table 1-1and Table 1-2. Use
only calibrated equipment when doing the performance test.

Softkey Selection Procedure for Performance Test

NOTE The procedure of the softkey selection depends on the firmware revision. Please note that
some softkey selection procedures for your E5070B/E5071B might be a little bit different
from the procedure described in this chapter.

Chapter 2 33
 Performance Tests
1. FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST

1. FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST

Description
This test checks the frequency accuracy of the E5070B/E5071B test port output signal. The
frequency accuracy is checked at 50 MHz and 3 GHz with a frequency counter. Since the
E5070B/E5071B employs a PLL frequency synthesizer for the signal source, the frequency
accuracy test at these two frequency points can verify the accuracy for the entire frequency
range.

Specification
@23 ± 5 °C, referenced to 23 °C

Frequency accuracy ≤ ± 5 ppm @ 300 kHz to 3 GHz (E5070B)

≤ ± 5 ppm @ 300 kHz to 8.5 GHz (E5071B)

@23 ± 5 °C, referenced to 23 °C

High stability time-base accuracy ≤ ± 1 ppm @ 300 kHz to 3 GHz (E5070B)

(option 1E5)

≤ ± 1 ppm @ 300 kHz to 8.5 GHz (E5071B)

Test equipment

Frequency Counter Agilent 53181A with Opt. 010 and 030

BNC cable, 61 cm Agilent p/n 8120-1839

N(m)-BNC(f) adapter Agilent p/n 1250-0780

Procedure
Step 1. Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2-1. For testing the E5070B/E5071B
equipped with option 1E5, connect a BNC(m)-BNC(m) adaptor between the Ref In
connector and the Ref Oven (10 MHz) connector on the E5070B/E5071B rear panel.

NOTE For testing without option 1E5, disconnect the above BNC(m)-BNC(m) adaptor.

NOTE Figure 2-1 shows the test setup for the E5070B/E5071B with 4-port option (Opt. 413/414).
For 2-port and 3-port options (Opt. 213/214/313/314), connect the frequency counter input
cable to Port 1 as well.

34 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
1. FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST

Figure 2-1 Frequency accuracy test setup (50 MHz)

2. Performance Test
Step 2. Initialize the frequency counter. Set the frequency counter as follows:

Controls Setting

Gate time 1 sec

50 Ω/1 MΩ 50 Ω

Step 3. Press and to initialize the E5070B/E5071B. And press - Power -

Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function (FW 3.60 and above), and press
- Servise - Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function (FW 3.54
and above). Then set the controls as follows:

Control settings Key strokes

Center frequency: 50 MHz - - -

Frequency span: 0 Hz - -

The source power now is set to 0 dBm (preset value).

Step 4. Press - and to make a Single sweep measurement. Wait for frequency
counter reading to settle.

Step 5. Record the frequency counter reading to a 1 Hz resolution in the performance test record
("Test result" column for the Frequency accuracy test.)

Chapter 2 35
 Performance Tests
1. FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST

Figure 2-2 Frequency accuracy test setup (3GHz)

Step 6. Connect the BNC cable to the frequency counter input channel measurable for a 3 GHz
input signal. See Figure 2-2.

Step 7. Press - - to set the frequency to 3 GHz.

Step 8. Perform Step 4 and 5.

36 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
2. RF OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TEST

2. RF OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS

TEST

Description
This test checks the level accuracy and frequency flatness of the E5070B/E5071B test port
output signal. The level accuracy is checked for an output power level setting of 0 dBm at

2. Performance Test
50 MHz using a power meter. The frequency flatness is tested by measuring the power
level at 12 frequency points from 10 MHz to 8.5 GHz and calculating the differences of the
power meter readings from the level at 50 MHz.

Specification

Level accuracy

≤ ± 0.65 dBm @ 23 ± 5 °C, 50 MHz, 0 dBm

Flatness
E5070B

≤ ± 1 dBm @ 23 ± 5 °C, 10 MHz to 3 GHz, 0 dBm, relative to 50 MHz

E5071B

≤ ± 1 dBm @ 23 ± 5 °C, 10 MHz to 8.5 GHz, 0 dBm, relative to 50 MHz

NOTE The level accuracy and flatness specifications apply to Port 1 only. The levels for other
ports are given as supplemental performance characteristic.

Test equipment

Power meter Agilent E4419A/B

Power sensor Agilent E4412A

Procedure
Step 1. Connect the power sensor to the power meter. Calibrate the power meter for the power
sensor used.

Step 2. Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2-3.

Chapter 2 37
 Performance Tests
2. RF OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TEST

Figure 2-3 RF output level accuracy and flatness test setup.

NOTE Figure 2-3 shows the test setup for the E5070B/E5071B with 4-port option (Opt. 413/414).
For 2-port and 3-port options (Opt. 213/214/313/314), connect the power sensor to Port 1
as well.

Step 3. Press and to initialize the E5070B/E5071B. And press - Power -

Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function (FW 3.60 and above), and press
- Servise - Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function (FW 3.54
and above). Then set the controls as follows:

Control settings Key strokes

Center frequency: 50 MHz - - -

Frequency span: 0 Hz - -

The source power now is set to 0 dBm (preset value).

Step 4. Press - and to make a Single sweep measurement.

Step 5. RF output level accuracy test

a. Wait for power meter reading to settle.

b. Record the power meter reading in the performance test record ("Test result" column
for the level accuracy test).

Step 6. RF output level flatness test

a. Record the power meter reading (same as that in Step 5-b) in the calculation sheet
("Power meter reading [Ref]" column for the level flatness test).

38 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
2. RF OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TEST

b. Press - - - to change the E5070B/E5071B center frequency to 10

MHz, which is the first one of the frequency flatness test frequencies listed in Table
2-2.
Table 2-2 RF output level flatness test conditions

Agilent E5070B/E5071B Center Frequency

E5070B/E5071B 10 MHz
550 MHz

2. Performance Test
1.05 GHz
1.55 GHz
2.05 GHz
3 GHz

E5071B only 4.25 GHz

5.05 GHz
6.05 GHz
7.05 GHz
8.05 GHz
8.5 GHz

NOTE The RF output level is measured at the minimum, maximum and proper frequencies other
than the source adjustment frequencies within the specified frequency range.

c. Press - and to make a Single sweep measurement.

d. Wait for the power meter reading to settle. Then record the reading in the calculation
sheet ("Power meter reading [a]" column).
e. Change the E5070B/E5071B center frequency in accordance with Table 2-2 and
perform Step 6-c and 6-d for each frequency.
f. Calculate test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet. Record the
calculated test results in the performance test record ("Test result" column for the level
flatness test).

Chapter 2 39
 Performance Tests
3. RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST

3. RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST

Description
This test checks the level accuracy of the E5070B/E5071B test port output signal across the
specified level range. The RF output level is measured for power level settings of -15 dBm
to 10 dBm, 8 dBm, or 6 dBm in 1 dB step increments at 10MHz, 3 GHz, 4.25 GHz, 6 GHz
and 8.5 GHz as serial number prefix is MY421, or JP1KK. The RF output level is
measured for power level settings of -15 dBm to 10 dBm, 9 dBm, 7 dBm, or 5 dBm in 1 dB
step increments at 10MHz, 3 GHz, 4.25 GHz, 6 GHz and 8.5 GHz as serial number prefix
is MY422, and above.

Specification

Serial Number Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

E5070B

≤ ± 0.75 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 10 MHz to 3 GHz, - 15 dBm to 10 dBm

E5071B

≤ ± 0.75 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 10 MHz to 4.25 GHz, - 15 dBm to 10 dBm

≤ ± 0.75 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 4.25 GHz to 6 GHz, - 15 dBm to 8 dBm

≤ ± 0.75 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 6 GHz to 8.5 GHz, - 15 dBm to 6 dBm

Serial Number Prefix: MY422, and above

E5070B

≤ ± 0.75 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 10 MHz to 3 GHz, - 15 dBm to 10 dBm

E5071B

≤ ± 0.75 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 10 MHz to 3 GHz, - 15 dBm to 10 dBm

≤ ± 0.75 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 GHz to 4.25 GHz, - 15 dBm to 9 dBm

≤ ± 0.75 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 4.25 GHz to 6 GHz, - 15 dBm to 7 dBm

≤ ± 0.75 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 6 GHz to 8.5 GHz, - 15 dBm to 5 dBm

NOTE The level linearity specification applies to Port 1 only. The levels for other ports are given
as supplemental performance characteristic.

40 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
3. RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST

Test equipment

Power meter Agilent E4419A/B

Power sensor Agilent E4412A

Procedure
Step 1. Connect the power sensor to the power meter. Calibrate the power meter for the power

2. Performance Test
sensor used.

Step 2. Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 RF output level linearity test setup

NOTE Figure 2-4 shows the test setup for the E5070B/E5071B with 4-port option (Opt. 413/414).
For 2-port and 3-port options (Opt. 213/214/313/314), connect the power sensor to Port 1
as well.

Step 3. Press and to initialize the E5070B/E5071B. And press - Power -

Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function (FW 3.60 and above). The power
range of “-20 to 10” should be selected for the maximum output level. Press -
Servise - Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function (FW 3.54 and above).
Then set the controls as follows:

Control settings Key strokes

Center frequency: 10 MHz - - -

Frequency span: 0 Hz - -

Chapter 2 41
 Performance Tests
3. RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST

The source power now is set to 0 dBm (preset value).

Step 4. Press - and to make a Single sweep measurement.

Step 5. Wait for power meter reading to settle. Record the power meter reading in the calculation
sheet ("Power meter reading [Ref]" column for the level linearity test).

Step 6. Press - - to set the power level to 1 dBm, which is the second value of
the level linearity test levels listed in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 RF output level linearity test conditions for serial prefix MY421, or JP1KK

Test E5070B/E5071B E5071B only

frequency
10 MHz 3 GHz 4.25 GHz 6 GHz 8.5 GHz

Power level 0 dBm (reference level) 0 dBm (ref) 0 dBm (ref)

1 dBm 1 dBm 1 dBm
2 dBm 2 dBm 2 dBm
3 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm
4 dBm 4 dBm 4 dBm
5 dBm 5 dBm 5 dBm
6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm
7 dBm 7 dBm
8 dBm 8 dBm
9 dBm
10 dBm

Table 2-4 RF output level linearity test conditions for serial prefix MY422, and above

Test E5070B/E5071B E5071B only

frequency
10 MHz 3 GHz 4.25 GHz 6 GHz 8.5 GHz

Power level 0 dBm (reference level) 0 dBm (ref) 0 dBm (ref) 0 dBm (ref)
1 dBm 1 dBm 1 dBm 1 dBm
2 dBm 2 dBm 2 dBm 2 dBm
3 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm
4 dBm 4 dBm 4 dBm 4 dBm
5 dBm 5 dBm 5 dBm 5 dBm
6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm
7 dBm 7 dBm 7 dBm
8 dBm 8 dBm
9 dBm 9 dBm
10 dBm

NOTE The RF output level linearity is tested at the minimum, maximum and proper frequencies
other than the source adjustment frequencies within the specified frequency range.

Step 7. Press - and to make a Single sweep measurement.

Step 8. Wait for the power meter reading to settle. Then record the reading in the calculation sheet
("Power meter reading [a]" column for the level linearity test).

Step 9. Change the E5070B/E5071B power level setting in accordance with Table 2-3 and perform

42 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
3. RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST

Step 7 and 8 for each power level to 10, (8, or 6) dBm for serial prefix MY421, or KP1KK.

Change the E5070B/E5071B power level setting in accordance with Table 2-4 and perform
Step 7 and 8 for each power level to 10, (9, or 7, or 5) dBm for serial prefix MY422, and
above.

Step 10. Press - - - to set the power level to -1 dBm, which is the second
value of the level linearity test levels listed in Table 2-5.
Table 2-5 RF output level linearity test conditions

2. Performance Test
Test E5070B/E5071B E5071B only
frequency
10 MHz 3 GHz 4.25 GHz 6 GHz 8.5 GHz

Power level 0 dBm (reference level)

-1 dBm
-2 dBm
-3 dBm
-4 dBm
-5 dBm
-6 dBm
-7 dBm
-8 dBm
-9 dBm
-10 dBm
-11 dBm
-12 dBm
-13 dBm
-14 dBm
-15 dBm

Step 11. Press - and to make a Single sweep measurement.

Step 12. Wait for the power meter reading to settle. Then record the reading in the calculation sheet
("Power meter reading [a]" column for the level linearity test).

Step 13. Change the E5070B/E5071B power level setting in accordance with Table 2-5 and perform
Step 7 and 8 for each power level to -15 dBm.

Step 14. Set the power level to 0 dBm and change the E5070B/E5071B center frequency to the next
level-linearity test frequency in accordance with Table 2-5.

Step 15. Perform Step 4 through 14 for each frequency.

Step 16. Calculate test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet. Record the
calculated test results in the performance test record ("Test result" column for the level
linearity test).

Chapter 2 43
Performance Tests
4. TRACE NOISE CW TEST

4. TRACE NOISE CW TEST

Description
This test checks the trace noise level for each test port of the E5070B/E5071B. The trace
noise level is quantified by performing a "through" measurement 32 times at 3 MHz, 1.3
GHz, 2.1 GHz, 3 GHz, 4.25 GHz, 6 GHz, 7.5 GHz and 8.5 GHz, with a cable connected
between two test ports. Standard deviation of the measured values at each frequency is
calculated and, then translated into a noise level expressed in dB rms.

Specification

Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

E5070B

≤ 1 mdB rms @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 3 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz, 10 dBm, through

E5071B

≤ 1 mdB rms @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 4.25 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz, 10 dBm, through

≤ 3 mdB rms @ 23 ± 5 °C, 4.25 GHz to 6 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz, 8 dBm, through

≤ 3 mdB rms @ 23 ± 5 °C, 6 GHz to 7.5 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz, 6 dBm, through

≤ 5 mdB rms @ 23 ± 5 °C, 7.5 GHz to 8.5 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz, 6 dBm, through

Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

E5070B

≤ 1 mdB rms @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 3 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz, 10 dBm, through

E5071B

≤ 1 mdB rms @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 3 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz, 10 dBm, through

≤ 1.2 mdB rms @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 GHz to 4.25 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz, 9 dBm, through

≤ 3.6 mdB rms @ 23 ± 5 °C, 4.25 GHz to 6 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz, 7 dBm, through

≤ 3.6 mdB rms @ 23 ± 5 °C, 6 GHz to 7.5 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz, 5 dBm, through

≤ 6 mdB rms @ 23 ± 5 °C, 7.5 GHz to 8.5 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz, 5 dBm, through

Test equipment

Coaxial cable with Type-N (m) connectors, 61 cm (24 in) Agilent

N6314A (p/n
8120-8862)

44 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
4. TRACE NOISE CW TEST

Procedure
Step 1. Connect test equipment (N-N cable) as shown in the following figures:
Opt. 213/214: Figure 2-5
Opt. 313/314: Figure 2-6
Opt. 413/414: Figure 2-7

Figure 2-5 Trace Noise CW Test setup (Opt. 213/214)

2. Performance Test
Figure 2-6 Trace Noise CW Test setup (Opt. 313/314)

Chapter 2 45
 Performance Tests
4. TRACE NOISE CW TEST

Figure 2-7 Trace Noise CW Test setup (Opt. 413/414)

NOTE Do not touch or move the N-N cable during measurements. To do so will cause a variance
in measured values.

Step 2. Press and to initialize the E5070B/E5071B. And press - Power -

Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function (FW 3.60 and above), and press
- Servise - Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function (FW 3.54
and above).

Step 3. Press - - - - - - to select Lin Mag from display

format menu.

Step 4. Press - - - - - - - (select Statistics) -

and set Statistics function to on.

Step 5. Press and select S21 from S-parameter menu.

Step 6. Set the controls as follows:

Control settings Key strokes

Center frequency: 3 MHz - -

Frequency span: 0 Hz - -

Number of points: 32 - - - - - (select

Points ) - - - -

IF Bandwidth: 3 kHz - - -

The source power now is set to 0 dBm (preset value).

46 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
4. TRACE NOISE CW TEST

Step 7. Press - - - to set the power level to 10 dBm, which is the value of
the trace noise test levels listed in Table 2-6 or Table 2-7.

Step 8. Press - and to make a Single sweep measurement. A "s.dev" (standard

deviation) value will be displayed in the upper left corner of the graphic display.

Step 9. Record the s.dev value in the calculation sheet ("s.dev [μU]" column for the CW trace
noise test).

Step 10. Calculate the dB value of the trace noise level using the following equation and record the

2. Performance Test
calculated value in the calculation sheet ("Trace noise level [dB rms]" column).

Trace noise level = 20 log (1 + s.dev × 10-6)

Step 11. Change the E5070B/E5071B center frequency in accordance with Table 2-6 or Table 2-7
and perform Step 8 through 10 for each frequency.
Table 2-6 Trace noise CW Test test frequencies/power level for serial prefix MY421, or
JP1KK

Test E5070B/E50 E5071B only

frequency 71B

3M, 1.3G, 4.25 GHz 6 GHz 7.5 GHz 8.5 GHz

2.1G, 3GHz

Power level 10 dBm 8 dBm 6 dBm

Table 2-7 Trace noise CW Test test frequencies/power level for serial prefix MY422, and
above

Test E5070B/E50 E5071B only

frequency 71B

3M, 1.3G, 4.25 GHz 6 GHz 7.5 GHz 8.5 GHz

2.1G, 3GHz

Power level 10 dBm 9 dBm 7 dBm 5 dBm

NOTE The CW trace noise level is tested at the minimum and maximum frequencies of the
specified frequency range, the frequencies where an internal frequency divider works
(between 1.3 GHz and 2.1 GHz) and, the frequency where the signal source frequency
band is switched (4.25 GHz).

Step 12. Record the calculated values of the trace noise level in the performance test record ("Test
result [dB rms]" column for the CW trace noise test).

Step 13. Press and select S12 from S-parameter menu.

Step 14. Press - - to set the frequency to 3 MHz.

Step 15. Perform Step 8 through 12 for the S12 measurement.

Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only

Chapter 2 47
 Performance Tests
4. TRACE NOISE CW TEST

NOTE Perform Step 16 through 19 for the option 313, 314, 413 and 414 instruments only.

Step 16. Connect the test equipment (N-N cable) as shown in Figure 2-8 (Opt. 313/314) and Figure
2-9 (Opt. 413/414).

Figure 2-8 Trace Noise CW Test setup (Opt. 313/314)

Figure 2-9 Trace Noise CW Test setup (Opt. 413/414)

Step 17. Select S-parameter from menu in accordance with Table 2-8.

48 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
4. TRACE NOISE CW TEST

Table 2-8 S-parameter settings for Trace Noise CW Test

Option

313/314 413/414

1 S23 S43

2 S32 S34

2. Performance Test
Step 18. Set the center frequency to 3 MHz.

Step 19. Perform Step 8 through 12 for each of the S-parameters shown in the first and second rows
in Table 2-8.

Chapter 2 49
Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

5. CROSSTALK TEST

Description
This test checks the crosstalks between test ports of the E5070B/E5071B. The crosstalk is
tested by performing "through" measurements with two test ports connected together and,
short-ended "isolation" measurements with the test ports terminated with N-type "Short"
devices. A "through" calibration is performed to have the through measurement data as the
reference to which the isolation measurement data is compared. With segment sweep
points for a specified frequency range, a swept measurement with the short-ended test ports
is repeated 16 times and the measurement data is averaged. The worst crosstalk value is
determined from the peak value of the average data.

Specification

Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

E5070B

-120 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 3 GHz

E5071B

-120 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 3 GHz

-110 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 GHz to 6 GHz

-100 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 6 GHz to 7.5 GHz

-90 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 7.5 GHz to 8.5 GHz

Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

E5070B

-120 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 3 GHz

E5071B

-120 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 3 GHz

-109 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 GHz to 6 GHz

-99 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 6 GHz to 7.5 GHz

-89 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 7.5 GHz to 8.5 GHz

The crosstalk specification applies when response calibration is performed.

50 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

Test equipment

Coaxial cable with Type-N (m) connectors, 61 cm (24 in) Agilent

N6314A(p/n
8120-8862)

Type-N(m) coaxial Short termination (4 ea.) part of Agilent

85032F/54D/3
3E/50D with
Type-N adapter

2. Performance Test
Procedure
Step 1. Connect the N-N cable as shown in the following figures:
Opt. 213/214: Figure 2-10
Opt. 313/314: Figure 2-11
Opt. 413/414: Figure 2-12

Figure 2-10 Response calibration setup for crosstalk test (Opt.213/214)

Chapter 2 51
 Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

Figure 2-11 Response calibration setup for crosstalk test (Opt.313/314)

Figure 2-12 Response calibration setup for crosstalk test (Opt.413/414)

NOTE Do not touch or move the N-N cable during measurements. To do so will cause a variance
in measured values.

Step 2. Press and to initialize the E5070B/E5071B. And press - Power -

[5] - [x1] to set the power +5 dBm (FW 3.60 and above), and press - Power -
Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function (FW 3.60 and above), and press
- Service Menu - Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function (FW

52 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

3.54 and above).

Step 3. Press and select Lin Mag from display format menu.

Step 4. Set the controls as follows:

Control settings Key strokes

IF Bandwidth: 10 Hz - IF Bandwidth - - -

2. Performance Test
Averaging: ON - - (select Averaging) -

Averaging factor now is set to 16 (preset value).

Step 5. Set the test frequencies using the Segment Table as follows:

a. Press - - - - - - (select Edit Segment

Table) - .
The first "Start" frequency entry box in the Segment Sweep table will be focused.

b. Press in the ENTRY block. The softkey menu title area is displayed in blue.

c. Press - (select List Power) - to set the list Power function to ON.
The row (Power) for setting appears in the segment table.

d. Press in the ENTRY block. The window frame of the segment table is
displayed as bright.
e. For the E5070B, proceed to the next Step f. For the E5071B, skip to Step j or Step x.
E5070B

f. Press - - - to enter 300 kHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency

will be focused.
g. Press - to enter 3 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points" will be focused.
h. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 50. "Power" will be focused.
i. Press - - to set the power level to 10 dBm.

NOTE See Table 2-9 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5070B.

Table 2-9 E5070B Segment Table setting

Start Stop Points Power

1 300 kHz 3 GHz 50 10 dBm

E5071B (for serial prefix MY421, or JP1KK)

j. Press - - - to enter 300 kHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency

will be focused.
k. Press - - - - to enter 4.25 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points"
will be focused.

Chapter 2 53
 Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

l. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 50. "Power" will be focused.
m. Press - - to set the power level to 10 dBm.

n. Press - - - to focus on the "Start" frequency of the second segment.

o. Press - - - - - - - - - - - to enter
4.250000001 GHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency will be focused.
p. Press - to enter 6 GHz as the stop frequency. The "Points" will be focused.
q. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 20. "Power" will be focused.
r. Press - to set the power level to 8 dBm.

s. Press - - - to focus on the "Start" frequency of the third segment.

t. Press - - - - - - - - - - - to enter
6.000000001 GHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency will be focused.
u. Press - - - to enter 8.5 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points" will be
focused.
v. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 30. "Power" will be focused.
w. Press - to set the power level to 6 dBm.

NOTE See Table 2-10 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5071B (for serial prefix
MY421, or JP1KK).

Table 2-10 E5071B Segment Table setting (for serial prefix MY421, or JP1KK)

Start Stop Points Power

1 300 kHz 4.25 GHz 50 10 dBm

2 4.250000001 GHz 6 GHz 20 8 dBm

3 6.000000001 GHz 8.5 GHz 30 6 dBm

E5071B (for serial prefix MY422, and above)

x. Press - - - to enter 300 kHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency

will be focused.
y. Press - to enter 3 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points" will be focused.

z. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 35. "Power" will be focused.
aa. Press - - to set the power level to 10 dBm.

ab. Press - - - to focus on the "Start" frequency of the second segment.

ac. Press - - - - - - - - - - - to enter

3.000000001 GHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency will be focused.
ad. Press - - - - to enter 4.25 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points"

54 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

will be focused.
ae. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 15. "Power" will be focused.
af. Press - to set the power level to 9 dBm.

ag. Press - - - to focus on the "Start" frequency of the third segment.

ah. Press - - - - - - - - - - - to enter

4.250000001 GHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency will be focused.

2. Performance Test
ai. Press - to enter 6 GHz as the stop frequency. The "Points" will be focused.
aj. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 20. "Power" will be focused.
ak. Press - to set the power level to 7 dBm.

al. Press - - - to focus on the "Start" frequency of the fourth segment.

am.Press - - - - - - - - - - - to enter
6.000000001 GHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency will be focused.
an. Press - - - to enter 8.5 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points" will be
focused.
ao. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 30. "Power" will be focused.
ap. Press - to set the power level to 5 dBm.

NOTE See Table 2-11 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5071B (for serial prefix
MY422, and above).

Table 2-11 E5071B Segment Table setting (for serial prefix MY422, and above)

Start Stop Points Power

1 300 kHz 3 GHz 35 10 dBm

2 3.000000001 GHz 4.25 GHz 15 9 dBm

3 4.250000001 GHz 6 GHz 20 7 dBm

4 6.000000001 GHz 8.5 GHz 30 5 dBm

Step 6. Press - - - - - (select Sweep Type) - to set

the Sweep type to Segment.

Response calibration

Step 7. Press - - - - and to select Cal Kit.

Step 8. Press - - and to select 85032F.

NOTE If Cal Kit is set to 85032F*, press , , - - - - to

select Restore Cal Kit.

Chapter 2 55
 Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

Step 9. Press - and to select Calibrate function.

Step 10. Press - and to select Response (Thru) calibration.

Step 11. Press to go down to Select Ports menu.

Step 12. Select 2-1 (S21) for the option 213/214/313/314 instruments and 3-2 (S32) for the option
413/414 instruments as shown in the first row in Table 2-12.
Table 2-12 Select Ports settings for response calibration

Option

213/214 313/314 413/414

1 2-1(S21) 2-1(S21) 3-2 (S32)

2 1-2 (S12) 1-2 (S12) 2-3 (S23)

3 Not required 3-2 (S32) 4-1 (S41)

4 Not required 2-3 (S23) 1-4 (S14)

Step 13. Press and to perform Thru calibration. Wait until the calibration is completed.

Step 14. Press - and to perform Done.

Step 15. Change Select Ports setting as shown in the second row in Table 2-12.

Step 16. Perform Step 13and 14.

Step 17. For the option 213/214 instruments, skip to Step 20. For the option 313/314/413/414,
proceed to Step 18.

Response calibration for options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only

Step 18. Connect the test equipment (N-N cable) as shown in Figure 2-13 (Opt. 313/314) and Figure
2-14 (Opt. 413/414).

56 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

Figure 2-13 Response calibration setup for crosstalk test (Opt.313/314)

2. Performance Test
Figure 2-14 Response calibration setup for crosstalk test (Opt.413/414)

Step 19. Perform the response calibration for each of the Select Ports settings shown in the third
and fourth rows in Table 2-12.

Crosstalk measurement

Step 20. Press and verify that Correction is set to ON.

Step 21. Disconnect the N-N cable and connect an N-type coaxial Short termination to each test port
as shown in the following figures:

Chapter 2 57
 Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

Opt. 213/214: Figure 2-15

Opt. 313/314: Figure 2-16
Opt. 413/414: Figure 2-17

Figure 2-15 Crosstalk test setup (Opt. 213/214)

Figure 2-16 Crosstalk test setup (Opt. 313/314)

58 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

Figure 2-17 Crosstalk test setup (Opt. 413/414)

2. Performance Test
Step 22. Program or download the VBA test program shown in Program 2-1.

NOTE Also set a UserForm window to enable the test result output data to be displayed. An
example of the UserForm window is shown in Figure 2-18. Refer to the Agilent
E5070B/E5071B VBA Programmer's Guide for the UserForm setup procedure.

Step 23. Press and select the following S-parameter from menu:
Option 213/214/313/314: S21
Option 413/414: S32

These parameters are shown in the first row in Table 2-13.

Table 2-13 S-parameter settings for crosstalk tests.

Option

213/214 313/314 413/414

1 S21 S21 S32

2 S12 S12 S23

3 Not required S32 S41

4 Not required S23 S14

Step 24. Press - - - - - (select Averaging Restart) to restart

the swept measurements. Wait until a trace for the average of 16 swept measurements is
displayed.

Chapter 2 59
 Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

NOTE The number of averaging times is displayed in the status bar of the measurement channel
window.

Step 25. Press and to set the trigger operation to Hold mode.

Step 26. Press to execute the test program. This test program searches the maximum
point of the trace for each of the following frequency ranges.

E5070B: 3 MHz to 3 GHz (one range only)

E5071B: 3 MHZ to 3 GHz, 3 GHz to 6 GHz, 6 GHz to 7.5 GHz and 7.5 GHz to
8.5 GHz (four ranges)

The test results are represented in dB and displayed in the VBA UserForm window as
shown in the display example below.

Figure 2-18 VBA UserForm window display example

Step 27. Read the maximum value(s) and record them in the performance test record ("Test result
[dB]" column for the crosstalk test).

Step 28. Press Exit button on the CROSSTALK TEST window.

Step 29. Press - - - to select the Continuous trigger mode.

Step 30. Change the S-parameter setting in accordance with Table 2-13 (the second through fourth
rows) and perform Step 24 through Step 29.

Crosstalk test program

Coding procedure:

Step 1. Press key.

Step 2. Press to activate VBA Editor function.

Step 3. Click Insert and select Module from pull-down menu. VBA Project - Module1 [Code]
window screen for coding a program will be displayed.

Step 4. Input the test program shown below.

Step 5. Save the test program with a proper file name.

Program 2-1 Test Program:

Sub Main()

60 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

Dim Ver As String

Dim MaxValA As Variant
Dim MaxValB As Variant, MaxValC As Variant, MaxValD As Variant,
MaxValE As Variant

Ver = Name

2. Performance Test
If Ver = "E5070B" Then
SCPI.CALCulate(1).PARameter(1).SELect
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.TYPE = "MAX"
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 3000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 3000000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValA = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

frmCrossTalk1.txtVal.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValA(0)))

frmCrossTalk1.Show

ElseIf Ver = "E5071B" Then

SCPI.CALCulate(1).PARameter(1).SELect
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.TYPE = "MAX"
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 3000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 3000000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValB = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 3000000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 6000000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValC = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 6000000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 7500000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True

Chapter 2 61
Performance Tests
5. CROSSTALK TEST

SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValD = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 7500000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 8500000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValE = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

frmCrossTalk2.txtVal1.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValB(0)))

frmCrossTalk2.txtVal2.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValC(0)))
frmCrossTalk2.txtVal3.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValD(0)))
frmCrossTalk2.txtVal4.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValE(0)))
frmCrossTalk2.Show

End If

End Sub

Function Log10(X)

Log10 = Log(X) / Log(10)

End Function

62 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

Description
This test checks the system dynamic range for the receiver ports of the E5070B/E5071B.
The system dynamic range is tested by performing an "Isolation" measurement 16 times
with segment sweep points for specified frequency ranges (after the response and isolation

2. Performance Test
calibrations are performed) and calculating the RMS deviation value from the 16
measurement data for each sweep frequency point. The maximum RMS deviation value in
each frequency range is extracted to determine the system dynamic range performance.

Specification

Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

E5070B

95 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 1.5 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

97 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 1.5 GHz to 3 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

120 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 1.5 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

122 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 1.5 GHz to 3 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

E5071B

95 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 1.5 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

97 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 1.5 GHz to 4 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

93 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 4 GHz to 6 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

88 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 6 GHz to 7.5 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

81 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 7.5 GHz to 8.5 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

120 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 1.5 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

122 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 1.5 GHz to 4 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

118 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 4 GHz to 6 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

113 dB@ 23 ± 5 °C, 6 GHz to 7.5 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

106 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 7.5 GHz to 8.5 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

E5070B

95 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 1.5 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

97 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 1.5 GHz to 3 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

Chapter 2 63
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

120 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 1.5 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

122 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 1.5 GHz to 3 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

E5071B

95 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 1.5 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

97 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 1.5 GHz to 3 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

96 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 GHz to 4 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

92 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 4 GHz to 6 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

87 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 6 GHz to 7.5 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

80 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 7.5 GHz to 8.5 GHz, IFBW 3 kHz

120 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 MHz to 1.5 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

122 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 1.5 GHz to 3 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

121 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 3 GHz to 4 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

117 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 4 GHz to 6 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

112 dB@ 23 ± 5 °C, 6 GHz to 7.5 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

105 dB @ 23 ± 5 °C, 7.5 GHz to 8.5 GHz, IFBW 10 Hz

NOTE The specification applies when the response and isolation calibration is performed and
averaging factor is 16.

Test equipment

Coaxial cable with Type-N (m) connectors, 61 cm (24 in) Agilent

N6314A(p/n
8120-8862)

Type-N(m) 50 Ω Load termination (2 ea.) part of

Agilent
85032F/54D
/33E/50D
with Type-N
adapter

Procedure
Step 1. Connect a load termination to each test port as shown in the following figures:
Opt. 213/214: Figure 2-19
Opt. 313/314: Figure 2-20
Opt. 413/414: Figure 2-21

64 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

Figure 2-19 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test (Opt. 213/214)

2. Performance Test
Figure 2-20 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test (Opt. 313/314)

Chapter 2 65
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

Figure 2-21 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test (Opt. 413/414)

Step 2. Press and to initialize the E5070B/E5071B. And press - Power -

[5] - [x1] to set the power +5 dBm (FW 3.60 and above), and press - Power -
Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function (FW 3.60 and above), and press
- Service Menu - Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function (FW
3.54 and above).

Step 3. Press and select Lin Mag from display format menu.

Step 4. Set the controls as follows:

Control settings Key strokes

IF Bandwidth: 10 Hz - IF Bandwidth - - -

Averaging: ON - - (select Averaging) -

Averaging factor now is set to 16 (preset value).

Step 5. Set the test frequencies using the Segment Table as follows:

a. Press - - - - - - (select Edit Segment

Table) - .
The first "Start" frequency entry box in the Segment Sweep table will be focused.

b. Press in the ENTRY block. The softkey menu title area is displayed in blue.

c. Press - (select List Power) - to set the List Power function to ON.
The row (Power) for setting appears in the segment table.

d. Press in the ENTRY block. The window frame of the segment table is

66 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

displayed as bright.
e. For the E5070B, proceed to the next Step f. For the E5071B, skip to Step j or Step x.
E5070B

f. Press - - - to enter 300 kHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency

will be focused.
g. Press - to enter 3 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points" will be focused.
h. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 50. "Power" will be focused.

2. Performance Test
i. Press - - to set the power level to 10 dBm.

NOTE See Table 2-14 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5070B.

Table 2-14 E5070B Segment Table setting

Start Stop Points Power

1 300 kHz 3 GHz 50 10 dBm

E5071B (for serial prefix MY421, or JP1KK)

j. Press - - - to enter 300 kHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency
will be focused.
k. Press - - - - to enter 4.25 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points"
will be focused.
l. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 50. "Power" will be focused.
m. Press - - to set the power level to 10 dBm.

n. Press - - - to focus on the "Start" frequency of the second segment.

o. Press - - - - - - - - - - - to enter
4.250000001 GHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency will be focused.
p. Press - to enter 6 GHz as the stop frequency. The "Points" will be focused.
q. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 20. "Power" will be focused.
r. Press - to set the power level to 8 dBm.

s. Press - - - to focus on the "Start" frequency of the third segment.

t. Press - - - - - - - - - - - to enter
6.000000001 GHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency will be focused.
u. Press - - - to enter 8.5 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points" will be
focused.
v. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 30. "Power" will be focused.
w. Press - to set the power level to 6 dBm.

Chapter 2 67
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

NOTE See Table 2-15 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5071B (for serial prefix
MY421, or JP1KK).

Table 2-15 E5071B Segment Table setting (for serial prefix MY421, or JP1KK)

Start Stop Points Power

1 300 kHz 4.25 GHz 50 10 dBm

2 4.250000001 GHz 6 GHz 20 8 dBm

3 6.000000001 GHz 8.5 GHz 30 6 dBm

E5071B (for serial prefix MY422, and above)

x. Press - - - to enter 300 kHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency
will be focused.
y. Press - to enter 3 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points" will be focused.

z. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 35. "Power" will be focused.
aa. Press - - to set the power level to 10 dBm.

ab. Press - - - to focus on the "Start" frequency of the second segment.

ac. Press - - - - - - - - - - - to enter

3.000000001 GHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency will be focused.
ad. Press - - - - to enter 4.25 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points"
will be focused.
ae. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 15. "Power" will be focused.
af. Press - to set the power level to 9 dBm.

ag. Press - - - to focus on the "Start" frequency of the third segment.

ah. Press - - - - - - - - - - - to enter

4.250000001 GHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency will be focused.
ai. Press - to enter 6 GHz as the stop frequency. The "Points" will be focused.
aj. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 20. "Power" will be focused.
ak. Press - to set the power level to 7 dBm.

al. Press - - - to focus on the "Start" frequency of the fourth segment.

am.Press - - - - - - - - - - - to enter
6.000000001 GHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency will be focused.
an. Press - - - to enter 8.5 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points" will be
focused.
ao. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 30. "Power" will be focused.

68 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

ap. Press - to set the power level to 5 dBm.

NOTE See Table 2-16 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5071B (for serial prefix
MY422, and above).

Table 2-16 E5071B Segment Table setting (for serial prefix MY422, and above)

Start Stop Points Power

1 300 kHz 3 GHz 35 10 dBm

2. Performance Test
2 3.000000001 GHz 4.25 GHz 15 9 dBm

3 4.250000001 GHz 6 GHz 20 7 dBm

4 6.000000001 GHz 8.5 GHz 30 5 dBm

Step 6. Press - - - - - (select Sweep Type) - to set

the Sweep type to Segment.

Response (Thru) calibration

Step 7. Press - - - - and to select Cal Kit.

Step 8. Press - - and to select 85032F.

NOTE If Cal Kit is set to 85032F*, press , , - - - - to

select Restore Cal Kit.

Step 9. Press - and to select Calibrate function.

Step 10. Press - and to select Response (Thru) calibration.

Step 11. Press to go down to Select Ports menu.

Step 12. Select 2-1 (21) for the option 213/214 instruments and 3-2 (S32) for the option
313/314/413/414 instruments as shown in the first row in Table 2-17.
Table 2-17 Select Ports settings for response calibration

Option

213/214 313/314 413/414

1 2-1(S21) 3-2 (S32) 3-2 (S32)

2 1-2 (S12) 2-3 (S23) 2-3 (S23)

3 Not required 2-1 (S21) 4-1 (S41)

4 Not required 1-2 (S12) 1-4 (S14)

Step 13. Press - and to perform Isolation calibration. Wait until the calibration is
completed.

Chapter 2 69
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

Step 14. Disconnect the load and connect the N-N cable as shown in the following figures.
Opt. 213/214: Figure 2-22
Opt. 313/314: Figure 2-23
Opt. 413/414: Figure 2-24

Figure 2-22 Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup (Opt. 213/214)

Figure 2-23 Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup (Opt. 313/314)

70 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

Figure 2-24 Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup (Opt. 413/414)

2. Performance Test
NOTE To avoid possible variance in measured values, do not touch or move the N-N cable during
measurements.

Step 15. Press and to perform Thru calibration. Wait until the calibration is completed.

Step 16. Press - - to perform Done.

Step 17. Press - - to select Select Ports (in reference to the position of Done) and
press .

Step 18. Change Select Ports setting as shown in the second row in Table 2-17.

Step 19. Press - to perform Thru calibration. Wait until the calibration is completed.

Step 20. Disconnect the N-N cable and connect the Load termination to each test port as shown in
the following figures.
Opt. 213/214: Figure 2-19
Opt. 313/314: Figure 2-20
Opt. 413/414: Figure 2-21

Step 21. Press and to perform Isolation calibration.

Step 22. Press and to perform Done.

System dynamic rang measurement for select ports setting as shown in the first and
second row in Table 2-17

Step 23. Press and verify that Correction is set to ON.

Chapter 2 71
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

Step 24. Press - - - (select Averaging) - to set the Averaging function

to OFF.

NOTE Be sure to set the Averaging function to OFF.

Step 25. Program or download the test program shown in Program 2-2.

NOTE Also set a UserForm window to enable the test result output data to be displayed. An
example of the UserForm window is shown in Figure 2-25. Refer to the Agilent
E5070B/E5071B VBA Programmer's Guide for the UserForm setup procedure.

Step 26. Press and select the following S-parameter from menu:
Option 213/214: S21
Option 313/314/413/414: S32

These parameters are shown in the first row in Table 2-18.

Table 2-18 S-parameter settings for system dynamic range test

Option

213/214 313/314 413/414

1 S21 S32 S32

2 S12 S23 S23

3 Not required S21 S41

4 Not required S12 S14

Step 27. Press to run the test program. This test program repeats a swept measurement 16
times, calculates the RMS deviation from the 16 measurement values at each sweep
frequency point, and extracts the maximum deviation value for each of the following
frequency ranges:

E5070B: 3 MHz to 1.5 GHz and 1.5 GHz to 3 GHz (2 ranges)

E5071B: (for serial prefix MY421, or JP1KK)

3 MHz to 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz to 4 GHz, 4 GHz to 6 GHz, 6 GHz to 7.5
GHz and 7.5 GHz to 8 GHz (5 ranges)

E5071B: (for serial prefix MY422, and above)

3 MHz to 1.5 GHz, 1.5 GHz to 3 GHz, 3 GHz to 4 GHz, 4 GHz to 6

GHz, 6 GHz to 7.5 GHz and 7.5 GHz to 8 GHz (6 ranges)

The maximum deviation value in each frequency range is represented in dB and displayed
in the VBA UserForm window as shown in the display example below.

72 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

Figure 2-25 VBA UserForm window display example

2. Performance Test
Step 28. Record the maximum RMS deviation values in the performance test record ("Test result
[dB]" column for the system dynamic range test).

Step 29. Press Exit button on the SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST window.

Step 30. Press - - - to change the IF Bandwidth setting to 3 kHz and

perform Step 27 through 29.

Step 31. Press - - - - to change the IF Bandwidth setting to 10 Hz ,

change the S-parameter setting as shown in the second row in Table 2-18 and perform Step
27 through 30.

Step 32. For the option 313/314/413/414, proceed to Step 33.

Response (Thru) calibration for options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only

Step 33. Connect the Load termination to each test port as shown in Figure 2-26 (Opt. 313/314) and
Figure 2-27 (Opt. 413/414).

Figure 2-26 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test (Opt. 313/314)

Chapter 2 73
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

Figure 2-27 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test (Opt. 413/414)

Step 34. Set the controls as follows:

Control settings Key strokes

IF Bandwidth: 10 Hz - IF Bandwidth - - -

Averaging: ON - - (select Averaging) -

Averaging factor now is set to 16 (preset value).

Step 35. Press - and to select Calibrate function.

Step 36. Press - and to select Response (Thru) calibration.

Step 37. Press to go down to Select Ports menu.

Step 38. Select 2-1 (21) for the option 313/314 instruments and 4-1 (S41) for the option 413/414
instruments as shown in the third row in Table 2-19.
Table 2-19 Select Ports settings for response calibration

Option

213/214 313/314 413/414

1 2-1(S21) 3-2 (S32) 3-2 (S32)

2 1-2 (S12) 2-3 (S23) 2-3 (S23)

3 Not required 2-1 (S21) 4-1 (S41)

74 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

Table 2-19 Select Ports settings for response calibration

Option

213/214 313/314 413/414

4 Not required 1-2 (S12) 1-4 (S14)

Step 39. Press - and to perform Isolation calibration. Wait until the calibration is

2. Performance Test
comleted.

Step 40. Disconnect the load and connect the N-N cable as shown in the following figures.
Opt. 313/314: Figure 2-28
Opt. 413/414: Figure 2-29

Figure 2-28 Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup (Opt. 313/314)

Chapter 2 75
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

Figure 2-29 Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup (Opt. 413/414)

Step 41. Press and to perform Thru calibration. Wait until the calibration is completed.

Step 42. Press - - to perform Done.

Step 43. Press - - to select Select Ports (in reference to the position of Done) and
press .

Step 44. Change Select Ports setting as shown in the fourth row in Table 2-19.

Step 45. Press - to perform Thru calibration.

Step 46. Disconnect the N-N cable and connect the Load termination to each test port as shown in
the following figures.
Opt. 313/314: Figure 2-26
Opt. 413/414: Figure 2-27

Step 47. Press and to perform Isolation calibration.

Step 48. Press and to perform Done.

System dynamic rang measurement for select ports setting as shown in the third and
fourth row in Table 2-19

Step 49. Press and verify that Correction is set to ON.

Step 50. Press - - - (select Averaging) - to set the Averaging function

to OFF.

NOTE Be sure to set the Averaging function to OFF.

76 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

Step 51. Press and select the following S-parameter from menu:
Option 313/314: S21
Option 413/414: S41

These parameters are shown in the third row in Table 2-20.

Table 2-20 S-parameter settings for system dynamic range test

Option

2. Performance Test
213/214 313/314 413/414

1 S21 S32 S32

2 S12 S23 S23

3 Not required S21 S41

4 Not required S12 S14

Step 52. Press to run the test program.

Figure 2-30 VBA UserForm window display example

Step 53. Record the maximum RMS deviation values in the performance test record ("Test result
[dB]" column for the system dynamic range test).

Step 54. Press Exit button on the SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST window.

Step 55. Press - - - to change the IF Bandwidth setting to 3 kHz and

perform Step 52 through 54.

Step 56. Press - - - - to change the IF Bandwidth setting to 10 Hz ,

change the S-parameter setting as shown in the fourth row in Table 2-20and perform Step
52 through 55.

System Dynamic Range test program

Coding procedure:

Step 1. Press key.

Step 2. Press to activate VBA Editor function.

Chapter 2 77
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

Step 3. Click Insert and select Module from pull-down menu. VBA Project - Module1 [Code]
window screen for coding a program will be displayed.

Step 4. Create the test program. The sample program is show below. (if serial prefix MY422, and
above)

Step 5. Save the test program with a proper file name.

Program 2-2 Test program:

Sub Main()

Dim Val(15) As Variant, X() As Double, Y() As Double, Rms As

Variant
Dim I As Integer, J As Integer, K As Integer, Dmy As Long
Dim Ver As String, Buff As String
Dim MaxValA As Variant, MaxValB As Variant
Dim MaxValC As Variant, MaxValD As Variant, MaxValE As Variant,
MaxValF As Variant, MaxValG As Variant, MaxValH As Variant

Ver = Name

If Ver = "E5070B" Then

Count = 99
ReDim X(Count)
ReDim Y(Count)

ElseIf Ver = "E5071B" Then

Count = 199
ReDim X(Count)
ReDim Y(Count)
End If

SCPI.TRIGger.SEQuence.Source = "BUS"
SCPI.INITiate(1).CONTinuous = True

For I = 0 To 15
SCPI.TRIGger.SEQuence.SINGle
Dmy = SCPI.IEEE4882.OPC
SCPI.CALCulate(1).PARameter(1).SELect
Val(I) = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.DATA.FDATa
Next I

78 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

For J = 0 To Count
X(J) = Val(0)(J) ^ 2
Next J

For J = 0 To Count
For I = 1 To 15

2. Performance Test
X(J) = X(J) + Val(I)(J) ^ 2
Next I
Y(J) = Sqr(X(J) / 16)
Next J

SCPI.INITiate(1).CONTinuous = False
Rms = CVar(Y)
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.DATA.FDATa = Rms
SCPI.DISPlay.WINDow(1).TRACe.Y.SCALe.AUTO

If Ver = "E5070B" Then

SCPI.CALCulate(1).PARameter(1).SELect
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.TYPE = "MAX"
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 3000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 1500000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValA = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 1500000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 3000000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValB = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

frmDynamicRange1.txtVal1.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValA(0)))

frmDynamicRange1.txtVal2.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValB(0)))
frmDynamicRange1.Show

ElseIf Ver = "E5071B" Then

SCPI.CALCulate(1).PARameter(1).SELect

Chapter 2 79
Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.TYPE = "MAX"
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 3000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 1500000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValC = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 1500000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 3000000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValD = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 3000000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 4000000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValE = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 4000000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 6000000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValF = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 6000000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 7500000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValG = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STARt = 7500000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STOP = 8500000000#
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DOMain.STATe = True
SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.EXECute
MaxValH = SCPI.CALCulate(1).SELected.Function.DATA

frmDynamicRange2.txtVal1.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValC(0)))

80 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
6. SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST

frmDynamicRange2.txtVal2.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValD(0)))

frmDynamicRange2.txtVal3.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValE(0)))
frmDynamicRange2.txtVal4.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValF(0)))
frmDynamicRange2.txtVal5.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValG(0)))
frmDynamicRange2.txtVal6.Text = CSng(20 * Log10(MaxValH(0)))
frmDynamicRange2.Show

2. Performance Test
Else
Buff = MsgBox("Error: This program is designed for the
E5070B/E5071B, then please use the corresponding programs.",
vbOKOnly, "SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST")

End If

End Sub

Chapter 2 81
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

Description
This test checks the dynamic accuracy of the E5070B/E5071B. The dynamic accuracy is
tested at 1.195 GHz for each receiver port using the Agilent Z5623A (with option H01)
Dynamic Accuracy Test Kit. A block diagram of the Z5623A is shown in Figure 2-31. The
1.195 GHz source signal of the E5070B/E5071B goes through the Z5623A's first
attenuator variable from 0 dB to 11 dB in 1 dB steps and second attenuator variable up to
100 dB in 10 dB steps and is measured with the receiver port. The test procedure checks
the measured receiver-input power for each 5 dB increment in the range from 10 dBm to
100 dBm. The ratios of the measured receiver-input powers to the reference input level of
-10 dBm are calculated and compared to the attenuation values of the Z5623A. The 1.195
GHz signal flow is split with a power splitter present between the two attenuators in the
Z5623A and measured with an external power meter to calibrate the attenuated power
level.

NOTE Since the dynamic accuracy does not have frequency dependence, this test is performed at
1.195 GHz only.

Table 2-21 Dynamic accuracy specification: @ 23° ± 5°C

Input level Dynamic Input level Dynamic

(dBm) accuracy (dBm) accuracy
(dB) (dB)

10 0.207 -50 0.091

5 0.075 -55 0.106

0 0.042 -60 0.125

-5 0.031 -65 0.151

-10 0.024 -70 0.189

-15 0.030 -75 0.248

-20 0.035 -80 0.346

-25 0.040 -85 0.509

-30 0.045 -90 0.785

-35 0.056 -95 1.248

-40 0.067 -100 2.008

-45 0.078

Test Equipment

Power meter Agilent E4419A/B

82 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

Power sensor Agilent 8482A

Dynamic Accuracy Test Kit Agilent Z5623A w/Opt.

H01

6 dB fixed attenuator Agilent 8491A w/Opt. 006

and H60

Coaxial cable with N-type (m) connectors, 61 cm (24 Agilent N6314A (p/n
in), 2 ea. 8120-8862)

2. Performance Test
GPIB controller (or PC with GPIB Interface Card)

GPIB Interconnection Cable Agilent 10833A/B

Procedure
Step 1. Connect the power sensor to the power meter. Calibrate the power meter for the power
sensor used.

Step 2. Connect the test equipment as shown in the following figures:

Option 213/214: Figure 2-32
Option 313/314: Figure 2-33
Option 413/414: Figure 2-34

Figure 2-31 Agilent Z5623A block diagram

Chapter 2 83
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

Figure 2-32 Dynamic accuracy test setup (Opt. 213/214)

Figure 2-33 Dynamic accuracy test setup (Opt. 313/314)

84 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

Figure 2-34 Dynamic accuracy test setup (Opt. 413/414)

2. Performance Test
NOTE To avoid possible variance in measured values, do not touch or move the N-N cable during
measurements.

NOTE Do not touch the power sensor during measurements.

Power meter zero adjustment

NOTE This adjustment is required to subtract residual noise power of the Z5623A from the
subsequent signal power measurements.

Step 3. Set the first attenuator (A1) of the Z5623A to 11 dB and the second attenuator (A2) to 110
dB by executing the following GPIB control command:

GPIB:

OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=11"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=110"

Step 4. Press and to initialize the E5070B/E5071B. And press - Power -

Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function (FW 3.60 and above), and press
- Servise - Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function (FW 3.54
and above).

Chapter 2 85
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

Step 5. Set the controls as follows:

Control settings Key strokes

Center frequency: 50 MHz - - -

Frequency span: 0 Hz - -

IF Bandwidth: 10 Hz - - - -

Source power: -4 dBm - - - -

Step 6. Wait for the power meter reading to settle and perform zero adjustment of the power meter.

Dynamic accuracy tests at -10 dBm to -100dBm

Step 7. Press and select Log Mag from display format menu.

Step 8. Set the controls as follows:

Control settings Key strokes

Center frequency: 1.195 - - - - - -

GHz

Frequency span: 0 Hz - -

Number of points: 15 - - - - (select Points )

- - - -

Step 9. Press - - - - - - - - to set

Statistics function to ON.

Step 10. Set Port Char function to OFF in accordance with the following procedure:

a. Press - - - - - - - - - (select
Service Menu), .

b. Press - - - - - - (select Service Functions),

.
c. The E5070B/E5071B will once prompt you a password entry for the access to the
Service Functions. Enter the password: kid

d. Press - (select System Calibration), .

e. Press - - (select Port Char), to set the Port Char to OFF.

Step 11. Perform Return and press - (select Measure (SVC)), .

Step 12. Select T2 from the Measure (SVC) menu.

Step 13. Press and select S21 from S-parameter menu.

Step 14. Set the first attenuator (A1) of the Z5623A to 0 dB and the second attenuator (A2) to 10 dB

86 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

by executing the following GPIB control command:

GPIB:

OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=0"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=10"

Step 15. Adjust the source power for 0 dBm on the power meter display. Wait for power meter
reading to settle when verifying the adjustment result.

2. Performance Test
NOTE Since the source power resolution is 0.05 dB, adjust for the nearest possible value to 0
dBm.

Step 16. Press - - to make a Single sweep measurement.

Step 17. Record the value of the source power setting in the calculation sheet ("Power setting [dB]"
column for the dynamic accuracy test). The record starts from DA10 row.

Step 18. Record the power meter reading in the calculation sheet ("Pm [dB]" column).

Step 19. Read the mean value of the T2(S21) displayed in the upper left corner of the graphic
display and record it in the calculation sheet ("Tx [dB]" column).

Step 20. Set the first attenuator (A1) of the Z5623A to 5 dB by executing the following GPIB
control command:

GPIB:

OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=5"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=10"

The total attenuation for the A1 and A2 attenuators is 15 dB.

Step 21. Perform Step 16 through 19

Step 22. Calculate the dynamic accuracy for -15 dBm using the following equation:

D.A. = ( Tx@ DA15) - ( Tx @ DA10) - (Pm @ DA15) + (Pm @ DA10)

NOTE The records for -10 dBm are used as the reference values in the dynamic accuracy
calculation.

Step 23. Record the calculated value in the calculation sheet ("Running D.A. [dB]" column for
DA15).

Step 24. Record the same value in the "True D.A. [dB]" column in the calculation sheet.

Step 25. Set the first attenuator (A1) of the Z5623A to 10 dB by executing the following GPIB
control command:

GPIB:

OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=10"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=10"

Chapter 2 87
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

The total attenuation for the A1 and A2 attenuators is 20 dB.

Step 26. Perform Step 16 through 19.

Step 27. Calculate the dynamic accuracy for -20 dBm using the following equation:

D.A. = ( Tx @ DA20) - ( Tx @ DA10) - (Pm @ DA20) + (Pm @ DA10)

Step 28. Record the calculated value in the calculation sheet ("Running D.A. [dB]" and "True D.A.
[dB]" columns for DA20).

Step 29. Set the first attenuator (A1) of the Z5623A to 0 dB and the second attenuator (A2) to 20 dB
by executing the following GPIB control command:

GPIB:

OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=0"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=20"

NOTE This attenuator state is named DA20a. The following Steps 30 through 32 are performed to
equalize the receiver port input levels for the DA20 and DA20a.

Step 30. Perform Step 13 through 24.

Step 31. Calculate the difference in Tx [dB] values for the DA20 and DA20a by using the following
equation:

Δ ( Tx [dB]) = ( Tx [dB] @ DA20a) - ( Tx [dB] @ DA20)

Step 32. Press - - - to make a Continuous sweep measurement.

Step 33. Adjust the source power for the following value on the power meter display.

Target value = (Pm [db] @ DA20a) - Δ ( Tx [dB])

NOTE It will be possible to promptly approximate the source power to the target value by
decreasing the source power setting by Δ ( Tx ) from that for the DA20.

NOTE After this adjustment is performed, the state is named DA20b.

Step 34. Perform Step 16 through 19.

Step 35. Set the first attenuator (A1) of the Z5623A to 5 dB by executing the following GPIB
control command:

GPIB:

OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=5"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=20"

Step 36. Perform Step 16 through 19.

Step 37. Calculate the dynamic accuracy for -25 dBm using the following equation:

D.A. = ( Tx @ DA25) - ( Tx @ DA20b) - (Pm @ DA25) + (Pm @ DA20b)

88 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

Step 38. Record the calculated D.A. in the calculation sheet ("Running D.A. [dB]" column for
DA25).

Step 39. Calculate the true dynamic accuracy using the following equation:

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA25) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA20)

NOTE When the A2 decade attenuator setting is increased from X dB to X+10 dB, calculate the
True D.A. value as follows:

2. Performance Test
True D.A. (X+10) = Running D.A. (X+10) + True D.A. (X)

Where True D.A. (X+10): True D.A. value when A2=X+10 dB,

Running D.A. (X+10): Running D.A. value when A2=X+10 dB

True D.A. (X): True D.A. value when A1=10 dB and A2=X dB

Step 40. Record the true D.A. in the calculation sheet ("True D.A." column for DA25).

Step 41. Set the first attenuator (A1) of the Z5623A to 10 dB by executing the following GPIB
control command:

GPIB:

OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=10"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=20"

Step 42. Perform Step 16 through 19.

Step 43. Calculate the dynamic accuracy for -30 dBm using the following equation:

D.A. = ( Tx @ DA30) - ( Tx @ DA20b) - (Pm @ DA30) + (Pm @ DA20b)

Step 44. Record the calculated D.A. in the calculation sheet ("Running D.A. [dB]" column for
DA30).

Step 45. Calculate the true dynamic accuracy using the following equation:

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA30) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA20)

Step 46. Record the true D.A. in the calculation sheet ("True D.A." column for DA30).

Step 47. Subsequently perform Step 29 through 45 for the attenuator settings of 35 dB to 100 dB
(DA30a to DA100) shown in Table 2-22.
Table 2-22 Z5623A attenuator settings

A1 setting A2 setting GPIB command

[dB] [dB]

DA10 0 10 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=0"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=10"

DA15 5 10 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=5"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=10"

Chapter 2 89
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

Table 2-22 Z5623A attenuator settings

A1 setting A2 setting GPIB command

[dB] [dB]

DA20 10 10 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=10"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=10"

DA20a 0 20 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=0"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=20"

DA25 5 20 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=5"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=20"

DA30 10 20 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=10"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=20"

DA30a 0 30 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=0"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=30"

DA35 5 30 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=5"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=30"

DA40 10 30 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=10"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=30"

DA40a 0 40 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=0"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=40"

DA45 5 40 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=5"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=40"

DA50 10 40 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=10"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=40"

DA50a 0 50 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=0"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=50"

DA55 5 50 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=5"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=50"

DA60 10 50 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=10"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=50"

DA60a 0 60 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=0"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=60"

90 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

Table 2-22 Z5623A attenuator settings

A1 setting A2 setting GPIB command

[dB] [dB]

DA65 5 60 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=5"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=60"

DA70 10 60 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=10"

2. Performance Test
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=60"

DA70a 0 70 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=0"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=70"

DA75 5 70 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=5"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=70"

DA80 10 70 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=10"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=70"

DA80a 0 80 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=0"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=80"

DA85 5 80 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=5"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=80"

DA90 10 80 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=10"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=80"

DA90a 0 90 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=0"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=90"

DA95 5 90 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=5"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=90"

DA100 10 90 OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=10"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=90"

Dynamic accuracy tests at -10 dBm to10 dBm

Step 48. Set the first attenuator (A1) of the Z5623A to 10 dB and the second attenuator (A2) to 0 dB
by executing the following GPIB control command:

GPIB:

OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=10"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=0"

Step 49. Adjust the source power for -10 dBm on the power meter display. Wait for power meter

Chapter 2 91
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

reading to settle when verifying the adjustment result.

NOTE Since the source power resolution is 0.05 dB, adjust for the nearest possible value to -10
dBm.

Step 50. Perform Step 16 through 19.

Step 51. Set the first attenuator (A1) of the Z5623A to 5 dB by executing the following GPIB
control command:

GPIB:

OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=5"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=0"

Step 52. Perform Step 16 through 19.

Step 53. Calculate the dynamic accuracy for -5 dBm using the following equation:

D.A. = ( Tx @ DA5) - ( Tx @ DA10) - (Pm @ DA5) + (Pm @ DA10)

Step 54. Record the calculated D.A. in the calculation sheet ("Running D.A. [dB]" and "True D.A.
[dB]" columns for DA5).

Step 55. Set the first attenuator (A1) of the Z5623A to 0 dB by executing the following GPIB
control command:

GPIB:

OUTPUT 712; "amp_in"

OUTPUT 712; "at_a=0"
OUTPUT 712; "at_b=0"

Step 56. Perform Step 16 through 19.

Step 57. Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 0 dBm using the following equation:

D.A. = ( Tx @ DA0) - ( Tx @ DA10) - (Pm @ DA0) + (Pm @ DA10)

Step 58. Record the calculated D.A. in the calculation sheet ("Running D.A. [dB]" and "True D.A.
[dB]" columns for DA0).

Step 59. Set source power to 1dBm.

Step 60. Adjust the source power for 5 dBm on the power meter display. Wait for power meter
reading to settle when verifying the adjustment result.

NOTE Since the source power resolution is 0.05 dB, adjust for the nearest possible value to 5
dBm.

Step 61. Perform Step 16 through 19.

Step 62. Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 5 dBm using the following equation:

D.A. = ( Tx @ DA+5) - ( Tx @ DA10) - (Pm @ DA+5) + (Pm @ DA10)

Step 63. Record the true D.A. in the calculation sheet ("True D.A." column for DA+5).

92 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

Step 64. Set source power to 6dBm.

Step 65. Adjust the source power for 10 dBm on the power meter display. Wait for power meter
reading to settle when verifying the adjustment result.

NOTE Since the source power resolution is 0.05 dB, adjust for the nearest possible value to 10
dBm.

Step 66. Perform Step 16 through 19.

2. Performance Test
Step 67. Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 10 dBm using the following equation:

D.A. = (Tx @ DA+10) - ( Tx @ DA10) - (Pm @ DA+10) + (Pm @ DA10)

Step 68. Record the true D.A. in the calculation sheet ("True D.A." column for DA+10).

Dynamic accuracy tests for other test ports

Step 69. Connect the test equipment and select S-parameter in accordance with Table 2-23.

Step 70. Perform Step 10 through 67 for each test setup and S-parameter shown in Table 2-23.
Table 2-23 Dynamic accuracy test setups and S-parameter settings

S-Parameter Measure Test setup

setting (SVC)

Opt. 213/214 Opt. 313/314 Opt. 413/414

S12 T1 Figure 2-35 Figure 2-36 Figure 2-38

S31 T3 Not required Figure 2-37 Figure 2-39

S41 T4 Not required Not required Figure 2-40

Chapter 2 93
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

Figure 2-35 Dynamic accuracy test setup (Opt. 213/214)

Figure 2-36 Dynamic accuracy test setup (Opt. 313/314)

94 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

Figure 2-37 Dynamic accuracy test setup (Opt. 313/314)

2. Performance Test
Figure 2-38 Dynamic accuracy test setup (Opt. 413/414)

Chapter 2 95
 Performance Tests
7. DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST

Figure 2-39 Dynamic accuracy test setup (Opt. 413/414)

Figure 2-40 Dynamic accuracy test setup (Opt. 413/414)

96 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Description
This test checks the directivity, source match, load match, transmission tracking, and
reflection tracking which are the key S-parameter measurement hardware characteristics.
These characteristics are tested using the Agilent 85032F Calibration Kit at 3MHz, 10

2. Performance Test
MHz, as well as 50 MHz increments from 50 MHz to 3 GHz (up to 8.5 GHz for the
E5071B). After a full two-port (SOLT) calibration is performed for each test port, VBA
test programs are executed to output the directivity, source match, load match, transmission
tracking, and reflection tracking data to the display.

NOTE The VBA test programs for the Uncorrected System Performance Test are not available in
the current version of the E5070B/E5071B test procedure. The test procedure is made
effective when the test programs become available.

Specification
Table 2-24 Uncorrected System Performance (Correction: Off, Sys-
tem Correction: On)

Description E5070B/E5071B E5071B only

3 MHz to 3 GHz 3 GHz to 6 GHz 6 GHz to 8.5 GHz

Directivity 25 dB 20 dB 15 dB

Source Match 25 dB 20 dB 15 dB

Load Match 17 dB 12 dB 10 dB

Transmission Tracking ± 1.0 dB ± 1.0 dB ± 1.0 dB

Reflection Tracking ± 1.0 dB ± 1.0 dB ± 1.0 dB

Test Equipment

Calibration Kit Agilent 85032F

Coaxial cable with N-type (m) connectors, 61 cm (24 in) Agilent N6314A (p/n
8120-8862)

Procedure
Step 1. Connect the N-N cable as shown in the following figure:
Option 213/214: Figure 2-41.
Option 313/314: Figure 2-42.
Option 413/414: Figure 2-43.

For the connection of the Open, Short and Load terminations, obey the instruction in the

Chapter 2 97
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

following procedure.

Figure 2-41 O/S/L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 213/214)

Figure 2-42 O/S/L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 313/314)

98 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Figure 2-43 O/S/L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 413/414)

2. Performance Test
NOTE To avoid possible variance in measured values, do not touch or move the N-N cable during
measurements.

Step 2. Press and to initialize the E5070B/E5071B. And press - Power -

Auto Range to turn off Auto Power Range set function (FW 3.60 and above), and press
- Servise - Init Src Ctrl to turn off Initial Source Port Control function (FW 3.54
and above).

Step 3. Set System Correction function to ON in accordance with the following procedure:

a. Press - - - - - - - - - (select
Service Menu), .
b. Confirm that the System Correction is ON. If it is OFF, proceed to the next c and d.

c. Press (select System Correction “OFF”), .

d. The message box is displayed. Then press OK button. The System Correction function
will be changed to ON.

Step 4. Press and select Log Mag from display format menu.

Step 5. Set the test frequencies using the Segment Table as follows:

a. Press - - - - - - (select Edit Segment

Table) - .
The first "Start" frequency entry box in the Segment Sweep table will be focused.
b. Press - to enter 3 MHz as the start frequency. "Stop" frequency will be
focused.
c. Press - - to enter 10 MHz as the stop frequency. "Points" will be

Chapter 2 99
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

automatically set to 2.

d. Press - - to focus on the "Start" frequency of the second segment.

e. Press - - to enter 50 MHz. The "Stop" frequency will be focused.

f. For the E5070B, proceed to the next Step g. For the E5071B, skip to Step i.
E5070B
g. Press - to enter 3 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points" will be focused.
h. Press - - to set the number of sweep points to 60. Then, proceed to step 5.

NOTE The sweep frequency points for the second segment will be aligned in 50 MHz increments
from 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

NOTE See Table 2-25 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5070B.

Table 2-25 E5070B Segment Table setting

Start Stop Points

1 3 MHz 10 MHz 2

3 50 MHz 3 GHz 60

E5071B
i. Press - - - to enter 8.5 GHz as the stop frequency. "Points" will be
focused.
j. Press - - - to set the number of sweep points to 170.

NOTE The sweep frequency points for the second segment will be aligned in 50 MHz increments
from 50 MHz to 8.5 GHz.

NOTE See Table 2-26 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5071B.

Table 2-26 E5071B Segment Table setting

Start Stop Points

1 3 MHz 10 MHz 2

3 50 MHz 8.5 GHz 170

Step 6. Press - - - - - (select Sweep Type) - to set

the Sweep type to Segment.

Full 2-port calibration

Step 7. Press - - - - and to select Cal Kit.

Step 8. Press - - and to select 85032F.

100 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

NOTE If Cal Kit is set to 85032F*, press , , - - - - to

select Restore Cal Kit.

Step 9. Set Offset Delay and Offset Loss of the N-N cable in accordance with the following
procedure:

a. Press - - - - - and to select Modify Cal kit

function

2. Performance Test
b. Press to select Define STDs function.

c. Press - - - - - - - - - and
to select 11. Thru function.

d. Press - - - - - - - - - and ,
then press - - - - to enter 2.68 nsec as the Offset Delay.

e. Press - and , then press - - - to enter 1.1 GΩ/sec as

the Offset Loss.

Step 10. Press - and to select Calibrate function.

Step 11. Press - - - and to select 2-Port Cal.

Step 12. Press to go down to Select Ports menu.

Step 13. Select 1-2 (preset ports).

Step 14. Press and to select Reflection calibration and to go down to its menu.

Step 15. Connect Open termination to the Port 1 and perform Port 1 Open calibration.

Step 16. Perform Port 1 Short calibration with Short termination connected to the Port 1.

Step 17. Perform Port 1 Load calibration with Load termination Connected to the Port 1.

Step 18. Connect Open termination to the tip of the N-N cable connected to the Port 2 and perform
Port 2 open calibration.

Step 19. Perform Port 2 Short calibration with Short termination connected to the tip of the N-N
cable.

Step 20. Perform Port 2 Load calibration with Load termination connected to the tip of the N-N
cable.

Step 21. Perform Return.

Step 22. Connect the N-N cable between the selected test ports (Port 1 and Port 2) as shown in the
following figures:
Option 213/214: Figure 2-44.
Option 313/314: Figure 2-45.
Option 413/414: Figure 2-46.

Chapter 2 101
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Figure 2-44 Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 213/214)

Figure 2-45 Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 313/314)

102 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Figure 2-46 Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 413/414)

2. Performance Test
Step 23. Press and to select Transmission calibration and to go down to its menu.

Step 24. Press to perform Port 1-2 Thru calibration.

Step 25. Perform Return.

Step 26. Press - - to Perform Done.

Step 27. Press and verify that the Correction function is set to ON.

Directivity, source match, load match, transmission tracking, and reflection tracking
test

Step 28. Press - Load Project. Open “uncorrected_system_test.vba”.

NOTE The program “uncorrected_system_test.vba” can be downloaded from Agilent

Technologies web site to a floppy disk using you computer’s FDD.

Step 29. Press to run the test program. This test program displays the values of the
directivity, source match and load match at each sweep frequency point, and extracts the
maximum value for each of the following frequency ranges:

E5070B: 3 MHz to 3 GHz (1 range)

E5071B: 3 MHz to 3 GHz, 3 GHz to 6 GHz, 6 GHz to 8.5 GHz (3 ranges)

The maximum value in each frequency range is represented in dB and displayed in the
VBA UserForm window as shown in the display example below.

Directivity test for port 1

a. Set Parameter, Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2-47.

Chapter 2 103
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Figure 2-47 Directivity test window

b. Press OK button. The maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown in
Figure 2-48 or Figure 2-49.

Figure 2-48 Directivity for E5070B

Figure 2-49 Directivity for E5071B

c. Record the displayed values in the performance test record (“Test results [dB]” column
in “Port 1” table for the uncorrected system performance test).
Source match test for port 1
d. Set Parameter, Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2-50.

Figure 2-50 Source match test window

e. Press OK button. The maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown in
Figure 2-51 or Figure 2-52.

104 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Figure 2-51 Source match for E5070B

2. Performance Test
Figure 2-52 Source match for E5071B

f. Record the displayed values in the performance test record (“Test results [dB]” column
in “Port 1” table for the uncorrected system performance test).
Load match test for port 1
g. Set Parameter, Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2-53.

Figure 2-53 Load match test window

h. Press OK button. The maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown in
Figure 2-54 or Figure 2-55.

Figure 2-54 Load match for E5070B

Chapter 2 105
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Figure 2-55 Load match for E5071B

i. Record the displayed values in the performance test record (“Test results [dB]” column
in “Port 1” table for the uncorrected system performance test).
Transimission Tracking test for port 1
j. Set Parameter, Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2-56.

Figure 2-56 Transmission Tracking test window

k. Press OK button. The maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown in
Figure 2-57 or Figure 2-58.

Figure 2-57 Transmission Tracking for E5070B

Figure 2-58 Transmission Tracking for E5071B

l. Record the displayed values in the performance test record (“Test results [dB]” column
in “Port 1” table for the uncorrected system performance test).

106 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Reflection Tracking test for port 1

m. Set Parameter, Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2-59.

Figure 2-59 Reflection Tracking test window

2. Performance Test
n. Press OK button. The maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown in
Figure 2-60 or Figure 2-61.

Figure 2-60 Reflection Tracking for E5070B

Figure 2-61 Reflection Tracking for E5071B

o. Record the displayed values in the performance test record (“Test results [dB]” column
in “Port 1” table for the uncorrected system performance test).

Test procedure for other test setups

Step 30. Connect the N-N cable as shown in the following figures:
Option 213/214: Figure 2-62.
Option 313/314: Figure 2-63.
Option 413/414: Figure 2-64.

NOTE The test setups and Select Ports settings for each option configuration are described in
Table 2-27.

Chapter 2 107
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Figure 2-62 O/S/L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 213/214)

Figure 2-63 O/S/L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 313/314)

108 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Figure 2-64 O/S/L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 413/414)

2. Performance Test
Step 31. Perform the full 2-port calibration (Step 10 through 27) in accordance with Table 2-27.

Step 32. Perform Step 29 and 30. Record the directivity, source match and load match values in the
performance test record ("Port 2" table).

Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only

NOTE Perform Step 33 and 34 for the option 313, 314, 413 and 414 instruments only.

Step 33. Perform the full 2-port calibration (Step 6 through 27) in accordance with Table 2-27.

Step 34. Perform Step 29 and 30. Record the directivity, source match and load match values in the
performance test record ("Port 1" through "Port 3" tables for Option 313/314 and "Port 1"
through "Port 4" tables for Option 413/414).

Chapter 2 109
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Table 2-27 Test setup, Select Ports settings and calibration sequence

Option Select Test setup Calibration Termination and cable connection

Ports (Figure) for calibration

213/214 1-2 Figure 2-41 Port 1 Open "Open" to Port 1

Port 1 Short "Short" to Port 1

Port 1 Load "Load" to Port 1

Port 2 Open "Open" to the tip of N-N cable

Port 2 Short "Short" to the tip of N-N cable

Port 2 Load "Load" to the tip of N-N cable

Figure 2-44 Thru N-N cable between Port 1 and Port 2

Perform Step 29 and 30.

Response/Stimulus Port of Directivity/Source match/Load match/Transmission
tracking/Reflection tracking test are as follows;
Response Port: 1, Stimulus Port : 2
Record the test results in the performance test record ("port 1").

1-2 Figure 2-62 Port 1 Open "Open" to the tip of N-N cable

Port 1 Short "Short" to the tip of N-N cable

Port 1 Load "Load" to the tip of N-N cable

Port 2 Open "Open" to Port 2

Port 2 Short "Short" to Port 2

Port 2 Load "Load" to Port 2

Figure 2-44 Thru N-N cable between Port 1 and Port 2

Perform Step 29 and 30.

Response/Stimulus Port of Directivity/Source match/Load match/Transmission
tracking/Reflection tracking test are as follows;
Response Port: 2, Stimulus Port : 1
Record the test results in the performance test record ("port 2").

110 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Table 2-27 Test setup, Select Ports settings and calibration sequence

Option Select Test setup Calibration Termination and cable connection

Ports (Figure) for calibration

313/314 1-2 Figure 2-42 Port 1 Open/Short/Load and Same as Opt. 213/214 (N-N cable
Port 2 Open/Short/Load connected to Port 2)
Refer to Step 10 through 27 for the
details.

2. Performance Test
Figure 2-45 Thru N-N cable between Port 1 and Port 2

Perform Step 29 and 30.

Response/Stimulus Port of Directivity/Source match/Load match/Transmission
tracking/Reflection tracking test are as follows;
Response Port: 1, Stimulus Port : 2
Record the test results in the performance test record ("port 1").

1-2 Figure 2-63 Port 1 Open/Short/Load and Same as Opt. 213/214 (N-N cable
Port 2 Open/Short/Load connected to Port 1)

Figure 2-45 Thru N-N cable between Port 1 and Port 2

Perform Step 29 and 30.

Response/Stimulus Port of Directivity/Source match/Load match/Transmission
tracking/Reflection tracking test are as follows;
Response Port: 2, Stimulus Port : 1
Record the test results in the performance test record ("port 2").

1-3 Figure 2-64 Port 1 Open "Open" to the tip of N-N cable

Port 1 Short "Short" to the tip of N-N cable

Port 1 Load "Load" to the tip of N-N cable

Port 3 Open "Open" to Port 3

Port 3 Short "Short" to Port 3

Port 3 Load "Load" to Port 3

Figure 2-66 Thru N-N cable between Port 1 and Port 3

Perform Step 29 and 30.

Response/Stimulus Port of Directivity/Source match/Load match/Transmission
tracking/reflection tracking test are as follows;
Response Port: 3, Stimulus Port : 1
Record the test results in the performance test record ("port 3").

Chapter 2 111
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Table 2-27 Test setup, Select Ports settings and calibration sequence

Option Select Test setup Calibration Termination and cable connection

Ports (Figure) for calibration

413/414 1-2 Figure 2-43 Port 1 Open/Short/Load and Same as Opt. 213/214 (N-N cable
Port 2 Open/Short/Load connected to Port 2)
Refer to Step 10 through 27 for the
details.

Figure 2-46 Thru N-N cable between Port 1 and Port 2

Perform Step 29 and 30.

Response/Stimulus Port of Directivity/Source match/Load match/Transmission
tracking/Reflection tracking test are as follows;
Response Port: 1, Stimulus Port : 2
Record the test results in the performance test record ("port 1").

1-2 Figure 2-64 Port 1 Open/Short/Load and Same as Opt. 213/214 (N-N cable
Port 2 Open/Short/Load connected to Port 1)

Figure 2-46 Thru N-N cable between Port 1 and Port 2

Perform Step 29 and 30.

Response/Stimulus Port of Directivity/Source match/Load match/Transmission
tracking/Reflection tracking test are as follows;
Response Port: 2, Stimulus Port : 1
Record the test results in the performance test record ("port 2").

3-4 Figure 2-67 Port 3 Open "Open" to Port 3

Port 3 Short "Short" to Port 3

Port 3 Load "Load" to Port 3

Port 4 Open "Open" to the tip of N-N cable

Port 4 Short "Short" to the tip of N-N cable

Port 4 Load "Load" to the tip of N-N cable

Figure 2-68 Thru N-N cable between Port 3 and Port 4

Perform Step 29 and 30.

Response/Stimulus Port of Directivity/Source match/Load match/Transmission
tracking/Reflection tracking test are as follows;
Response Port: 3, Stimulus Port : 4
Record the test results in the performance test record ("port 3").

112 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Table 2-27 Test setup, Select Ports settings and calibration sequence

Option Select Test setup Calibration Termination and cable connection

Ports (Figure) for calibration

3-4 Figure 2-69 Port 3 Open "Open" to the tip of N-N cable

Port 3 Short "Short" to the tip of N-N cable

Port 3 Load "Load" to the tip of N-N cable

2. Performance Test
Port 4 Open "Open" to Port 4

Port 4 Short "Short" to Port 4

Port 4 Load "Load" to Port 4

Figure 2-68 Thru N-N cable between Port 3 and Port 4

Perform Step 29 and 30. Record the test results in the performance test record ("port 4")
Response/Stimulus Port of Directivity/Source match/Load match/Transmission
tracking/Reflection tracking test are as follows;
Response Port: 4, Stimulus Port : 3
Record the test results in the performance test record ("port 4").

Figure 2-65 O/S/L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 313/314)

Chapter 2 113
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Figure 2-66 Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 313/314)

Figure 2-67 O/S/L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 413/414)

114 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
8. UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

Figure 2-68 Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 413/414)

2. Performance Test
Figure 2-69 O/S/L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test (Opt. 413/414)

Chapter 2 115
Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

Introduction
This section contains calculation sheets for each performance test that requires additional
calculations to determine the final test result.
Use the calculation sheet in this section as an aid for recording raw measurement data and
calculating the performance test results.
Calculation sheet entries are provided only for performance tests in which calculations are
required to obtain the test results.

2. RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test

Flatness Test (E5070B and E5071B)

Frequency [Hz] Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[a] [REF]

50 M ——————

10 M —————— a - REF

550 M —————— a - REF

1.05 G —————— a - REF

1.55 G —————— a - REF

2.05 G —————— a - REF

3.00 G —————— a - REF

(E5071B only)

Frequency [Hz] Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[a] [REF]

4.25 G —————— a - REF

5.05 G —————— a - REF

6.05 G —————— a - REF

7.05 G —————— a - REF

8.05 G —————— a - REF

8.5 G —————— a - REF

116 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

3. RF Output Level Linearity Test

Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

NOTE Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies
listed below:
E5070B: 10 MHz and 3 GHz
E5071B: 10 MHz, 3 GHz, and 4.25 GHz

2. Performance Test
for serial prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

CW frequency: ______________ Hz

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

0 ——————

10 —————— a-REF

9 —————— a-REF

8 —————— a-REF

7 —————— a-REF

6 —————— a-REF

5 —————— a-REF

4 —————— a-REF

3 —————— a-REF

2 —————— a-REF

1 —————— a-REF

-1 —————— a-REF

-2 —————— a-REF

-3 —————— a-REF

-4 —————— a-REF

-5 —————— a-REF

-6 —————— a-REF

-7 —————— a-REF

-8 —————— a-REF

-9 —————— a-REF

-10 —————— a-REF

Chapter 2 117
 Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

-11 —————— a-REF

-12 —————— a-REF

-13 —————— a-REF

-14 —————— a-REF

-15 —————— a-REF

NOTE Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies
listed below:
E5071B: 6 GHz
for serial prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

CW frequency: ______________ Hz

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

0 ——————

8 —————— a-REF

7 —————— a-REF

6 —————— a-REF

5 —————— a-REF

4 —————— a-REF

3 —————— a-REF

2 —————— a-REF

1 —————— a-REF

-1 —————— a-REF

-2 —————— a-REF

-3 —————— a-REF

-4 —————— a-REF

-5 —————— a-REF

-6 —————— a-REF

-7 —————— a-REF

-8 —————— a-REF

118 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

-9 —————— a-REF

-10 —————— a-REF

-11 —————— a-REF

-12 —————— a-REF

2. Performance Test
-13 —————— a-REF

-14 —————— a-REF

-15 —————— a-REF

NOTE Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies
listed below:
E5071B: 8.5 GHz
for serial prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

CW frequency: ______________ Hz

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

0 ——————

6 —————— a-REF

5 —————— a-REF

4 —————— a-REF

3 —————— a-REF

2 —————— a-REF

1 —————— a-REF

-1 —————— a-REF

-2 —————— a-REF

-3 —————— a-REF

-4 —————— a-REF

-5 —————— a-REF

-6 —————— a-REF

-7 —————— a-REF

-8 —————— a-REF

Chapter 2 119
 Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

-9 —————— a-REF

-10 —————— a-REF

-11 —————— a-REF

-12 —————— a-REF

-13 —————— a-REF

-14 —————— a-REF

-15 —————— a-REF

Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

NOTE Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies
listed below:
E5070B: 10 MHz and 3 GHz
E5071B: 10 MHz and 3 GHz
for serial prefix: MY422, and above

CW frequency: ______________ Hz

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

0 ——————

10 —————— a-REF

9 —————— a-REF

8 —————— a-REF

7 —————— a-REF

6 —————— a-REF

5 —————— a-REF

4 —————— a-REF

3 —————— a-REF

2 —————— a-REF

1 —————— a-REF

-1 —————— a-REF

120 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

-2 —————— a-REF

-3 —————— a-REF

-4 —————— a-REF

-5 —————— a-REF

2. Performance Test
-6 —————— a-REF

-7 —————— a-REF

-8 —————— a-REF

-9 —————— a-REF

-10 —————— a-REF

-11 —————— a-REF

-12 —————— a-REF

-13 —————— a-REF

-14 —————— a-REF

-15 —————— a-REF

NOTE Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies
listed below:
E5071B: 4.25 GHz
for serial prefix: MY422, and above

CW frequency: ______________ Hz

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

0 ——————

9 —————— a-REF

8 —————— a-REF

7 —————— a-REF

6 —————— a-REF

5 —————— a-REF

4 —————— a-REF

3 —————— a-REF

Chapter 2 121
 Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

2 —————— a-REF

1 —————— a-REF

-1 —————— a-REF

-2 —————— a-REF

-3 —————— a-REF

-4 —————— a-REF

-5 —————— a-REF

-6 —————— a-REF

-7 —————— a-REF

-8 —————— a-REF

-9 —————— a-REF

-10 —————— a-REF

-11 —————— a-REF

-12 —————— a-REF

-13 —————— a-REF

-14 —————— a-REF

-15 —————— a-REF

NOTE Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies
listed below:
E5071B: 6 GHz
for serial prefix: MY422, and above

CW frequency: ______________ Hz

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

0 ——————

7 —————— a-REF

6 —————— a-REF

5 —————— a-REF

4 —————— a-REF

122 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

3 —————— a-REF

2 —————— a-REF

1 —————— a-REF

-1 —————— a-REF

2. Performance Test
-2 —————— a-REF

-3 —————— a-REF

-4 —————— a-REF

-5 —————— a-REF

-6 —————— a-REF

-7 —————— a-REF

-8 —————— a-REF

-9 —————— a-REF

-10 —————— a-REF

-11 —————— a-REF

-12 —————— a-REF

-13 —————— a-REF

-14 —————— a-REF

-15 —————— a-REF

NOTE Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies
listed below:
E5071B: 8.5 GHz
for serial prefix: MY422, and above

CW frequency: ______________ Hz

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

0 ——————

5 —————— a-REF

4 —————— a-REF

3 —————— a-REF

Chapter 2 123
Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

Power level Power meter reading [dBm] Test result equation

[dBm]
[a] REF

2 —————— a-REF

1 —————— a-REF

-1 —————— a-REF

-2 —————— a-REF

-3 —————— a-REF

-4 —————— a-REF

-5 —————— a-REF

-6 —————— a-REF

-7 —————— a-REF

-8 —————— a-REF

-9 —————— a-REF

-10 —————— a-REF

-11 —————— a-REF

-12 —————— a-REF

-13 —————— a-REF

-14 —————— a-REF

-15 —————— a-REF

124 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

4. Trace Noise CW Test

NOTE Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the S-parameters
Listed below:
Option 212/213: S21and S12
Option 313/314: S21and S12, S23 and S32
Option 413/414: S21and S12, S43 and S34

2. Performance Test
(One calculation sheet can cover 2 parameters.)

S-parameter: ________ (E5070B and E5071B)

CW frequency [Hz] s.dev [μU] Trace noise level [dB rms] Test result equation

3 MHz

1.3 GHz Trace noise level =

2.1 GHz 20 log (1 + s.dev × 10-6)

3 GHz

(E5071B only)

CW frequency [Hz] s.dev [μU] Trace noise level [dB rms] Test result equation

4.25 GHz

6 GHz Trace noise level =

7.5 GHz 20 log (1 + s.dev × 10-6)

8.5 GHz

S-parameter: ________ (E5070B and E5071B)

CW frequency [Hz] s.dev [μU] Trace noise level [dB rms] Test result equation

3 MHz

1.3 GHz Trace noise level =

2.1 GHz 20 log (1 + s.dev × 10-6)

3 GHz

Chapter 2 125
 Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

(E5071B only)

CW frequency [Hz] s.dev [μU] Trace noise level [dB rms] Test result equation

4.25 GHz

6 GHz Trace noise level =

7.5 GHz 20 log (1 + s.dev × 10-6)

8.5 GHz

126 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

7. Dynamic Accuracy Test

Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each of the S-parameters listed below:
Option 213 and 214: S21 and S12
Option 313 and 314: S21, S12 and S31
Option 413 and 414: S21, S12, S31 and S41

NOTE A dynamic accuracy calculation example is shown at the end of the calculation sheets.

2. Performance Test
S-Parameter: _____________ (10 dBm to -100 dBm)

Name A1 A2 Power Pm [dB] Tx [dB] @ Port (Port Char Running True

setting OFF) D.A. D.A.
[dB]

DA10 0 10 REF REF

DA15 5 10 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA15) - ( Tx @ DA10) - (Pm @ DA15) + (Pm @ DA10) →

DA20 10 10 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA20) - ( Tx @ DA10) - (Pm @ DA20) + (Pm @ DA10) →

DA20a 0 20 ——— ———

Adjust source power for (Pm [db] @ DA20a) - ( Tx [dB] @ DA20a) + ( Tx [dB] @ DA20)

DA20b 0 20 REF20 REF20

DA25 5 20 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA25) - ( Tx @ DA20b) - (Pm @ DA25) + (Pm @ DA20b) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA25) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA20)

DA30 10 20 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA30) - ( Tx @ DA20b) - (Pm @ DA30) + (Pm @ DA20b) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA30) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA20)

DA30a 0 30 ——— ———

Adjust source power for (Pm [db] @ DA30a) - ( Tx [dB] @ DA30a) + ( Tx [dB] @ DA30)

DA30b 0 30 REF30 REF30

DA35 5 30 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA35) - ( Tx @ DA30b) - (Pm @ DA35) + (Pm @ DA30b) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA35) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA30)

DA40 10 30 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA40) - ( Tx @ DA30b) - (Pm @ DA40) + (Pm @ DA30b) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA40) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA30)

DA40a 0 40 ——— ———

Adjust source power for (Pm [db] @ DA40a) - ( Tx [dB] @ DA40a) + ( Tx [dB] @ DA40)

Chapter 2 127
 Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

Name A1 A2 Power Pm [dB] Tx [dB] @ Port (Port Char Running True

setting OFF) D.A. D.A.
[dB]

DA40b 0 40 REF40 REF40

DA45 5 40 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA45) - ( Tx @ DA40b) - (Pm @ DA45) + (Pm @ DA40b) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA45) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA40)

DA50 10 40 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA50) - ( Tx @ DA40b) - (Pm @ DA50) + (Pm @ DA40b) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA50) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA40)

DA50a 0 50 ——— ———

Adjust source power for (Pm [db] @ DA50a) - (Tx [dB] @ DA50a) + ( Tx [dB] @ DA50)

DA50b 0 50 REF50 REF50

DA55 5 50 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA55) - ( Tx @ DA50b) - (Pm @ DA55) + (Pm @ DA50b) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA55) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA50)

DA60 10 50 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA60) - (Tx @ DA50b) - (Pm @ DA60) + (Pm @ DA50b) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA60) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA50)

DA60a 0 60 ——— ———

Adjust source power for (Pm [db] @ DA60a) - ( Tx [dB] @ DA60a) + ( Tx [dB] @ DA60)

DA60b 0 60 REF60 REF60

DA65 5 60 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA65) - ( Tx @ DA60b) - (Pm @ DA65) + (Pm @ DA60b) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA65) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA60)

DA70 10 60 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA70) - ( Tx @ DA60b) - (Pm @ DA70) + (Pm @ DA60b) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA70) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA60)

DA70a 0 70 ——— ———

Adjust source power for (Pm [db] @ DA70a) - ( Tx [dB] @ DA70a) + ( Tx [dB] @ DA70)

DA70b 0 70 REF70 REF70

DA75 5 70 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA75) - ( Tx @ DA70b) - (Pm @ DA75) + (Pm @ DA70b) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA75) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA70)

DA80 10 70 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA80) - ( Tx @ DA70b) - (Pm @ DA80) + (Pm @ DA70b) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA80) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA70)

128 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B/E5071B Performance Test Calculation Sheet

Name A1 A2 Power Pm [dB] Tx [dB] @ Port (Port Char Running True

setting OFF) D.A. D.A.
[dB]

DA80a 0 80 ——— ———

Adjust source power for (Pm [db] @ DA80a) - ( Tx [dB] @ DA80a) + ( Tx [dB] @ DA80)

DA80b 0 80 REF80 REF80

DA85 5 80 ——— ———

2. Performance Test
(Tx @ DA85) - ( Tx @ DA80b) - (Pm @ DA85) + (Pm @ DA80b) →
True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA85) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA80)

DA90 10 80 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA90) - ( Tx @ DA80b) - (Pm @ DA90) + (Pm @ DA80b) True

D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA90) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA80)

DA90a 0 90 ——— ———

Adjust source power for (Pm [db] @ DA90a) - ( Tx [dB] @ DA90a) + ( Tx [dB] @ DA90)

DA90b 0 90 REF90 REF90

DA95 5 90 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA95) - ( Tx @ DA90b) - (Pm @ DA95) + (Pm @ DA90b)→

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA95) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA90)

DA100 10 90 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA100) - ( Tx @ DA90b)- (Pm @ DA100) + (Pm @ DA90b)→

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA100) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA90)

DA10 10 0 REF10 REF10

DA5 5 0 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA5) - ( Tx @ DA10) - (Pm @ DA5) + (Pm @ DA10)

DA0 0 0 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA0) - ( Tx @ DA10) - (Pm @ DA0) + (Pm @ DA10) →

DA+5 0 0 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA+5) - ( Tx @ DA10) - (Pm @ DA+5) + (Pm @ DA10) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA+5) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA10)

DA+10 0 0 ——— ———

( Tx @ DA+10) - ( Tx @ DA10) - (Pm @ DA+10) + (Pm @ DA10) →

True D.A. = (Running D.A. [dB] @ DA+10) + (True D.A. [dB] @ DA10)

Chapter 2 129
Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421,

or JP1KK
Agilent Technologies E5070B RF Network Analyzer

Serial Number: Option:

Temperature: °C Test Date:

Humidity: % R.H. Tested by:

Frequency Accuracy Test

Without Option 1E5

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [Hz] Test result [Hz] Measurement

uncertainty [Hz]

50 M ± 250 ± 11

3G ± 15 k k ± 0.64 k

With Option 1E5

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [Hz] Test result [Hz] Measurement

uncertainty [Hz]

50 M ± 50 ± 11

3G ± 3.00 k k ± 0.64 k

RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test

Level Accuracy Test (@ Port 1)

Power level Frequency Test limit Test result Measurement

[dBm] [Hz] [dB] [dB] uncertainty [dB]

0 50 M ± 0.65 ± 0.16

Level Flatness Test (@ Port 1) (at 0dBm, relative to 50 MHz reference)

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement

uncertainty [dB]

10 M ± 1.0 ± 0.37

130 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement

uncertainty [dB]

550 M ± 1.0 ± 0.17

1.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.17

1.55 G ± 1.0 ± 0.19

2.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.20

2. Performance Test
3.00 G ± 1.0 ± 0.20

RF Output Level Linearity Test (@ Port1)

CW Frequency: 10 MHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.75 ± 0.27

9 ± 0.75 ± 0.26

8 ± 0.75 ± 0.24

7 ± 0.75 ± 0.23

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

Chapter 2 131
Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

CW Frequency: 3 GHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.75 ± 0.27

9 ± 0.75 ± 0.26

8 ± 0.75 ± 0.24

7 ± 0.75 ± 0.23

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

132 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

2. Performance Test
-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

Trace Noise CW Test (Magnitude)

Direction: S21

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

Direction: S12

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

Direction: S23 (Option 313 and 314 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

Chapter 2 133
Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Direction: S32 (Option 313 and 314 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

Direction: S43 (Option 413 and 414 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

Direction: S34 (Option 413 and 414 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

Crosstalk Test
Direction: S21 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

Direction: S12 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

134 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Direction: S32 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

Direction: S23 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

2. Performance Test
3M-3G 10 < -120

Direction: S41 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

Direction: S14 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

System Dynamic Range Test

Direction: S21 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

Direction: S12 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

Chapter 2 135
Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Direction: S32 (Options 313, 314, 413, 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

Direction: S23 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

Direction: S41 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

Direction: S14 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

Dynamic Accuracy Test

@ Reference power level: -10 dBm

136 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Direction: S21

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

2. Performance Test
-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Direction: S12

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

Chapter 2 137
Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Direction: S31 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

138 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

2. Performance Test
-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Direction: S41 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

Chapter 2 139
Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Uncorrected System Performance Test

@ Correction: Off, System Correction: On
Port 1

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Transmission 3 M - 3G ± 1.0
Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3 M - 3G ± 1.0

Port 2

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Transmission 3 M - 3G ± 1.0
Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3 M - 3G ± 1.0

140 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Port 3 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Load match 3M-3G < -17

2. Performance Test
Transmission 3 M - 3G ± 1.0
Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3 M - 3G ± 1.0

Port 4 (Options 413 and 414 only)

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Transmission 3 M - 3G ± 1.0
Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3 M - 3G ± 1.0

Chapter 2 141
Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422,

and above
Agilent Technologies E5070B RF Network Analyzer

Serial Number: Option:

Temperature: °C Test Date:

Humidity: % R.H. Tested by:

Frequency Accuracy Test

Without Option 1E5

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [Hz] Test result [Hz] Measurement

uncertainty [Hz]

50 M ± 250 ± 11

3G ± 15 k k ± 0.64 k

With Option 1E5

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [Hz] Test result [Hz] Measurement

uncertainty [Hz]

50 M ± 50 ± 11

3G ± 3.00 k k ± 0.64 k

RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test

Level Accuracy Test (@ Port 1)

Power level Frequency Test limit Test result Measurement

[dBm] [Hz] [dB] [dB] uncertainty [dB]

0 50 M ± 0.65 ± 0.16

Level Flatness Test (@ Port 1) (at 0dBm, relative to 50 MHz reference)

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement

uncertainty [dB]

10 M ± 1.0 ± 0.37

142 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement

uncertainty [dB]

550 M ± 1.0 ± 0.17

1.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.17

1.55 G ± 1.0 ± 0.19

2.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.20

2. Performance Test
3.00 G ± 1.0 ± 0.20

RF Output Level Linearity Test (@ Port1)

CW Frequency: 10 MHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.75 ± 0.27

9 ± 0.75 ± 0.26

8 ± 0.75 ± 0.24

7 ± 0.75 ± 0.23

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

Chapter 2 143
Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

CW Frequency: 3 GHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.75 ± 0.27

9 ± 0.75 ± 0.26

8 ± 0.75 ± 0.24

7 ± 0.75 ± 0.23

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

144 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

2. Performance Test
-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

Trace Noise CW Test (Magnitude)

Direction: S21

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

Direction: S12

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

Direction: S23 (Option 313 and 314 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

Chapter 2 145
Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Direction: S32 (Option 313 and 314 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

Direction: S43 (Option 413 and 414 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

Direction: S34 (Option 413 and 414 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

Crosstalk Test
Direction: S21 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

Direction: S12 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

146 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Direction: S32 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

Direction: S23 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

2. Performance Test
3M-3G 10 < -120

Direction: S41 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

Direction: S14 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

System Dynamic Range Test

Direction: S21 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

Direction: S12 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

Chapter 2 147
Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Direction: S32 (Options 313, 314, 413, 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

Direction: S23 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

Direction: S41 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

Direction: S14 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

Dynamic Accuracy Test

@ Reference power level: -10 dBm

148 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Direction: S21

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

2. Performance Test
-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Direction: S12

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

Chapter 2 149
Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Direction: S31 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

150 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

2. Performance Test
-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Direction: S41 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

Chapter 2 151
Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Uncorrected System Performance Test

@ Correction: Off, System Correction: On
Port 1

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Transmission 3 M - 3G ± 1.0
Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3 M - 3G ± 1.0

Port 2

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Transmission 3 M - 3G ± 1.0
Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3 M - 3G ± 1.0

152 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5070B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Port 3 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Load match 3M-3G < -17

2. Performance Test
Transmission 3 M - 3G ± 1.0
Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3 M - 3G ± 1.0

Port 4 (Options 413 and 414 only)

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Transmission 3 M - 3G ± 1.0
Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3 M - 3G ± 1.0

Chapter 2 153
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421,

or JP1KK
Agilent Technologies E5071B RF Network Analyzer

Serial Number: Option:

Temperature: °C Test Date:

Humidity: % R.H. Tested by:

Frequency Accuracy Test

Without Option 1E5

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [Hz] Test result [Hz] Measurement

uncertainty [Hz]

50 M ± 250 ± 11

3G ± 15 k k ± 0.64 k

With Option 1E5

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [Hz] Test result [Hz] Measurement

uncertainty [Hz]

50 M ± 50 ± 11

3G ± 3.00 k k ± 0.64 k

RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test

Level Accuracy Test (@ Port 1)

Power level Frequency Test limit Test result Measurement

[dBm] [Hz] [dB] [dB] uncertainty [dB]

0 50 M ± 0.65 ± 0.16

Level Flatness Test (@ Port 1) (at 0dBm, relative to 50 MHz reference)

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement

uncertainty [dB]

10 M ± 1.0 ± 0.37

550 M ± 1.0 ± 0.17

154 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement

uncertainty [dB]

1.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.17

1.55 G ± 1.0 ± 0.19

2.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.20

3.00 G ± 1.0 ± 0.20

2. Performance Test
4.25 G ± 1.0 ± 0.36

5.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.36

6.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.36

7.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.36

8.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.36

8.50 G ± 1.0 ± 0.36

RF Output Level Linearity Test (@ Port1)

CW Frequency: 10 MHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.75 ± 0.27

9 ± 0.75 ± 0.26

8 ± 0.75 ± 0.24

7 ± 0.75 ± 0.23

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

Chapter 2 155
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

CW Frequency: 3 GHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.75 ± 0.27

9 ± 0.75 ± 0.26

8 ± 0.75 ± 0.24

7 ± 0.75 ± 0.23

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

156 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

2. Performance Test
-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

CW Frequency: 4.25 GHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.75 ± 0.27

9 ± 0.75 ± 0.26

8 ± 0.75 ± 0.24

7 ± 0.75 ± 0.23

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

Chapter 2 157
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

CW Frequency: 6 GHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

8 ± 0.75 ± 0.24

7 ± 0.75 ± 0.23

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

158 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

2. Performance Test
-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

CW Frequency: 8.5 GHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

Chapter 2 159
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

Trace Noise CW Test (Magnitude)

Direction: S21

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

4.25 G 3k < 0.001

6G 3k < 0.003

7.5 G 3k < 0.003

8.5 G 3k < 0.005

Direction: S12

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

4.25 G 3k < 0.001

6G 3k < 0.003

7.5 G 3k < 0.003

8.5 G 3k < 0.005

Direction: S23 (Option 313 and 314 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

160 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

4.25 G 3k < 0.001

2. Performance Test
6G 3k < 0.003

7.5 G 3k < 0.003

8.5 G 3k < 0.005

Direction: S32 (Option 313 and 314 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

4.25 G 3k < 0.001

6G 3k < 0.003

7.5 G 3k < 0.003

8.5 G 3k < 0.005

Direction: S43 (Option 413 and 414 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

4.25 G 3k < 0.001

6G 3k < 0.003

7.5 G 3k < 0.003

8.5 G 3k < 0.005

Chapter 2 161
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Direction: S34 (Option 413 and 414 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

4.25 G 3k < 0.001

6G 3k < 0.003

7.5 G 3k < 0.003

8.5 G 3k < 0.005

Crosstalk Test
Direction: S21 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

3G-6G 10 < -110

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -100

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -90

Direction: S12 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

3G-6G 10 < -110

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -100

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -90

Direction: S32 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

3G-6G 10 < -110

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -100

162 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -90

Direction: S23 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

2. Performance Test
3G-6G 10 < -110

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -100

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -90

Direction: S41 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

3G-6G 10 < -110

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -100

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -90

Direction: S14 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

3G-6G 10 < -110

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -100

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -90

System Dynamic Range Test

Direction: S21 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 4 G 10 < -122

4G-6G 10 < -118

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -113

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -106

Chapter 2 163
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 4 G 3k < -97

4G-6G 3k < -93

6 G - 7.5 G 3k < -88

7.5 G - 8.5 G 3k < -81

Direction: S12 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 4 G 10 < -122

4G-6G 10 < -118

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -113

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -106

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 4 G 3k < -97

4G-6G 3k < -93

6 G - 7.5 G 3k < -88

7.5 G - 8.5 G 3k < -81

Direction: S32 (Options 313, 314, 413, 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 4 G 10 < -122

4G-6G 10 < -118

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -113

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -106

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 4 G 3k < -97

4G-6G 3k < -93

6 G - 7.5 G 3k < -88

7.5 G - 8.5 G 3k < -81

164 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Direction: S23 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 4 G 10 < -122

4G-6G 10 < -118

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -113

2. Performance Test
7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -106

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 4 G 3k < -97

4G-6G 3k < -93

6 G - 7.5 G 3k < -88

7.5 G - 8.5 G 3k < -81

Direction: S41 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 4 G 10 < -122

4G-6G 10 < -118

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -113

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -106

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 4 G 3k < -97

4G-6G 3k < -93

6 G - 7.5 G 3k < -88

7.5 G - 8.5 G 3k < -81

Direction: S14 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 4 G 10 < -122

4G-6G 10 < -118

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -113

Chapter 2 165
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -106

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 4 G 3k < -97

4G-6G 3k < -93

6 G - 7.5 G 3k < -88

7.5 G - 8.5 G 3k < -81

Dynamic Accuracy Test

@ Reference power level: -10 dBm
Direction: S21

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

166 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Direction: S12

2. Performance Test
Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Chapter 2 167
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Direction: S31 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Direction: S41 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

168 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

2. Performance Test
-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Uncorrected System Performance Test

@ Correction: Off, System Correction: On
Port 1

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Directivity 3G-6G < -20

Directivity 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3G-6G < -20

Source match 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Chapter 2 169
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Load match 3G-6G < -12

Load match 6 G - 8.5 G < -10

Transmission 3M-3G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 3G-6G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3M-3G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 3G-6G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 6 G -8.5 G ± 1.0

Port 2

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Directivity 3G-6G < -20

Directivity 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3G-6G < -20

Source match 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Load match 3G-6G < -12

Load match 6 G - 8.5 G < -10

Transmission 3M-3G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 3G-6G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3M-3G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 3G-6G ± 1.0

170 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Reflection Tracking 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Port 3 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

2. Performance Test
Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Directivity 3G-6G < -20

Directivity 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3G-6G < -20

Source match 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Load match 3G-6G < -12

Load match 6 G - 8.5 G < -10

Transmission 3M-3G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 3G-6G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3M-3G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 3G-6G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Port 4 (Options 413 and 414 only)

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Directivity 3G-6G < -20

Directivity 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3G-6G < -20

Chapter 2 171
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY421, or JP1KK

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Source match 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Load match 3G-6G < -12

Load match 6 G - 8.5 G < -10

Transmission 3M-3G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 3G-6G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3M-3G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 3G-6G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

172 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422,

and above
Agilent Technologies E5071B RF Network Analyzer

Serial Number: Option:

Temperature: °C Test Date:

2. Performance Test
Humidity: % R.H. Tested by:

Frequency Accuracy Test

Without Option 1E5

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [Hz] Test result [Hz] Measurement

uncertainty [Hz]

50 M ± 250 ± 11

3G ± 15 k k ± 0.64 k

With Option 1E5

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [Hz] Test result [Hz] Measurement

uncertainty [Hz]

50 M ± 50 ± 11

3G ± 3.00 k k ± 0.64 k

RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test

Level Accuracy Test (@ Port 1)

Power level Frequency Test limit Test result Measurement

[dBm] [Hz] [dB] [dB] uncertainty [dB]

0 50 M ± 0.65 ± 0.16

Level Flatness Test (@ Port 1) (at 0dBm, relative to 50 MHz reference)

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement

uncertainty [dB]

10 M ± 1.0 ± 0.37

550 M ± 1.0 ± 0.17

Chapter 2 173
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Frequency [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement

uncertainty [dB]

1.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.17

1.55 G ± 1.0 ± 0.19

2.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.20

3.00 G ± 1.0 ± 0.20

4.25 G ± 1.0 ± 0.36

5.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.36

6.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.36

7.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.36

8.05 G ± 1.0 ± 0.36

8.50 G ± 1.0 ± 0.36

RF Output Level Linearity Test (@ Port1)

CW Frequency: 10 MHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.75 ± 0.27

9 ± 0.75 ± 0.26

8 ± 0.75 ± 0.24

7 ± 0.75 ± 0.23

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

174 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

2. Performance Test
-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

CW Frequency: 3 GHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.75 ± 0.27

9 ± 0.75 ± 0.26

8 ± 0.75 ± 0.24

7 ± 0.75 ± 0.23

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

Chapter 2 175
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

CW Frequency: 4.25 GHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

9 ± 0.75 ± 0.26

8 ± 0.75 ± 0.24

7 ± 0.75 ± 0.23

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

176 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

2. Performance Test
-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

CW Frequency: 6 GHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

7 ± 0.75 ± 0.23

6 ± 0.75 ± 0.21

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

Chapter 2 177
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

CW Frequency: 8.5 GHz (relative to 0 dBm reference)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

5 ± 0.75 ± 0.20

4 ± 0.75 ± 0.19

3 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

2 ± 0.75 ± 0.18

1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-1 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-2 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-3 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-4 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-5 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-6 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-7 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-8 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-9 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-10 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-11 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-12 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-13 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-14 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

-15 ± 0.75 ± 0.17

178 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Trace Noise CW Test (Magnitude)

Direction: S21

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2. Performance Test
2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

4.25 G 3k < 0.0012

6G 3k < 0.0036

7.5 G 3k < 0.0036

8.5 G 3k < 0.006

Direction: S12

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

4.25 G 3k < 0.0012

6G 3k < 0.0036

7.5 G 3k < 0.0036

8.5 G 3k < 0.006

Direction: S23 (Option 313 and 314 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

4.25 G 3k < 0.0012

Chapter 2 179
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

6G 3k < 0.0036

7.5 G 3k < 0.0036

8.5 G 3k < 0.006

Direction: S32 (Option 313 and 314 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

4.25 G 3k < 0.0012

6G 3k < 0.0036

7.5 G 3k < 0.0036

8.5 G 3k < 0.006

Direction: S43 (Option 413 and 414 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

4.25 G 3k < 0.0012

6G 3k < 0.0036

7.5 G 3k < 0.0036

8.5 G 3k < 0.006

Direction: S34 (Option 413 and 414 only)

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

3M 3k < 0.001

180 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit [dB rms] Test result [dB rms]
[Hz] [Hz]

1.3 G 3k < 0.001

2.1 G 3k < 0.001

3G 3k < 0.001

4.25 G 3k < 0.0012

2. Performance Test
6G 3k < 0.0036

7.5 G 3k < 0.0036

8.5 G 3k < 0.006

Crosstalk Test
Direction: S21 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

3G-6G 10 < -109

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -99

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -89

Direction: S12 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

3G-6G 10 < -109

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -99

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -89

Direction: S32 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

3G-6G 10 < -109

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -99

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -89

Chapter 2 181
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Direction: S23 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

3G-6G 10 < -109

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -99

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -89

Direction: S41 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

3G-6G 10 < -109

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -99

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -89

Direction: S14 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3M-3G 10 < -120

3G-6G 10 < -109

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -99

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -89

System Dynamic Range Test

Direction: S21 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3G-4G 10 < -121

4G-6G 10 < -117

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -112

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -105

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

182 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3G-4G 3k < -96

4G-6G 3k < -92

6 G - 7.5 G 3k < -87

7.5 G - 8.5 G 3k < -80

2. Performance Test
Direction: S12 (Options 213, 214, 313 and 314 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3G-4G 10 < -121

4G-6G 10 < -117

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -112

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -105

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

3G-4G 3k < -96

4G-6G 3k < -92

6 G - 7.5 G 3k < -87

7.5 G - 8.5 G 3k < -80

Direction: S32 (Options 313, 314, 413, 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3G-4G 10 < -121

4G-6G 10 < -117

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -112

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -105

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

3G-4G 3k < -96

Chapter 2 183
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

4G-6G 3k < -92

6 G - 7.5 G 3k < -87

7.5 G - 8.5 G 3k < -80

Direction: S23 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3G-4G 10 < -121

4G-6G 10 < -117

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -112

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -105

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

3G-4G 3k < -96

4G-6G 3k < -92

6 G - 7.5 G 3k < -87

7.5 G - 8.5 G 3k < -80

Direction: S41 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3G-4G 10 < -121

4G-6G 10 < -117

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -112

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -105

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

3G-4G 3k < -96

4G-6G 3k < -92

184 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

6 G - 7.5 G 3k < -87

7.5 G - 8.5 G 3k < -80

Direction: S14 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Frequency range [Hz] IF bandwidth [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]

2. Performance Test
3 M - 1.5 G 10 < -120

1.5 G - 3 G 10 < -122

3G-4G 10 < -121

4G-6G 10 < -117

6 G - 7.5 G 10 < -112

7.5 G - 8.5 G 10 < -105

3 M - 1.5 G 3k < -95

1.5 G - 3 G 3k < -97

3G-4G 3k < -96

4G-6G 3k < -92

6 G - 7.5 G 3k < -87

7.5 G - 8.5 G 3k < -80

Dynamic Accuracy Test

@ Reference power level: -10 dBm
Direction: S21

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

Chapter 2 185
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Direction: S12

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

186 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

2. Performance Test
-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Direction: S31 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

Chapter 2 187
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Direction: S41 (Options 413 and 414 only)

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

10 ± 0.207 ± 0.060

5 ± 0.075 ± 0.022

0 ± 0.042 ± 0.012

-5 ± 0.031 ± 0.012

-15 ± 0.030 ± 0.0087

-20 ± 0.035 ± 0.0087

-25 ± 0.040 ± 0.012

-30 ± 0.045 ± 0.012

-35 ± 0.056 ± 0.016

-40 ± 0.067 ± 0.016

-45 ± 0.078 ± 0.019

-50 ± 0.091 ± 0.019

-55 ± 0.106 ± 0.022

-60 ± 0.125 ± 0.022

-65 ± 0.151 ± 0.025

-70 ± 0.189 ± 0.025

-75 ± 0.248 ± 0.028

-80 ± 0.346 ± 0.028

-85 ± 0.509 ± 0.030

-90 ± 0.785 ± 0.030

188 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

Power level [dBm] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB] Measurement
uncertainty [dB]

-95 ± 1.248 ± 0.032

-100 ±2.008 ± 0.032

Uncorrected System Performance Test

2. Performance Test
@ Correction: Off, System Correction: On
Port 1

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Directivity 3G-6G < -20

Directivity 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3G-6G < -20

Source match 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Load match 3G-6G < -12

Load match 6 G - 8.5 G < -10

Transmission 3M-3G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 3G-6G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3M-3G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 3G-6G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 6 G -8.5 G ± 1.0

Port 2

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Directivity 3G-6G < -20

Chapter 2 189
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3G-6G < -20

Source match 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Load match 3G-6G < -12

Load match 6 G - 8.5 G < -10

Transmission 3M-3G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 3G-6G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3M-3G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 3G-6G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Port 3 (Options 313, 314, 413 and 414 only)

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Directivity 3G-6G < -20

Directivity 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3G-6G < -20

Source match 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Load match 3G-6G < -12

Load match 6 G - 8.5 G < -10

Transmission 3M-3G ± 1.0

Tracking

190 Chapter 2
 Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Transmission 3G-6G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3M-3G ± 1.0

2. Performance Test
Reflection Tracking 3G-6G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Port 4 (Options 413 and 414 only)

System Frequency range [Hz] Test limit [dB] Test result [dB]
performance

Directivity 3M-3G < -25

Directivity 3G-6G < -20

Directivity 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Source match 3M-3G < -25

Source match 3G-6G < -20

Source match 6 G - 8.5 G < -15

Load match 3M-3G < -17

Load match 3G-6G < -12

Load match 6 G - 8.5 G < -10

Transmission 3M-3G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 3G-6G ± 1.0

Tracking

Transmission 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Tracking

Reflection Tracking 3M-3G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 3G-6G ± 1.0

Reflection Tracking 6 G - 8.5 G ± 1.0

Chapter 2 191
Performance Tests
E5071B Performance Test Record for Serial Prefix: MY422, and above

192 Chapter 2
 1. Chapter Title
2. Chapter Title
3. Adjustment
4. Chapter Title

3 Adjustment

This chapter provides the adjustment information for the E5070B/E5071B ENA Series
5. Chapter Title

Network Analyzer to ensure that the it is within its specifications. The adjustment must be
performed Agilent’s qualified service personnel. If you need the adjustment for your
E5070B/E5071B, it should be sent to the nearest Agilent Technologies service office.

193
 Adjustment
Safety Considerations

Safety Considerations
This manual contains NOTEs, CAUTIONs, and WARNINGs that must be followed to
ensure the safety of the operator and to keep the instrument in a safe and serviceable
condition. The adjustment must be performed by Agilent’s qualified service personnel.

WARNING Any interruption of the protective ground conductor (inside or outside the
equipment) or disconnection of the protective ground terminal can make the
instrument dangerous. Intentional interruption of the protective ground system for
any reason is prohibited.

Warm-up for Adjustment

Warm-up the E5070B/E5071B for at least 30 minute before performing any of the
following Adjustment procedures to ensure proper results and correct instrument
operation.

Required Equipment
Table 1-1 on page 24 lists the equipment required to perform the Adjustment procedures
described in this chapter. Use only calibrated test equipment when adjusting the
E5070B/E5071B.

194 Chapter 3
 Adjustment

1. Chapter Title
Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly

Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly

After replacing the following assembly, the adjustment items described in Table 3-1 must
be required. The adjustment must be performed Agilent’s qualified service personnel. If
you need the adjustment for your E5070B/E5071B, it should be sent to the nearest Agilent
Technologies service office.
Table 3-1 Required Adjustment Item after Replacing Assembly

2. Chapter Title
Replaced Assembly Adjustment Item

Oven Reference Adjustment (Opt. 1E5)

Test Ports Characteristics Adjustment

IF Range Gain/Phase Adjustment
Frequency Reference Adjustment

Source Power Adjustment

Writing ID

3. Adjustment
Source Board √ √ √
Receiver (RF) Board √ √
Receiver (IF) Board √ √ √
RF Switch √ √
Crystal Oven (Opt. 1E5) √
Attenuator (Opt.214, 314 and 414) √ √
Hard Disk Drive

4. Chapter Title
Analog Interface Board √
Level Vernier √ √
Power Amp Module √ √

Writing ID
This item writes the serial number and the option structure into the E5070B/E5071B.

Required equipment for the writing ID

None
5. Chapter Title

Frequency Reference Adjustment

The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the 10 MHz frequency reference on the source
board.

Chapter 3 195
Adjustment
Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly

Required equipment for frequency reference adjustment

Description Recommended Model

Frequency Counter Agilent 53181A Opt. 010

Frequency Standard Agilent 5071A

BNC(m)-BNC(m) Cable, 61 cm Agilent p/n 8120-1839

Oven Reference Adjustment

The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the frequency of the crystal oven on the crystal
oven assembly.

Required equipment for the oven reference adjustment

Description Recommended Model

Frequency Counter Agilent 53181A Opt. 010

Frequency Standard Agilent 5071A

BNC(m)-BNC(m) Cable, 61 cm Agilent p/n 8120-1839

IF Range Gain/Phase Adjustment

The purpose of this procedure is to adjust difference of the gain and phase between
neighbor IF ranges.

Required equipment for the F rang gain/phase adjustment

Description Recommended Model

6 dB Attenuator Agilent 8491A w/Opt. 006 and

H60

N(m)-N(m) Cable, 61 cm Agilent N6314A ( p/n

8120-8862)

Source Power Adjustment

The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the output level from the source board.

196 Chapter 3
 Adjustment

1. Chapter Title
Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly

Required equipment for the source power adjustment

Description Recommended Model

Power Meter Agilent E4419A/B

Power Sensor Agilent E4412A

Power Sensor Agilent 8482A

2. Chapter Title
Test Ports Characteristics Adjustment
The purpose of this procedure is to adjust source match, directivity and tracking.

Required equipment for the test port characteristics adjustment

Description Recommended Model

Calibration Kit Agilent 85052F

N(m)-N(m) Cable Agilent N6314A (p/n

8120-8862)

3. Adjustment
4. Chapter Title
5. Chapter Title

Chapter 3 197
Adjustment
Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly

198 Chapter 3
 4. Troubleshooting

4 Troubleshooting

This chapter provides procedure to isolate a faulty assembly in the E5070B/E5071B

Network Analyzer

199
 Troubleshooting
Introduction

Introduction

WARNING These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To avoid possible
electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.

WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages.
Disconnect the instrument from its power supply beforehand.

CAUTION Many of the assemblies in the instrument are very susceptible to damage from ESD
(electrostatic discharge). Perform the following procedures only at a static-safe workstation
and wear a grounding strap.

CAUTION DO NOT operate without following instructions. Programs or files in the instrument may
be broken.

200 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
How to exit from the E5070B/E5071B Measurement View

How to exit from the E5070B/E5071B Measurement View

You need to exit from the E5070B/E5071B Measurement View to perform some
troubleshooting. The following is the procedure to exit from the E5070B/E5071B
Measurement View.

Step 1. Connect the mouse and external keyboard to the connectors on the E5070B/E5071B rear
panel.

Step 2. Turn the instrument on.

Step 3. Press key.

Step 4. Click Service Menu - Service Function. Password dialog box opens as shown in Figure
4-1.

Figure 4-1 Password dialog box

Step 5. Enter the password kid in the Password box and then click "OK" button.

Step 6. Click Exit in Service Functions Menu. Then the E5070B/E5071B exit the Measurement
View, then.windows desktop screen appears with 4 icons (My Computer, Recycle Bin, My
Network Places, and Network Analyzer.)

NOTE If you wish to return to the Measurement View, double-click "Network Analyzer" icon.

NOTE If you need to shut down the E5070B/E5071B and again turn on, perform in accordance
with the following procedure.

4. Troubleshooting
a. To get "Start" menu bar displayed, move the pointer to the bottom of the screen with
mouse.
b. Click "Start" and "Shut Down..." in the pull down menu. "Shut Down Windows" dialog
box opens.
c. Select "Shut down" button in the pull down menu.
d. Click "OK" button in the dialog box.

Chapter 4 201
 Troubleshooting
To Troubleshoot the Instrument

To Troubleshoot the Instrument

This section describes basic procedural flow of troubleshooting when servicing the
E5070B/E5071B. The primary procedural tool in this section is the flowchart. The
flowchart contains entire troubleshooting path from a failure symptom to the isolation of
faulty assembly, and will direct you to the completion of repair in an ordinary manner
through the possible failure symptoms. Reference letters (Yes/No) on the flowcharts point
to procedural steps that briefly explain the troubleshooting method to be performed next.

Primary Trouble Isolation

The primary trouble isolation procedure can be performed without disassembling the
E5070B/E5071B. Figure 4-2 shows the trouble isolation flow chart.

Step 1. Turn the instrument power on

About a few minutes after the E5070B/E5071B is turned on, the measurement view is
displayed on the screen. The display on the screen should be similar to Figure 4-12,
“Measurement view,” on page 213.

Step 2. Check the display

• If no display appears on the LCD after the E5070B/E5071B is turned on, go to “No
Display troubleshooting” on page 204.

• If the E5070B/E5071B stops in booting process despite something being displayed on

the LCD, go to “Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on
page 207.

• The power-on self test is performed once automatically after the E5070B/E5071B
measurement view is displayed. If the power-on self test fails, go to “Troubleshooting
Using Internal Test” on page 219.

Step 3. Check the basic function

If the front-panel/keyboard/mouse controls, LCD display, data storage, remote interface or

another function (except for measurement part) does not work correctly, go to “Function
Specific Troubleshooting” on page 227.

Step 4. Check the measurement function

If the instrument fails performance tests, go to “Performance test failure troubleshooting”

on page 260.

If the measurement function does not work correctly, perform the internal test and external
test provided in the E5070B/E5071B's service function. When the internal test fails, go to
“Internal Test Failure Troubleshooting” on page 222. When the external test fails, go to
“External Test Failure Troubleshooting” on page 254.

NOTE The internal test includes some unique measurement function tests in addition to the tests
that are common to the power-on self test. Thus, it is necessary to perform the internal test
even if the power-on self test passed.

202 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To Troubleshoot the Instrument

Figure 4-2 Primary trouble isolation flowchart

4. Troubleshooting

Chapter 4 203
 Troubleshooting
No Display troubleshooting

No Display troubleshooting
If the E5070B/E5071B displays nothing despite it is powered from proper ac power line,
isolate the failure in accordance with the procedure shown in Figure 4-3.
Connect the keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B rear panel connector, turn the power on and
start trouble isolation. The methods of trouble isolation are described in the procedural step
1 to 5.

Figure 4-3 No display trouble isolation procedure

204 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
No Display troubleshooting

Step 1. Check fan operation and DC monitor LED

If the rear panel fan (blower) doesn't run, a failure in A50 ATX power supply is assumed.
Remove the E5070B/E5071B outer cover and check if the following LEDs light:

• +3.3 V and +5 V dc monitor LEDs on A21 analog interface board

• +5 V dc monitor LED on A20 digital motherboard

NOTE To check all the outputs of the A50, measure the dc voltages at the output lead connectors
with a DMM. The dc output voltages and lead color information is provided in the module
cover label of the A50.

Step 2. Check system fans inside.

If the system fans on the chassis inside the E5070B/E5071B don't run, problem seems in
the A21 analog interface board or the flat cable between the A21 and the A22 front panel
keyboard. In this case, remove the E5070B/E5071B outer cover and make sure whether the
fans run or not.

If a beep and a power shutdown occur immediately after power is turned on, there is a
possibility that either of the fans won’t run. There are three system fans, which are
independently controlled by A6 RF switch/temperature controller board. These fans
initially run fast after the power is turned on, and usually stop after a while. One or some of
them restart running when the instrument warms up. The power shutdown occurs the
moment the system fan stops by any anomaly. In this case, check the A6 board and the fan
that doesn't run.

NOTE If the power shutdown occurs without a beep, the problem seems in the A21 or the A20
board. Check BIOS status of A20 is correct as described in “Configure the Motherboard”
on page 262.

Before replacing the board, check if the jumper setting on the A20 is correct as described in
“Configure the Motherboard” on page 262.

Step 3. Check LED of "Num Lock" key

4. Troubleshooting
Press "Num Lock" key on the keyboard. If the LED in the key doesn't light as shown in
Figure 4-4, a problem seems in the A20 digital motherboard.

Figure 4-4 LED of the Num Lock key

Make sure the followings before replacing the A20 board.

Chapter 4 205
 Troubleshooting
No Display troubleshooting

• Whether all the connections to the A20 are normal or not. Check if there is any
disconnection or connection working loose.

• Whether the jumper setting on the A20 is correct or not as described in “Configure the
Motherboard” on page 262.

• Whether BIOS options are correct or not as described in “To Confirm or Set the BIOS
Options” on page 264.

Step 4. Checking with the external monitor

Connect an external VGA monitor to the VIDEO output on the E5070B/E5071B rear
panel.

• If something is displayed on the external monitor, the problem is present around the
LCD. Also check the A21 and A22 because the ON/OFF setting of the LCD backlight
is controlled by the A21 through the A22 front interface board.

• If nothing is displayed even on the external monitor, the problem seems in the A20
digital motherboard or A26 LCD interface card.

NOTE Check if the A26 board is securely connected to the A20 board.

Step 5. Checking flat cable

Check a flat cable between the A26 and A31 LCD connector.

Step 6. Check around the backlight

Check A52 inverter board and a cable between the A52 and A26. Also check the cables
between the A51 LCD and A52. If the cables are normal, check the A51 LCD.

206 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and
below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,

MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42301396 and below
Figure 4-5 represents the booting process flow in the E5070B/E5071B. If the
E5070B/E5071B stops in the booting process, troubleshoot using the following
step-by-step procedure.

Figure 4-5 Booting process flowchart

4. Troubleshooting

Chapter 4 207
 Troubleshooting
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and
below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below
Step 1. Video BIOS booting

Video BIOS title screen shown in Figure 4-6 is displayed first, when the E5070B/E5071B
is turned on. If this screen doesn't appear (nothing appears), go to “No Display
troubleshooting” on page 204.

NOTE If the power shutdown occurs without a beep, the problem seems in the A21 or the A20
board. Check BIOS status of A20 is correct as described in “Configure the Motherboard”
on page 262.

Before replacing the board, check if the jumper setting on the A20 is correct as described in
“Configure the Motherboard” on page 262.

Figure 4-6 Video BIOS title screen

Step 2. Splash Screen

The splash screen is displayed with Agilent logo as shown in Figure 4-7.

If the splash screen is displayed, you can assume that the A20 digital motherboard is
functioning correctly.

NOTE While the splash screen is displayed. If you want to run the BIOS setup utility, push Delete
key as soon as the message of "Press TAB to show POST screen, DEL to enter SETUP, F12
to select BOOT DEVICE" in the splash screen.

Key Action

TAB Show the POST(Power-on Self Test) screen for BIOS.

208 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and
below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Key Action

DEL Run the BIOS Setup Utility. For details of how to run the
BIOS setup utility, refer to “Run the BIOS setup utility”
on page 264.

F12 Select the boot device. This menu is used for system
recovery. For the detail of the recovery, refer to Appendix
B, “System Recovery,” on page 473.

Figure 4-7 Splash Screen

4. Troubleshooting
Step 3. Searching for boot record

E5070B/E5071B starts booting from A27 mass storage (IDE-0) after the splash screen
appears. However, if the E5070B/E5071B cannot boot from the A27, a message of "Boot
Failure" is displayed as shown in Figure 4-8. In this case, the E5070B/E5071B may have a
problem around the A27.

Chapter 4 209
 Troubleshooting
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and
below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below
Figure 4-8 Message of Boot Failure

Check whether the A27 has a problem or is not using BIOS setup utility as shown in Figure
4-9. For details of how to run the BIOS setup utility, refer to “Run the BIOS setup utility”
on page 264.

Move the cursor to "Integrated Peripherals" using keys on the keyboard

and press Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu. .

Figure 4-9 Auto-Detect Hard Disk page

210 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and
below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below
When the mass storage is detected, the HDD model name is displayed as shown in Figure
4-9 in the Standard CMOS Features window under the BIOS setup utility.If the mass
storage is not detected, "None" is displayed The A27 mass storage is connected to the IDE
connector on the A20 digital motherboard via A30 3.5"-2.5" adapter and a flat cable.
Check the flat cable first. If it has no problem, replace the A27 mass storage.

Step 4. Windows boot screens

The Windows boot screens are displayed. The Windows boot screens consists of three
screens. Each screens is display in the order as shown in Figure 4-10. If the Windows boot
screens are displayed, it is assumed that the A27 works. While the Window screens are
displayed, Windows operating system is starting up.

Figure 4-10 Windows boot screens

4. Troubleshooting
If you encounter the following problems, try to reinstall the operating system before
replacing the A27.

• "xxx file is missing" is displayed on DOS screen.

• The Window boot screen is not displayed after the splash screen is displayed.

• Windows always boots up with Safe Mode.

NOTE If the E5070B/E5071B was turned off without shutdown process, Microsoft Scandisk runs
while the windows boot screens are displayed. If a serious problem is found in the
scandisk, reinstall the operating system. For details of the operating system installation,
refer to Appendix B, “System Recovery,” on page 473. If the operating system still doesn't
boot up properly after reinstallation, replace the A27.

Chapter 4 211
 Troubleshooting
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and
below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

NOTE The operating system automatically checks the device drivers, which are necessary to use
the E5070B/E5071B functions and are installed in the system before the E5070B/E5071B
is shipped from Agilent factory. If the operating system doesn't detect them, a message box
is displayed. In this case, install the device driver.

Step 5. Revision and option information

The firmware revision and hardware option information along with copyright declaration is
displayed as shown in Figure 4-11. The E5070B/E5071B firmware quickly starts up just
before this display appears. While the revision and option information is displayed, the
applications of various devices in the system are initialized.

Figure 4-11 Firmware revision and option information

If the display whited out, entirely blued or appeared with a dialog box, a mass storage
problem is suspected. Try to perform the mass storage recovery procedure.

NOTE If a message of "Will Shut Down in Five Seconds" is displayed in place of "Initializing.."
and the shutdown occurs, the A21 board fails in starting up. The following message may be
displayed before the shutdown occurs:

"Fatal Error: Failed to Initialize DSP Driver":

or "Fatal Error: Failed to Initialize DSP":

This message indicates that the A21 board doesn't work or is not properly connected to the
A20.

"Fatal Error: Failed to Update DSP Code":

212 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and
below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

If this happened, the A21 board failed in writing DSP program into flash ROM when the
firmware was installed first or updated to the newest version. A problem in the A21 or A20
is suspected.

Step 6. Measurement view

The measurement view as shown in Figure 4-12 is displayed after the system initialization
is completed without problem.

Figure 4-12 Measurement view

Step 7. Power-on self test

4. Troubleshooting
The power-on self test is executed once automatically before the measurement starts.
While the power-on self test is in progress, "Power on test" is displayed at the left in the
instrument status bar. If the power-on test fails, an error message is displayed there. For
more details, refer to “Troubleshooting Using Internal Test” on page 219.

Chapter 4 213
 Troubleshooting
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : MY42300633 and above, E5071B
: MY42301397 and above

Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : MY42300633

and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above
Figure 4-13 represents the booting process flow in the E5070B/E5071B. If the
E5070B/E5071B stops in the booting process, troubleshoot using the following
step-by-step procedure.

Figure 4-13 Booting process flowchart

Step 1. Splash Screen

214 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : MY42300633 and above, E5071B
: MY42301397 and above
The splash screen is displayed with Agilent logo as shown in Figure 4-14.

If the splash screen is displayed, you can assume that the A20 digital motherboard is
functioning correctly.

NOTE While the splash screen is displayed, if you want to run the BIOS setup utility, push F2 key
as soon as in the screen.

Figure 4-14 Splash Screen

Step 2. Windows boot screens

The Windows boot screens are displayed. The Windows boot screens consists of two
screens. Each screen is displayed in the order as shown in Figure 4-15. If the Windows
boot screens are displayed, it is assumed that the A27 HDD works. While the Window
screens are displayed, Windows operating system is starting up.

4. Troubleshooting

Chapter 4 215
 Troubleshooting
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : MY42300633 and above, E5071B
: MY42301397 and above
Figure 4-15 Windows boot screens

If you encounter the following problems, try to reinstall the operating system before
replacing the A27.

• "xxx file is missing" is displayed on DOS screen.

• The Window boot screen is not displayed after the splash screen is displayed.

• Windows always boots up with Safe Mode.

NOTE If the E5070B/E5071B was turned off without shutdown process, Microsoft Scandisk runs
while the windows boot screens are displayed. If a serious problem is found in the
scandisk, reinstall the operating system. For details of the operating system installation,
refer to Appendix B, “System Recovery,” on page 473. If the operating system still doesn't
boot up properly after reinstallation, replace the A27.

NOTE The operating system automatically checks the device drivers, which are necessary to use
the E5070B/E5071B functions and are installed in the system before the E5070B/E5071B
is shipped from Agilent factory. If the operating system doesn't detect them, a message box
is displayed. In this case, install the device driver.

Step 3. Revision and option information

The firmware revision and hardware option information along with copyright declaration is
displayed as shown in Figure 4-16. The E5070B/E5071B firmware quickly starts up just
before this display appears. While the revision and option information is displayed, the
applications of various devices in the system are initialized.

216 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : MY42300633 and above, E5071B
: MY42301397 and above
Figure 4-16 Firmware revision and option information

If the display whited out, entirely blued or appeared with a dialog box, a mass storage
problem is suspected. Try to perform the mass storage recovery procedure.

NOTE If a message of "Will Shut Down in Five Seconds" is displayed in place of "Initializing.."
and the shutdown occurs, the A21 board fails in starting up. The following message may be
displayed before the shutdown occurs:

"Fatal Error: Failed to Initialize DSP Driver":

or "Fatal Error: Failed to Initialize DSP":

This message indicates that the A21 board doesn't work or is not properly connected to the

4. Troubleshooting
A20.

"Fatal Error: Failed to Update DSP Code":

If this happened, the A21 board failed in writing DSP program into flash ROM when the
firmware was installed first or updated to the newest version. A problem in the A21 or A20
is suspected.

Step 4. Measurement view

The measurement view as shown in Figure 4-17 is displayed after the system initialization
is completed without problem.

Chapter 4 217
 Troubleshooting
Boot Process Troubleshooting for E5070B : MY42300633 and above, E5071B
: MY42301397 and above
Figure 4-17 Measurement view

Step 5. Power-on self test

The power-on self test is executed once automatically before the measurement starts.
While the power-on self test is in progress, "Power on test" is displayed at the left in the
instrument status bar. If the power-on test fails, an error message is displayed there. For
more details, refer to “Troubleshooting Using Internal Test” on page 219.

218 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Internal Test

Troubleshooting Using Internal Test

The Agilent E5070B/E5071B has an internal test function to diagnose the analog
measurement section and internal dc power supply voltages. The internal test makes it
possible to isolate a faulty board assembly without need of external test equipment. The
following paragraphs describe the procedure to perform the internal test.

NOTE There are cases where the internal test is ineffective (insufficient) for trouble isolation
because the test objects are limited to the circuit blocks and functions that can be tested
with nothing connected to the test ports. In such cases, refer to external test to perform the
diagnosis for the range uncovered with the internal test.

Power On Self Test

Power-on self-test always takes place once after the E5070B/E5071B is turned on. When a
failure is detected, a message of the "Power on self test failed" is displayed. The content of
the power-on self-test is the same as a portion of the internal test program and includes the
dc power supply voltage, source PLL synthesizer and level controller (ALC) tests. When
the self-test failed, perform the internal test to break down into the individual tests and
narrow down failure possibilities.

NOTE The following procedure can be used to restart the power-on self test as required.

a. Press key.
b. Click Service Menu and, then, Test Menu in the softkeys.
c. Click Power On Test to restart the test. Wait until the power-on test ends.
d. The test result (OK or Failed) is displayed in the Power On Test key.

PLL unlock
When a PLL of the frequency synthesizers is unlocked, not the "Power on self test failed"

4. Troubleshooting
but "Phase lock loop unlocked" message is displayed. If it occurs, A1 Source board may be
faulty. (There is also a low possibility that A17 ADC part of A2 Receiver board is faulty).

External reference signal phase unlock (Opt. 1E5)

If the "ExtRef" in the instrument status bar is displayed in gray, not turning blue, in using
the high stability time base (Opt. 1E5), A5 Crystal Oven board or the interconnection cable
between rear panel Ref Oven and Ref In connectors may be faulty. Also check whether the
"Ready" in the instrument status bar is displayed in blue (the warm-up in the instrument is
completed). If it is in gray, wait until the "Ready" turns blue.

To Execute the Internal Test

To isolate faulty board assembly in analog section, execute the internal test in accordance
with the following procedure. The test procedure needs to be performed using a mouse in
addition to the front panel keys.

Chapter 4 219
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Internal Test

NOTE To perform the internal test properly, the following conditions must be met:

1. Environmental temperature: 23°C ± 5°C

2. Warm-up status indicator in the instrument status bar exhibits "Ready" in blue.

NOTE Do not operate front panel keys, keyboard and mouse during the internal test. Changing the
instrument settings while the internal test is in progress will cause incorrect test results.

Step 1. Connect a mouse to the rear panel connector

Step 2. Press key.

Step 3. Press - - keys (or click Load Project) to select Load Project
function."Open" dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-18 Open dialog box

Step 4. Select "User [D]" (preset state) from menu in the "Lock in:" box.

Step 5. Double-click "Agilent" folder to open it and to access its menu.

Step 6. Double-click "Service" folder to open it.

Step 7. Click "Internal Test. VBA" program file to select it from program menu.

Step 8. Click "Open" button to download the internal test program.

Step 9. Press - - - (or click Select Macro) to select Select Macro function.

Step 10. Press (or click Module1 main) to open the Module1 main program file. "Internal
Test" dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 4-19. The dialog box shows the menu of
test groups to choose from.

220 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Internal Test

Figure 4-19 Internal Test dialog box

Step 11. All the test groups are preset to take effect. If it is necessary to perform a specific test group
or some test groups only, check in (click) the check boxes for the desired test group(s) and
clear the other check boxes.

NOTE Clicking "Select None" button clears all the check boxes. Clicking "Detail" button displays
the names of individual tests included in each test group. Click "Exit" to return to the
Internal Test dialog box.

Step 12. Click "Start Test" button to run the internal test program. The dialog box displays "Now
testing ..." while the internal test is in progress.

Step 13. When the internal test is completed, the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test group
as an example shown in Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20 Internal test result display example

4. Troubleshooting

If any of the test groups failed, click "Detail" button of that test group to look into the
breakdown of the test results. Figure 4-21 shows a breakdown test result example.

Chapter 4 221
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Internal Test

Figure 4-21 Breakdown test result display example

Step 14. To exit the internal test, click "Exit" button.

NOTE Clicking "Select None" button clears all the check boxes, but it does not clear the test
results.

Internal Test Failure Troubleshooting

Table 4-1 represents the contents of the internal tests and the relationships of failed tests to
probable faulty board assemblies. If the instrument fails the internal test, replace the faulty
board assembly as shown in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information

Test Test First failed test Test point / objective Probable faulty board assembly
No. group
A1 A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver A7
Src Lvl Amp Sw/T Att
Vern Mod ctrl A15 A17

1 A2 Master Analog GND DC bus on A2 (master) ###

DC
2 Analog +10V/-9V +10V and-9V on A2 ###

3 Analog +4V/-4V +4V and -4V on A2 ###

4 Analog +5V +5V for analog on A2 ###

5 Digital +5V +5V for digital on A2 ###

6 Digital +3.3V +3.3V on A2 ###

7 TEMPA Thermometer A ## ###

8 TEMPB Thermometer B ## ###

222 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Internal Test

Table 4-1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information

Test Test First failed test Test point / objective Probable faulty board assembly
No. group
A1 A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver A7
Src Lvl Amp Sw/T Att
Vern Mod ctrl A15 A17

9 A2 Slave Analog GND DC bus on A2 (slave) ###

DC(Opt.
10 313/314/4 Analog +10V/-9V +10V and-9V on A2 ### ###
13/414
11 Analog +4V/-4V +4V and -4V on A2 ###
only)
12 Analog +5V +5V for analog on A2 ###

13 Digital +5V +5V for digital on A2 ###

14 Digital +3.3V +3.3V on A2 ###

15 TEMPA Thermometer A on A2 ## ###

16 TEMPB Thermometer B on A2 ## ###

17 A6 DC Analog GND DC bus on A6 ### #

18 Analog +11V +11V on A6 ### #

19 AP5V +5V on A6 ### #

20 FAN1 Blower control 1 on A6 ### #

21 FAN2 Blower control 2 on A6 ### #

22 FAN3 Blower control 3 on A6 ### #

23 A1 DC RVT DC bus on A1 ### #

24 VTEMP Thermometer on A1 ### #

25 A1 PLL FVT(2.80000GHz) Fixed synthesizer on A1 ### #

26 FVT(2.84375GHz) Fixed synthesizer on A1 ### #

4. Troubleshooting
27 SVT(2.11GHz) Source swept synthe on ### #
A1

28 LVT(2.11GHz) Local swept synthe on ### #

A1

29 SVT(4.25GHz) Source swept synthe on ### #

A1

30 LVT(4.25GHz) Local swept synthe on ### #

A1

Chapter 4 223
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Internal Test

Table 4-1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information

Test Test First failed test Test point / objective Probable faulty board assembly
No. group
A1 A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver A7
Src Lvl Amp Sw/T Att
Vern Mod ctrl A15 A17

31 A1 ALC SAV(DAC100) Source level control on ### #

A1

32 SAV(DAC2000) Source level control on ### #

A1

33 SOP(f=300k) Source ALC on A1 ### #

34 LOP(f=300k) Local ALC on A1 ### #

35 SOP(f=1.3G) Source ALC on A1 ### #

36 LOP(f=1.3G) Local ALC on A1 ### #

37 SOP(f=1.31G) Source ALC on A1 ### #

38 LOP(f=1.31G) Local ALC on A1 ### #

39 SOP(f=2.1G) Source ALC on A1 ### #

40 LOP(f=2.1G) Local ALC on A1 ### #

41 SOP(f=2.11G) Source ALC on A1 ### #

42 LOP(f=2.11G) Local ALC on A1 ### #

43 SOP(f=4.25G) Source ALC on A1 ### #

44 LOP(f=4.25G) Local ALC on A1 ### #

45 A3 DC VTEMP Thermometer on A3 ###

46 VCNTL ATT Control Voltage ###

47 VDET(300kHz) ALC Loop # ###

48 VDET(10MHz) ALC Loop # ###

49 VDET(1GHz) ALC Loop # ###

50 VDET(8.5GHz) ALC Loop # ###

224 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Internal Test

Table 4-1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information

Test Test First failed test Test point / objective Probable faulty board assembly
No. group
A1 A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver A7
Src Lvl Amp Sw/T Att
Vern Mod ctrl A15 A17

51 Power S11(50MHz) Source power and Ref ## ## ## ## ##

Gain (A1 channel receiver gain for
and A2) Port 1

52 S11(3GHz) Source power and Ref ## ## ## ## ##

channel receiver gain for
Port 1

53 S11(6GHz) Source power and Ref ## ## ## ## ##

channel receiver gain for
Port 1 (E5071B)

54 S22(50MHz) Source power and Ref ## ## ## ## ##

channel receiver gain for
Port 2

55 S22(3GHz) Source power and Ref ## ## ## ## ##

channel receiver gain for
Port 2

56 S22(6GHz) Source power and Ref ## ## ## ## ##

channel receiver gain for
Port 2 (E5071B)

57 S33(50MHz) Source power and Ref ## ## ## ## ##

channel receiver gain for
Port 3
(Opt.313/314/413/414)

58 S33(3GHz) Source power and Ref ## ## ## ## ##

channel receiver gain for
port 3
(Opt.313/314/413/414)

4. Troubleshooting
59 S33(6GHz) Source power and Ref ## ## ## ## ##
channel receiver gain for
Port 3 (E5071B
Opt.313/314/413/44)

60 S44(50MHz) Source power and Ref ## ## ## ## ##

channel receiver gain for
Port 4 (Opt.413/414)

61 S44(3GHz) Source power and Ref ## ## ## ## ##

channel receiver gain for
Port 4 (Opt.413/414)

62 S44(6GHz) Source power and Ref ## ## ## ## ##

channel receiver gain for
Port 4 (E5071B
Opt.413/414)

Chapter 4 225
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using Internal Test

Table 4-1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information

Test Test First failed test Test point / objective Probable faulty board assembly
No. group
A1 A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver A7
Src Lvl Amp Sw/T Att
Vern Mod ctrl A15 A17

63 ATT R(5dB)-R(0dB) Source attenuator on A7 # # # ## ###

(A7)(Opt.
64 214/314/4 R(10dB)-R(0dB) Source attenuator on A7 # # # ## ###
14 only)
65 R(15dB)-R(0dB) Source attenuator on A7 # # # ## ###

66 R(20dB)-R(0dB) Source attenuator on A7 # # # ## ###

67 R(25dB)-R(0dB) Source attenuator on A7 # # # ## ###

68 R(30dB)-R(0dB) Source attenuator on A7 # # # ## ###

69 R(35dB)-R(0dB) Source attenuator on A7 # # # ## ###

###: Most suspicious assembly

##: Suspicious assembly

#: Possible faulty assembly

NOTE Internal tests from item number 1 to 50 are common to the power on self test.

NOTE When the internal test for a specific receiver port fails, identify the faulty A2 receiver
board as shown in Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22 Test port configuration

226 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Function Specific Troubleshooting

Function Specific Troubleshooting

If the E5070B/E5071B exhibits a failure symptom that is related to a specific function or
control such as a front panel key control, display, data storage, remote control interface,
printer interface, external trigger, external keyboard or mouse, isolate the trouble using the
Function Specific Troubleshooting procedures described below. The major functions of the
E5070B/E5071B and the troubleshooting procedure for each function are shown in Table
4-2.
Table 4-2 Major functions and troubleshooting procedures

Function Description Troubleshooting

Front panel keys All the E5070B/E5071B functions except for VBA Refer to “To Check the Front
and service functions can be set and controlled via Panel” on page 230.
the front panel keys.

Touch panel The E5070B/E5071B equipped with option 016 Refer to “To Check the
has a touch screen display that allows all the Touch Panel (Option 016
functions in the menu bars, setup windows and only)” on page 231.
dialog boxes to be set by a touch to the screen
panel.

LCD display Almost all the information including the Refer to “To Check the
measurement value, setup state, result data LCD” on page 231.
processing, menu bar, softkey label and others are
indicated on the 10.4-inch color LCD display.

External keyboard The external keyboard can be used for the entry of Refer to “To Check the
numerical and character data when it is connected External Keyboard” on
to the keyboard interface connector (PS-2) on the page 232.
rear panel.

Mouse The mouse can be used to move the pointer on the Refer to “To Check the
LCD display, select a function and change a Mouse” on page 232.
setting, when it is connected to the mouse interface

4. Troubleshooting
connector (PS-2) on the rear panel.

Floppy disk drive The 3.5-inch floppy disk drive on the front panel is Refer to “To Check the
used to save the E5070B/E5071B setup state and FDD” on page 232.
measurement data in a 3.5-inch, 1.4 MB floppy
disk in MS-DOS compatible format.

Video output An external color monitor can be used to display Refer to “To Check the
the same information as the E5070B/E5071B LCD Video output” on page 233.
display, when it is connected to the Video output
connector (24-pin D-Sub) on the rear panel.

External trigger input The external trigger input terminal (BNC) on the Refer to “To Check the
rear panel allows an external trigger source to be External Trigger Input” on
used for measurement trigger. page 233.

Chapter 4 227
 Troubleshooting
Function Specific Troubleshooting

Table 4-2 Major functions and troubleshooting procedures

Function Description Troubleshooting

LAN port The LAN interface port on the rear panel allows Refer to “To Check the
the E5070B/E5071B to be connected to 10/100 LAN” on page 233.
Base-T Ethernet.

Printer parallel port A specified printer can be used to print the Refer to “To Check the
E5070B/E5071B measurement display, setup Printer Parallel Port” on
display and others, when it is connected to the page 237.
Printer port (36-pin D-Sub) on the rear panel.

GPIB interface The GPIB compatibility allows the Refer to “To Check the
E5070B/E5071B to be operated as a talker/listener GPIB” on page 238.
or system controller on IEEE 488 interface bus.

Handler I/O port The Handler I/O port can be used to transfer a Perform “[7] Handler I/O
comparator decision output data to and perform Board tests” in
timing synchronization with an external handler. “Troubleshooting Using
External Test” on page 239 .

To Check the Device Driver

Make sure first whether the E5070B/E5071B device drivers are installed properly or not by
the following procedure, if a function of specific device in the E5070B/E5071B doesn't
work.

Step 1. Exit from the E5070B/E5071B measurement view in accordance with the procedure
described in “How to exit from the E5070B/E5071B Measurement View” on page 201.
Then, Windows desktop screen is displayed.

Step 2. Click "My Computer" with the right button and select "Properties" as shown in Figure
4-23. Then, the System Properties(Figure 4-24) will appear.

Figure 4-23 Opening System Property Window

228 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Function Specific Troubleshooting

Figure 4-24 System Properties Window (General)

Step 3. Click Hardware tab and Device Manager button. The operating system detects all the
necessary device drivers and displays the device names as shown in Figure 4-25.

Figure 4-25 System Properties Window (Hardware)

4. Troubleshooting

Click the icon with the right button and click Property to show the detail of the status. as
shown in Figure 4-26.

Chapter 4 229
 Troubleshooting
Function Specific Troubleshooting

Figure 4-26 Opening Device Driver Property

To Check the Front Panel

Procedure
Randomly press the front panel keys and rotate the knob to verify that they work normally.

Step 1. Press key.

Step 2. Click Service Menu and, then, Test Menu in the softkeys.

Step 3. Click Front Panel in the test menu. This opens "Front Panel Test" dialog box as shown in
Figure 4-27.

Figure 4-27 Front Panel Test dialog box

Step 4. Randomly press the front panel keys. The key code along with the name of the pressed key
are displayed in the dialog box as shown in Figure 4-28. Turn the rotary knob clockwise or
counterclockwise. The dialog box indicates the direction of the turned knob and a count of
RPG output.

230 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Function Specific Troubleshooting

Figure 4-28 Key code and key name display example

Step 5. To exit the front panel test, press key three times.

• If multiple keys fail to work, a problem in A22 front interface board or A21 analog
interface board is suspected. Also check the flat cable between the A21 and A22.
• If only a specific key doesn't work, check first if the key is subsided in the panel.
• If the rotary knob doesn't work, check the A22 board involving the RPG.

To Check the Touch Panel (Option 016 only)

Procedure
By touching the LCD display panel, select or change the setting of a function in the softkey
menu and, then, perform the same operation with hardkeys.

• If the touch panel doesn't work correctly whereas the hardkeys function normally, a
failure seems in the touch screen controller assembly (5183-4184) or touch-panel LCD
assembly (E5070-60102). (The touch panel is not replaceable independently of the
LCD.)
• Check the cable between the touch screen controller and the serial interface connector
on the A20 digital motherboard.
• If no problem is found in the above checks, a failure in the A20 digital motherboard is
suspected.

To Check the LCD

Procedure

4. Troubleshooting
Step 1. Press key.

Step 2. Click Service Menu and, then, Test Menu in the softkeys menu.

Step 3. Click Display in the test menu. The whole of the LCD screen turns Red, Green, Blue,
White and Black every 2 seconds and returns to the measurement view. If the color test
screen doesn't appear correctly, perform step 4.

Step 4. Connect an external VGA monitor to the VIDEO output port on the E5070B/E5071B rear
panel.

• If the monitor screen view is the same as the LCD display, the problem seems in the
A26 LCD interface card. Check first if the A26 board is securely connected to the A20
board.
• If only the LCD display has a problem, check the flat cable between the A26 and A31
LCD connector.

Chapter 4 231
 Troubleshooting
Function Specific Troubleshooting

• If the LCD is not illuminated with backlight, check A52 inverter board and the cable
between the A52 and A26. Also check the cables between the A51 LCD and A52.
• If the cables are normal, check the A51 LCD.

To Check the External Keyboard

Procedure

Step 1. Connect the external keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B rear panel connector.

Step 2. Turn the instrument on.

Step 3. Press key.

Step 4. Press and keys on the external keyboard, and verify that the cursor on the menu
bar moves up and down. If it doesn't work, the external keyboard or the A20 digital
motherboard may be faulty.

To Check the Mouse

Procedure

Step 1. Connect the mouse to the E5070B/E5071B rear panel connector.

Step 2. Turn the instrument on.

Step 3. Move the mouse and verify that the mouse pointer moves smoothly. If it doesn't move
smoothly, check first whether a foreign substance (dust, lint, etc.) is in the track ball hole of
the mouse or not.

Step 4. Verify that the mouse buttons work normally. If any button doesn't work or the mouse
pointer doesn't move, a failure in the mouse or the A20 digital motherboard is suspected.

To Check the FDD

Procedure

Step 1. Connect the external keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B rear panel connector.

Step 2. Turn the instrument on.

Step 3. Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk, formatted in DOS format, into the FDD slot.

Step 4. Press key, and click Save State in the menu bar.

Step 5. Click File Dialog... to open the "Save As" dialog box.

Step 6. Select 3 1/2 Floppy [A:] from "Save in" pull-down menu.

Step 7. Enter e5070b in the file name box from the keyboard.

Step 8. Click "Save" button.

Step 9. Press key, and click Recall State in the menu bar.

232 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Function Specific Troubleshooting

Step 10. Click File Dialog... to open the "Open" dialog box.

Step 11. Select 3 1/2 Floppy [A:] from "Look in" pull-down menu.

Step 12. Select e5070b file from the file menu or enter e5070b in the file name box.

Step 13. Click "Open" button.

If the file save or recall operation fails, a failure in the A28 FDD or the flat cable between
the A28 and A20 digital motherboard is suspected.

To Check the Video output

Procedure

Step 1. Connect an external VGA color monitor to the Video output port on the E5070B/E5071B
rear panel.

Step 2. Turn the external monitor on.

Step 3. Verify that the monitor screen view is the same as the display on the LCD. If the monitor
screen view is abnormal, a failure seems in the A26 LCD interface card.

To Check the External Trigger Input

Procedure

Step 1. Press and to initialize the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 2. Press key.

Step 3. Click Trigger Source and, then, External in the menu bar to set the trigger mode to
"External".

Step 4. Connect a BNC Short or 50 Ω termination to the Ext Trig connector on the rear panel and
disconnect it. Thereby a measurement trigger should be generated and a measurement
result (trace) should be refreshed.

4. Troubleshooting
Step 5. If no trigger occurs, a failure in the A21 analog interface board is suspected.

To Check the LAN

Procedure

Step 1. Connect a LAN cable between the LAN port on the rear panel and an external computer
(PC).

NOTE Use a crossed LAN cable to enable the peer-to-peer communication between the
E5070B/E5071B and the PC. If the E5070B/E5071B needs to be connected to the PC via a
multi port Hub, use a straight LAN cable.

Step 2. Press key.

Step 3. Click - Misc Setup - Network Setup - Network Configuration in the softkey menu to

Chapter 4 233
 Troubleshooting
Function Specific Troubleshooting

show the Network and Dial-up Connections window as shown in the left of Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29 Network and Dial-up Connections window

Step 4. Check the Local Area Connection icon to confirm whether the network connection is
enabled or disabled. The meaning of the icon is shown in the right of Figure 4-29. If the
connection is disabled, Double-click the Local Area Connection icon.

Step 5. Set up the IP address/subnet mask as follows.

a. Click the Local Area Connection icon with the right button and click “Property”. This
opens the "Local Area Connection Property" dialog box as shown in Figure 4-30.

Figure 4-30 Network dialog box

b. Click "Internal Protocol (TCP/IP)” icon.

c. Click the "Properties" button. This opens the "TCP/IP Properties" dialog box as shown
in Figure 4-31.

234 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Function Specific Troubleshooting

Figure 4-31 TCP/IP Properties dialog box (IP Address tab)

d. If the IP Address and the Subnet Mask are already assigned, go to Step 6. If they are
not assigned yet, enter them as follows:
IP Address 192.168.0.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway blank
To enter a specific IP Address and Subnet Mask, click "Use the following IP address"
option button to select it. Input your IP address in the "IP Address" box and your subnet
mask in the Subnet Mask box (overwrite the initial values).
e. Double-click “My Computer” icon on Windows desktop of the external PC. And
double-click Control Panel. The Control Panel window will appear.

NOTE From Step e to Step h are procedures for Windows

4. Troubleshooting
f. In the Control Panel window, double-click Network. The Network dialog box shown in
fig will appear. In the Configuration tab, select TCP/IP (display it in revers video) and
press the Properties button.
g. The dialog box appears. If Specify an IP address has been selected, record the IP
address and subnet mask.
h. If the Obtain an IP address automatically has been selected, select the Speccify an IP
address. Enter the IP address xxx.xxx.xxx.y and subnet mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx as
shown in Figure 4-32. The letters x represent the IP address and subnet mask of the
E5070B/E5071B. The letter y is different from the IP address of the E5070B/E5071B.
Press the OK button.

Chapter 4 235
 Troubleshooting
Function Specific Troubleshooting

Figure 4-32 Network Dialog Box (“IP Address” Tab)

Step 6. By clicking “OK” button, the network settings take effect. Verify the E5070B/E5071B
LAN settings and response to a command from the external computer as follows:

a. On the external computer, click "Start" button in the Windows Start menu bar using a
mouse.
b. Click "Programs" and "MS-DOS Prompt" (or "Command Prompt") to open the DOS
(Command) Prompt window.
c. Type a ping command followed by the E5070B/E5071B IP address as "ping
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" (where, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address such as 192.168.0.1
assigned in step 3-d.) Press key on the keyboard.
d. The external computer displays a message of ping command response from the
E5070B/E5071B. Figure 4-33 shows an example of normal result that indicates the IP
address, packet size, and a response time counted by the computer. The ping command
is repeated 4 times.

Figure 4-33 Example of normal ping command test result

If the E5070B/E5071B doesn't return the response, the external computer displays a

236 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Function Specific Troubleshooting

message of "Request timed out" as shown in Figure 4-34. In this case, a failure in the
A20 digital motherboard is suspected.

Figure 4-34 Example of no response for ping command

To Check the Printer Parallel Port

Test equipment

• Supported printer: Please refer

http://www.agilent.com/find/ctdkobe_printers
for the latest supported printers.
• Printer cable: Parallel cable

Procedure

Step 1. Connect the printer cable between the printer and the E5070B/E5071B printer parallel port.
Turn the printer on.

Step 2. Press and to initialize the E5070B/E5071B.

4. Troubleshooting
Step 3. Press key.

Step 4. Click Printer Setup in the softkey menu.

Step 5. Depending on the printer used, Click proper icon with the right button in the Property
window. Then, click "Set as Default Printer" button.

Step 6. Click Print in the softkey menu. Confirm the printout of the display image.

Step 7. If the printer fails to work, the problem seems in the A20 digital motherboard, printer
driver or connection of the printer cable.

Chapter 4 237
Troubleshooting
Function Specific Troubleshooting

To Check the GPIB

Procedure
Perform the E5070B/E5071B performance test program. If the controller cannot detect the
E5070B/E5071B, the problem seems in the A24 GPIB card or the connection of the GPIB
cable.

To Check the USB (USBTMC) Interface Card

Procedure
Connect the USB cable between the controller PC and the E5070B/E5071B. Turn the
controller PC on. If the E5070B/E5071B cannot detect the controller PC, the problem
seems in the USB (USBTMC) Interface Card or the A20 digital motherboard is suspected.

238 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Troubleshooting Using External Test

External test is the diagnostic test function to supplement the internal test. To enable a
diagnosis for the analog measurement blocks uncovered with the internal test, the external
test is performed using a coaxial cable, a fixed attenuator, coaxial terminations, a
calibration kit and a handler I/O test kit. The following paragraphs describe the procedure
to perform the external test.

Contents of the external test

The external test contains 7 test groups shown in Table 4-3. Each test group can be
performed independently and verifies one of various operating characteristics of the analog
measurement section.
Table 4-3 External test group menu

1 Tch Power Gain

2 IF Ranging

3 Receiver Linearity

4 Dynamic Range

5 Trace Noise

6 Error Term

7 Handler I/O Board

Test equipment required for external test

Table 4-4 shows the equipment required for performing the external test.
Table 4-4 Required equipment

4. Troubleshooting
Required test equipment Qty Recommended model

Coaxial cable with N type (m) connectors, 61 cm (24 in) 1 N6314A

Fixed attenuator, 10 dB, N(m) - N(f) 1 8491A/B/C

Calibration kit 1 85032F

Type-N coaxial Short termination 3 part of

85032F/85054D or
part of
85033E/85050D with
Type-N adapter

Handler I/O test kit 1 E5070-65001

NOTE Required quantity of Short termination is 3 in addition to one included in the calibration
kit.

Chapter 4 239
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

To Execute the External Test

To isolate faulty board assembly in analog section, execute the external test in accordance
with the following procedure. The test procedure needs to be performed using a mouse in
addition to the front panel keys.

NOTE To perform the external test properly, the following conditions must be met:

1. Environmental temperature: 23°C ± 5°C

2. Warm-up status indicator in the instrument status bar exhibits "Ready" in blue.

NOTE Do not operate front panel keys, keyboard and mouse during the external test. Changing
the instrument settings while the external test is in progress will cause incorrect test results.

Step 1. Connect a mouse to the rear panel connector

Step 2. Press key.

Step 3. Press - - keys (or click Load Project) to select Load Project function.
"Open" dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 4-35.

Figure 4-35 Open dialog box

Step 4. Select "User [D]" (preset state) from menu in the "Lock in:" box.

Step 5. Double-click "Agilent" folder to open it and to access its menu.

Step 6. Double-click "Service" folder to open it.

Step 7. Click "External Test. VBA" program file to select it from program menu.

Step 8. Click "Open" button to download the external test program.

Step 9. Press - - - (or click Select Macro) to select Select Macro function.

Step 10. Press (or click Module1 main) to open the Module1 main program file. "External
Test" window will be displayed as shown in Figure 4-36. This window shows the test items
and their results.

240 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Figure 4-36 External Test Window

Step 11. To perform the individual tests in each test group, refer to the procedure described below.

Step 12. To end the external test, click "Exit" button in the dialog box.

[1] Tch Power Gain tests

These tests check the source output power along with the test channel receiver gain for
each test port.

Required equipment:

Description Recommended model

Coaxial cable with N type (m) connectors, 61 cm (24 in) N6314A

Procedure:
Perform the following procedure after Step 11.

a. Click "Test" button in the right of “Tch Power Gain” in the window to open the "Tch
Power Gain" window. The window displays the S parameters and frequencies as the
test points. Their results are displayed in the matrix.(Figure 4-37)

4. Troubleshooting
Figure 4-37 Tch Power Gain tests dialog box example (E5071B Opt. 413/414)

b. Select the S parameter for the test by clicking the check boxes. Click the "Start Test"
button.The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4-38. Follow the
instruction.

Chapter 4 241
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

NOTE Clicking “Select All” button checks all the check box. Clicking "Select None" button
clears all the check boxes. Click "Exit" to return to the External Test dialog box

Figure 4-38 THRU 1&2 dialog box

c. Connect an type-N (m) coaxial cable to the test ports in accordance with Table 4-5.
Table 4-5 Tch Power Gain tests setups

Test name Objective of the test Connect an N Freq and IFBW settings
cable between (Automatic)

S12 Source power for port 2 Port 1 and Port2 50 MHz/3 GHz/6GHz, 10
and test channel kHz BW
receiver gain for port 1

S21 Source power for port 1 Port 1 and Port 2 50 MHz/3 GHz/6GHz, 10
and test channel kHz BW
receiver gain for port 2

S31 Source power for port 1 Port 1 and Port 3 50 MHz/3 GHz/6GHz, 10
and test channel kHz BW
receiver gain for port 3
(Opt. 313/314/413/414)

S41 Source power for port 1 Port 1 and Port 4 50 MHz/3 GHz/6GHz, 10
and test channel kHz BW
receiver gain for port 4
(Opt. 413/414)

NOTE RF output power is 5 dBm and Nop is 101 for all the tests shown in the table.

d. Click "OK" button to run the test program. The dialog box displays "Now testing..."
while the Tch Power Gain tests are in progress.
e. When the tests are completed, the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as
shown in Figure 4-39.

242 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Figure 4-39 Power Gain test results display example (E5071B Opt. 413/414)

f. If at least one of the Tch Power Gain tests failed, refer to Table 4-11 External Test
Failure Troubleshooting Information.
g. To return to the External Test dialog box, click "Exit" button.

[2] Tch IF Ranging tests

These tests check the IF signal level ranging operation of test channel receiver for each test
port.

Required equipment:
Description Recommended model

Fixed attenuator, 10 dB, N(m) - N(f) 8491A/B/C

Figure 4-40 IF Ranging tests dialog box example (E5070B/E5071B Opt. 413/414)

4. Troubleshooting

b. Select the port numbers for the test by clicking the check boxes. Then, click “Start
Test“ button. The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4-41. Follow the
instruction.

NOTE Clicking “Select All” button checks all the check boxes. Clicking "Select None" button
clears all the check boxes. Click "Exit" to return to the External Test dialog box

Chapter 4 243
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Figure 4-41 10dB 1&2 dialog box

c. Connect a 10 dB fixed attenuator and an type-N (m) coaxial cable in series between the
test ports in accordance with Table 4-6. Make the connection as shown in Figure 4-42.

Figure 4-42 10 dB attenuator and cable connection (E5070B/E5071B Opt. 413/414)

Table 4-6 Tch IF Ranging tests setups

Test name Objective of the test Connect a 10 dB Center/Span freq, IFBW,

attenuator and an N Nop and RF power settings
cable between (Automatic)

Port 1 IF signal level ranging operation Port 1 and Port 2 50 MHz/0 Hz, 1 kHz BW, 101,
of test channel receiver for Port 1 -5 dBm

Port 2 IF signal level ranging operation Port 1 and Port 2 50 MHz/0 Hz, 1 kHz BW, 101,
of test channel receiver for Port 2 -5 dBm

Port 3 IF signal level ranging operation Port 1 and Port 3 50 MHz/0 Hz, 1 kHz BW, 101,
of test channel receiver for Port 3 -5 dBm
(Opt. 313/314/413/414)

Port 4 IF signal level ranging operation Port 1 and Port 4 50 MHz/0 Hz, 1 kHz BW, 101,
of test channel receiver for Port 4 -5 dBm
(Opt. 413/414)

d. Click "OK" button to run the test program. The dialog box displays "Now testing..."
while the Tch IF Ranging tests are in progress.

244 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

e. When the tests are completed, the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as
shown in Figure 4-43.

Figure 4-43 Tch IF Ranging test results display example (E5070B/E5071B Opt. 413/414)

f. If at least one of the Tch IF Ranging tests failed, refer to Table 4-11 External Test
Failure Troubleshooting Information.
g. To return to the External Test dialog box, click "Exit" button.

[3] Receiver Linearity tests

These tests check the linearity (gain compression) of test channel receiver for each test
port.

Required equipment:

Description Recommended model

Coaxial cable with type-N (m) connectors, 61 cm (24 in) N6314A

Procedure:

4. Troubleshooting
Perform the following procedure after Step 11.

a. Click "Test" button in the right of “Receiver Linearity” in the window to open the
"Receiver Linearity" window. The window displays the port number and receiver
channel as the test points. The result for each S parameter is displayed as the 4×2
matrix.(Figure 4-44).

Chapter 4 245
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Figure 4-44 Receiver Linearity tests dialog box example (E5070B/E5071B Opt. 413/414)

b. Select the S parameters for the test by clicking the check boxes. Then, click “Start Test“
button. The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4-45. Follow the
instruction.

NOTE Clicking “Select All” button checks all the check boxes. Clicking "Select None" button
clears all the check boxes. Click "Exit" to return to the External Test dialog box

Figure 4-45 THRU 1&2 dialog box

c. Connect an type-N (m) coaxial cable between the test ports in accordance with Table
4-7.
Table 4-7 Receiver Linearity test setups

Test name Objective of the test Connect an N Sweep freq span, IFBW,
cable between Nop and RF power
settings (Automatic)

S12 Receiver linearity for Port 1 Port 1 and Port 2 Full span, 10 kHz BW, 201,
max. source power and -10
dBm below max..

S21 Receiver linearity for Port 2 Port 1 and Port 2 Full span, 10 kHz BW, 201,
max. source power and -10
dBm below max..

S31 Receiver linearity for Port 3 Port 1 and Port 3 Full span, 10 kHz BW, 201,
(Opt. 313/314/413/414) max. source power and -10
dBm below max..

S41 Receiver linearity for Port 4 Port 1 and Port 4 Full span, 10 kHz BW, 201,
(Opt. 413/414) max. source power and -10
dBm below max..

246 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

d. Click "OK" button to run the test program. The dialog box displays "Now testing..."
while the Receiver Linearity tests are in progress.
e. When the tests are completed, the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as
shown in Figure 4-46.

Figure 4-46 Receiver Linearity test results example (E5070B/E5071B Opt. 413/414)

f. If at least one of the Receiver Linearity tests failed, refer to Table 4-11 External Test
Failure Troubleshooting Information.
g. To return to the External Test dialog box, click "Exit" button.

[4] Dynamic Range tests

These tests check the dynamic range of test channel receiver for each test port.

Required equipment:

Description Recommended model

Type-N coaxial Short termination (4 ea.) part of 85032F/85054D

or part of
85033E/85050D with

4. Troubleshooting
Type-N adapter

Procedure:
Perform the following procedure after Step 11.

a. Click "Test" button in the right of “Dynamic Range” in the window to open the
"Dynamic Range" window. The window displays the S parameters and frequency as
the test points. The results are displayed as matrix.(Figure 4-47).

Chapter 4 247
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Figure 4-47 Dynamic Range tests dialog box example (E5071B Opt. 413/414)

b. Select the S parameters for the test by clicking the check boxes. Then, click “Start Test“
button. The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4-48. Follow the
instruction.

NOTE Clicking “Select All” button checks all the check boxes. Clicking "Select None" button
clears all the check boxes. Click "Exit" to return to the External Test dialog box

Figure 4-48 SHORT (all ports) dialog box

c. Connect type-N Short terminations to all the test ports.

NOTE For more information on the Dynamic Range tests setup, see Table 4-8.

Table 4-8 Dynamic Range tests setup

Test parameter Connect Short Sweep freq span, IFBW, Nop and
terminations to RF power settings (Automatic)

S12 All the test ports 3 MHz to 3 GHz (E5070B),

S13 (Opt. 313/314/413/414)
3 MHz to 8.5 GHz (E5071B),
S14 (Opt. 413/414)
S21 3 kHz BW, 101, max. source power
S23 (Opt. 313/314/413/414)
S31 (Opt. 313/314/413/414)
S32 (Opt. 313/314/413/414)
S34 (Opt. 413/414)
S41 (Opt. 413/414)
S43 (Opt. 413/414)

248 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

d. Click "OK" button to run the test program. The dialog box displays "Now testing..."
while the Dynamic Range tests are in progress.
e. When the tests are completed, the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as
shown in Figure 4-49.

Figure 4-49 Dynamic Range test results example (E5071B Opt. 413/414)

f. If at least one of the Dynamic Range tests failed, refer to Table 4-11 External Test
Failure Troubleshooting Information.
g. To return to the External Test dialog box, click "Exit" button.

[5] Trace Noise tests

These tests check the trace noise levels for the selected test ports.

Required equipment:

Description Recommended model

Type-n coaxial Short termination. (4 ea) part of 85032F/85054D

4. Troubleshooting
or part of
85033E/85050D with
Type-N adapter

Procedure:
Perform the following procedure after Step 11.

a. Click "Test" button in the right of “Trace Noise” in the window to open the "Trace
Noise" window. The window displays the S parameters and frequencies as the test
points. The result for each S parameter is displayed as the 9×2 matrix.(Figure 4-50).

Chapter 4 249
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Figure 4-50 Trace Noise tests dialog box example (E5071B)

b. Select the S parameter for the test by clicking the check boxes. Then, click “Start Test“
button. The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4-51. Follow the
instruction.

NOTE Clicking “Select All” button checks all the check boxes. Clicking "Select None" button
clears all the check boxes. Click "Exit" to return to the External Test dialog box

Figure 4-51 SHORT (all ports) dialog box

c. Connect an type-N Short termination to all the test ports.

NOTE For more information on the Trace Noise tests setup, see Table 4-9.

Table 4-9 Trace Noise tests setup

Test parameter Connect Short Test frequency points, IFBW, Nop, RF

termination to power settings and Sweep delay(Automatic)

S11 All test ports 3 MHz, 1.3 GHz, 1.31 GHz, 2.1 GHz and 2.11
GHz (E5070B),
S22
3 MHz, 1.3 GHz, 1.31 GHz, 2.1 GHz, 2.11
S33 GHz, 4.25 GHz, 4.26 GHz, 7.5 GHz and 8.5
GHz (E5071B),
S44
3 kHz BW, 101, max. source power, 100 ms

d. Click "OK" button to run the test program. The dialog box displays "Now testing..."
while the Trace Noise (port 1) tests are in progress.
e. When the tests are completed, the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as
shown in Figure 4-52.

250 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Figure 4-52 Trace Noise test results example (E5071B)

f. If at least one of the Trace Noise tests failed, refer to Table 4-11 External Test Failure
Troubleshooting Information.
g. To return to the External Test dialog box, click "Exit" button.

[6] Error Term tests

These tests check the reflection tracking, directivity and source match for all test ports.

Required equipment:

Description Recommended model

Calibration kit (type-N Open, Short and 50Ω Load 85032F

terminations)

Procedure:
Perform the following procedure after Step 11.

a. Click "Test" button in the right of “Error Term” in the window to open the "Error Term"
window. The window displays the port number and frequencies as the test points. The

4. Troubleshooting
result for each test port is displayed as the 4×3 matrix.(Figure 4-53).

Chapter 4 251
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Figure 4-53 Error Term (port 1) tests dialog box example (E5071B)

b. Select the test ports for the test by clicking the check boxes. Then, click “Start Test“
button. The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4-54. Follow the
instruction.

NOTE Clicking “Select All” button checks all the check boxes. Clicking "Select None" button
clears all the check boxes. Click "Exit" to return to the External Test dialog box

Figure 4-54 OPEN (port 1) dialog box

c. Connect an type-N Open termination to the specified port.

NOTE For more information on Error Term tests setup, see Table 4-10.

Table 4-10 Error Term tests setup

Test parameter Connect Sweep freq span, IFBW, Nop and RF

power settings, System correction
(Automatic)

Source match Open Full span, 1 kHz BW, 201, 5 dBm , System
correction ON
Directivity Short

Reflection tracking Load

d. Click "OK" button to continue the test. The "Error Term" dialog box displays "Now
calibrating..." for a few seconds. Wait until "SHORT" dialog box opens.
e. Connect an type-N Short termination to the specified test port.
f. Click "OK" button to continue the test and wait until "LOAD" dialog box opens.

252 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

g. Connect a 50 Ω Load termination to the specified test port.

h. Click "OK" button to continue the test and wait for a few seconds.
i. Repeat step form c to h for all of the selected test ports.
j. When the tests are completed, the "Error Term" dialog box displays Pass or Fail for
each test as shown in Figure 4-55.

Figure 4-55 Error Term test results example (E5071B)

k. If at least one of the Error Term tests failed, refer to Table 4-11 External Test Failure
Troubleshooting Information.
l. To return to the External Test dialog box, click "Exit" button.

[7] Handler I/O Board tests

These tests check the function of Handler I/O board for interfacing with an external
component handler. The tests are performed using a handler I/O test kit as a substitute for
the handler.

Required equipment:

4. Troubleshooting
Description Recommended model

Handler I/O test kit E5070-65001

Procedure:
Perform the following procedure after Step 11.

a. Click "Handler I/O Board" in the pull down menu of the Test List box.
b. Click "Test" button in the dialog box. Then "Handler I/O Board" tests dialog box opens
as shown in Figure 4-56.

Chapter 4 253
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Figure 4-56 Handler I/O Board tests dialog box

c. Click the "Test" button in the dialog box. A message of "Connect Handler I/O Test Kit"
will be displayed.
d. Connect the handler I/O test kit to the Handler I/O connector on the rear panel.
e. Click "OK" button. The dialog box displays "Now testing..." while the Handler I/O
Board test is in progress.
f. When the tests are completed, the dialog box displays Pass or Fail of test result as
shown in Figure 4-57.

Figure 4-57 Handler I/O Board test result example

g. If the Handler I/O Board test failed, refer to Table 4-11 External Test Failure
Troubleshooting Information.
h. To return to the External Test dialog box, click "Exit" button.

NOTE To end the external test, click "Exit" button in the "External Test" dialog box.

External Test Failure Troubleshooting

Table 4-11 represents the contents of the external tests, test objectives and the relationships
of failed tests to probable faulty board assemblies. If the instrument fails an external test,

254 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

replace the faulty board assembly as shown in Table 4-11.

Table 4-11 External test failure troubleshooting information

Test Test group First failed Test objective Probable faulty board assembly
No. test
A1 A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver A23
Src Lev Pow Sw/T Hnd
Vern Amp cont A15 A17

1 Power Gain S12(50MHz) Source power ## ## ## ## ##

(A1 and A2) for Port 2 and
receiver gain for
Port 1

2 S12(3GHz) Source power ## ## ## ## ##

for Port 2 and
receiver gain for
Port 1

3 S12(6GHz) Source power ## ## ## ## ##

for Port 2 and
receiver gain for
Port 1 (E5071B)

4 S21(50MHz) Source power ## ## ## ## ##

for Port 1 and
receiver gain for
Port 2

5 S21(3GHz) Source power ## ## ## ## ##

for Port 1 and
receiver gain for
Port 2

6 S21 (6GHz) Source power ## ## ## ## ##

for Port 1 and
receiver gain for
Port 2 (E5071B)

4. Troubleshooting

Chapter 4 255
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Table 4-11 External test failure troubleshooting information

Test Test group First failed Test objective Probable faulty board assembly
No. test
A1 A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver A23
Src Lev Pow Sw/T Hnd
Vern Amp cont A15 A17

7 S31(50MHz) Source power ## ## ## ## ##

for Port 1 and
receiver gain for
Port 3 (Opt.
313/314/413/41
4)

8 S31(3GHz) Source power ## ## ## ## ##

for Port 1 and
receiver gain for
Port 3 (Opt.
313/314/413/41
4)

9 S31(6GHz) Source power ## ## ## ## ##

for Port 1 and
receiver gain for
Port 3 (E5071B
Opt.
313/314/413/41
4)

10 S41(50MHz) Source power ## ## ## ## ##

for Port 1 and
receiver gain for
port 4 (Opt.
413/414)

11 S41(3GHz) Source power ## ## ## ## ##

for Port 1 and
receiver gain for
port 4 (Opt.
413/414)

12 S41(6GHz) Source power ## ## ## ## ##

for Port 1 and
receiver gain for
Port 4 (E5071B
Opt. 413/414)

256 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Table 4-11 External test failure troubleshooting information

Test Test group First failed Test objective Probable faulty board assembly
No. test
A1 A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver A23
Src Lev Pow Sw/T Hnd
Vern Amp cont A15 A17

13 Tch IF S12(T1, Mag) IF signal level # # # # ###

Ranging(A2) S12(T1, Phase) ranging
S21(R1, Mag) operation of
S21(R1, Phase) receiver for Port
1

14 S21(T2, Mag) IF signal level # # # # ###

S21(T2, Phase) ranging
S12(R2, Mag) operation of
S12(R2, Phase) receiver for Port
2

15 S31(T3, Mag) IF signal level # # # # ###

S31(T3, Phase) ranging
S13(R3, Mag) operation of
S13(R3, Phase) receiver for Port
3 (Opt.
313/314/413/41
4)

16 S41(T4, Mag) IF signal level # # # # ###

S41(T4, Phase) ranging
S14(R4, Mag) operation of
S14(R4, Phase) receiver for Port
4 (Opt. 413/414)

17 Receiver S12(Mag.) Receiver gain # # # ### #

Linearity S12(Phase) linearity for Port
1

18 S21(Mag.) Receiver gain # # # ### #

S21(Phase) linearity for Port

4. Troubleshooting
2

19 S31(Mag.) Receiver gain # # # ### #

S31(Phase) linearity for Port
3 (Opt.
313/314/413/41
4)

20 S41(Mag.) Receiver gain # # # ### #

S41(Phase) linearity for Port
4 (Opt. 413/414)

21 Dynamic S12, S13, Dynamic range ## # # ## #

Range S14,S21, for all test ports
S23,S31, S32,
S34 (Opt.
313/314/413/41
4),S41, S43
(Opt. 413/414)

Chapter 4 257
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

Table 4-11 External test failure troubleshooting information

Test Test group First failed Test objective Probable faulty board assembly
No. test
A1 A3 A4 A6 A2 Receiver A23
Src Lev Pow Sw/T Hnd
Vern Amp cont A15 A17

22 Trace Noise S11(Mag./Phas Trace noise for ### # ## ##

(port 1) e) Port 1

23 Trace Noise S22(Mag./Phas Trace noise for ### # ## ##

(port 2) e) Port 2

24 Trace Noise S33(Mag./Phas Trace noise for ### # ## ##

(port 3) e) Port 3
(Opt.
313/314/413/41
4)

25 Trace Noise S44(Mag./Phas Trace noise for ### # ## ##

(port 4) e) Port 4
(Opt. 413/414)

26 Error Term - Source match, # # # ###

(port 1) directivity and
reflection
tracking for Port
1

27 Error Term - Source match, # # # ###

(port 2) directivity and
reflection
tracking for Port
2

28 Error Term - Source match, # # # ###

(port 3) directivity and
reflection
tracking for Port
3
(Opt.
313/314/413/41
4)

29 Error Term - Source match, # # # ###

(port 4) directivity and
reflection
tracking for Port
4
(Opt. 413/414)

30 Handler I/O - Handler ###

Board interface I/O
signals

###: Most suspicious assembly

##: Suspicious assembly

258 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using External Test

#: Possible faulty assembly

NOTE When the external test for a specific receiver port fails, identify the faulty A2 receiver
board as shown in Figure 4-58.

Figure 4-58 Test port configuration

4. Troubleshooting

Chapter 4 259
 Troubleshooting
Performance test failure troubleshooting

Performance test failure troubleshooting

This section describes the adjustment and troubleshooting procedures used when the
E5070B/E5071B fails the performance tests. If the performance of the instrument is critical
for the test limits and seems to be adjustable, perform first the adjustment(s) related to the
failed test. When the test result is far from the tolerance of the test or the performance is not
adjustable, isolate the faulty assembly in accordance with the "Performance tests failure
troubleshooting procedure".

Recommended adjustment for performance test failure

Table 4-12 shows the recommended adjustments when the performance test fails. Select
the adjustment program corresponding to the recommended adjustment and perform the
adjustment.

NOTE There are no adjustment related to the crosstalk, system dynamic range and uncorrected
system performance.

Table 4-12 Recommended adjustment for performance test failure

Test First failed test Recommended adjustment

Num.
X'tal oven Source (A1) Receiver Receiver IF
(A5) RF (A15) (A17)

1 Frequency accuracy test (Standard) √

1A Frequency accuracy test (Opt. 1E5 √

only)

2 RF output level accuracy and flatness √

test

3 RF output level linearity test √

4 CW trace noise test √

5 Crosstalk test

6 System dynamic range test

7 Dynamic accuracy test √

8 Uncorrected system performance test

Performance test failure troubleshooting

Table 4-13 represents the relationships between the failed test and probable faulty
assembly. If the performance test failure cannot be removed by a proper adjustment,
replace the assembly shown in this table.
Note that this table lists some typical cases. There are possibilities that other assembly may
be faulty. To troubleshoot further, perform the internal test and external test procedures

260 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
Performance test failure troubleshooting

NOTE When Crosstalk, System dynamic range or Uncorrected system performance test fails,
check first whether the connections of the RF semi-rigid cables between the suspicious
assembly and others are tight or loose. Also check for possible disconnection (impairment)
of the cables and connectors.

Table 4-13 Performance test failure troubleshooting information

Test First failed test Probable faulty board assembly

Num
A1 A3 A4 A5 A2 Receiver A8
Src Lev. Amp Xtl Src
Vern. Mod. Oven A15 A17 Swt

1 Frequency accuracy test ###

(Standard)

1A Frequency accuracy test ## ###

(Opt. 1E5 only)

2 RF output level accuracy ### ### ###

and flatness test

3 RF output level linearity ### ### ##

test

4 CW trace noise test ### ## ##

5 Crosstalk test # ## ## # ###

6 System dynamic range test ## ## ## # ###

7 Dynamic accuracy test ### ##

8 Uncorrected system # ## ## # ###

performance test

###: Most suspicious assembly

##: Suspicious assembly

4. Troubleshooting
#: Possible faulty assembly

Chapter 4 261
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below

To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for

E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below
When you replace the A20 digital motherboard, you need to confirm the jumper settings
for the specific CPU installed. The jumper settings information is provided in “Configure
the Motherboard” on page 262.
You also need to confirm the BIOS options using the BIOS setup utility procedure. Since
the BIOS detects the A27 mass storage and displays the profile of the disk drive, it is a
useful tool to verify whether the A27 has a problem or not. The BIOS setup procedure is
described in “To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options” on page 264.

To Identify the Motherboard Installed

Confirm the splash screen is displayed in the beginning of the boot process as shown in
Figure 4-7.

Configure the Motherboard

There is a jumper on the A20 digital motherboard that must be configured to the correct
setting. Confirm the jumper settings and set the jumpers correctly as shown in Figure 4-59.

NOTE When the power shutdown occurs without a beep, clear A20 CMOS and set BIOS
according to the following procedure.

• To clear A20 CMOS

1. Power off the system.

2. Remove jumper from JP1 pins 1-2 and put on JP1 pins 2-3. Wait for a few seconds
and set JP1 back to its default setting, pins 1-2.
3. Power on the system.

4. After powering on the system, press to enter the BIOS setup utility.

262 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Figure 4-59 A20 digital motherboard jumpers location and settings

Testing DRAM on the Motherboard

4. Troubleshooting
When the A20 digital motherboard is replaced with a new one, it is advisable to perform
the DRAM test before proceeding to the BIOS setup utility procedure. Confirm the DRAM
count in accordance with the following procedure.

Step 1. Connect the external keyboard and mouse to the E5070B/E5071B rear panel connectors.

Step 2. Turn the instrument on. Wait until the E5070B/E5071B boots up. Do not press any key
until the E5070B/E5071B measurement view appears.

Step 3. Press key on the front panel.

Step 4. Click Misc Setup in the softkey menu.

Step 5. Click Control Panel... in the softkey menu.

Step 6. Scroll the function viewer to find "System" icon and double-click "System". This opens
"System Properties" window as shown in Figure 4-60.

Chapter 4 263
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Figure 4-60 System Properties window

Step 7. Verify that "523,828 KB RAM" is displayed in the Computer profile as shown in Figure
4-60. If it is not correct, the A20 board is faulty.

Step 8. Click "OK" button to close the window.

Step 9. Turn the E5070B/E5071B off before proceeding to the next step “To Confirm or Set the
BIOS Options”.

To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options

BIOS is the PC's built-in program describing the standard procedure of basic inputs and
outputs for the system hardware. BIOS involves the system BIOS, start-up program and
BIOS setup utility. The E5070B/E5071B starts up first with the BIOS when the power is
turned on. Use the following procedure to confirm or set the BIOS options, known as the
BIOS setup utility.

Run the BIOS setup utility

Use the external keyboard to select and set various options in the BIOS setup utility. Do not
operate the E5070B/E5071B front panel until you exit the BIOS option setup procedure.

Procedure Step 1. Connect the external keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B rear panel connector.

Step 2. Turn the instrument on.

Step 3. Press key as soon as the message "Press TAB to show POST screen, DEL to enter
SETUP, F12 to select BOOT DEVICE" is displayed. Wait a few seconds until the message
"Enter CURRENT Password:" appears.

Step 4. Press key (The LED in the key lights.)

Step 5. Enter password "e507xa" and press . Then BIOS setup utility main menu is

264 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
displayed as shown in Figure 4-61.

Figure 4-61 BIOS setup utility main menu

Step 6. The BIOS setup utility has 14 selectable windows. Brief descriptions and reference pages
for these windows are provided in Table 4-14. The details of the BIOS option settings in
each window are described on the page listed in the table.

Step 7. Select a desired window using keys. To perform an operation, use

key.

NOTE If you want to quit the BIOS option setting and exit the BIOS setup utility without saving
changes in the setup, select "Exit Without Saving" and press .

4. Troubleshooting
Table 4-14 BIOS setup utility windows and references

Window name Contents of setup utility Ref. page

Standard CMOS The default settings of all the Standard on

Features CMOS Setup options. The procedure to set page 267
date or time is also described.

Advanced CMOS The default settings of all the advanced on

Features CMOS Setup options page 268

Advanced Chipset The default settings of all the Advanced on

Features Chipset Setting options page 270

Integrated Peripherals The default settings of all the Peripheral on

Setup options page 271

Chapter 4 265
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Table 4-14 BIOS setup utility windows and references

Window name Contents of setup utility Ref. page

Power Management The default settings of all the Power on

Setup Management Setup options page 273

PnP/PCI The default settings of all the PCI/Plug and on

Configurations Play Setup options page 275

PC Health Status The default setting of the CPU temperature on

the system beeps for a warning alarm. page 276

Frequency/Voltage The default settings of the CPU’s clock on

Control frequency and voltage. page 276

Change Supervisor The method to assign a password (This on

Password option is used only when the password has page 277
not been set in the E5070B/E5071B.)

Change User Password None (This option is unnecessary for the

E5070B/E5071B.)

Load Setting 1 None (This option is unnecessary for the

Defaults E5070B/E5071B.)

Load Setting 2 The procedure to initialize BIOS option on

Defaults settings (This option is used only when the page 266
A20 digital motherboard is replaced with a
new one.)

Save & Exit Setup The procedure to save the option settings and on
exit from BIOS setup utility. page 277

Exit Without Saving The procedure to exit from BIOS setup utility on
without saving the option settings. page 278

Load Setting 2 Defaults

NOTE Perform the following procedure only when the A20 digital motherboard is replaced. Jump
to “Standard CMOS Features” when you check whether the BIOS options are correctly set
or not.

Load Setting 2dialog box is displayed by choosing "Load Setting 2 Defaults" using
keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu. The
dialog box prompts you to select Y (Yes) or N (No) about "Load Setting 2 Defaults (Y/N)
?" as shown in Figure 4-62. Press and to load the setting 2 stored in the BIOS
ROM. As a result, almost of all the BIOS options are automatically configured to the
optimal settings for the E5070B/E5071B.

266 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Figure 4-62 Load Setting 2 dialog box

Standard CMOS Features

Standard CMOS Setup options are displayed by choosing "Standard CMOS Setup" using
keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu.
The current setup states are displayed as shown in Figure 4-63. If date or time is incorrect,
select it using keys, and change the setting by pressing or
keys.

If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu, press key.

4. Troubleshooting

Chapter 4 267
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Figure 4-63 Standard CMOS Features window

Advanced BIOS Features

Advanced CMOS Features options are displayed by choosing "Advanced CMOS Features"
using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main
menu. Then the window as shown in Figure 4-64 appears. Compare the actual BIOS option
settings with the default settings shown in Table 4-15. If there is any difference, select it
using and keys, and change the option setting by pressing or keys
so that it becomes the same as the default setting.

If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu, press key.

268 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Figure 4-64 Advanced BIOS Features window

Table 4-15

Virus Warning Disabled

Quick Power On Self Test Enabled

Boot Up NumLock Status On*1

IDE HDD Block Mode Enabled

Gate A20 Option Fast

Typematic Rate Setting Disabled

4. Troubleshooting
Security Option Setup

OS Select For DRAM > 64MB Non-OS2

Summary Screen Show

³CPU Internal Cache(L1) Enabled

³CPU L2 Cache Enabled

³CPU L2 Cache ECC Checking Enabled

Boot Sequence & Floppy Setup

³First Boot Device 1st IDE-HDD*1

³Second Boot Device Disabled*1

³Third Boot Device Disabled*1

Chapter 4 269
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Table 4-15

³Other Boot Devices Disabled*1

³Swap Floppy Drive Disabled

³Boot Up Floppy Seek Disabled

Console Redirection

³Console Redirection Disabled

³Agent Connect Via NULL

³Agent Wait Time(min) 1

³Agent After Boot Disabled

*1.The setting is different from that of “Load Setting 2 Defaults” on
page 266

NOTE ³ means sub-menu.

Advanced Chipset Features

Advanced Chipset Features options are displayed by choosing "Advanced Chipset
Features" using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility
main menu. Then the window as shown in Figure 4-65 appears. Compare the actual BIOS
option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4-16. If there is any difference,
select it using and keys, and change the option setting by pressing or
keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting.

If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu, press key.

270 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Figure 4-65 Advanced Chipset Features window

Table 4-16

System BIOS Cacheable Enabled

Video BIOS Cacheable Enabled

CPU Latency Timer Enabled

Delayed Transaction Enabled

AGP Graphics Aperture Size 64MB

FWH Write Protection Disabled

On Chip Video Window Size Disabled*1

4. Troubleshooting
*1.The setting is different from that of “Load Setting 2 Defaults” on
page 266

Integrated Peripherals
Integrated Peripherals options are displayed by choosing "Integrated Peripherals " using
keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu.
Then the window as shown in Figure 4-66 appears. Compare the actual BIOS option
settings with the default settings shown in Table 4-17. If there is any difference, select it
using and keys, and change the option setting by pressing or keys
so that it becomes the same as the default setting.

If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu, press key.

Chapter 4 271
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Figure 4-66 Integrated Peripheral window

Table 4-17

IDE Mode Setup

³IDE Primary Master PIO Auto

³IDE Primary Slave PIO Auto

³IDE Secondary Master PIO Auto

³IDE Secondary Slave PIO Auto

³IDE Primary Master UDMA Disabled

³IDE Primary Slave UDMA Disabled

³IDE Secondary Master UDMA Disabled

³IDE Secondary Slave UDMA Disabled

On-Chip Primary PCI IDE Enabled

On-Chip Secondary PCI IDE Enabled

USB Controller Enabled

USB Keyboard Support Enabled

USB Mouse Support Enabled

Init Display First PCI Slot

AC97 Audio Enabled

Onboard I/O Chip Setup

272 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Table 4-17

³Onboard FDC Controller Enabled

³Onboard Serial Port 1 3F8/IRQ4

³Onboard Serial Port 2 2F8/IRQ3

³UART Mode Select Normal

³Onboard Parallel Port 378/IRQ7

³Parallel Port Mode ECP+EPP

³EPP Mode Select EPP1.9

³ECP Mode Use DMA 3

NOTE ³ means sub-menu.

Power Management Setup

Power Management Setup options are displayed by choosing "Power Management Setup"
using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main
menu. Then the window as shown in Figure 4-67 appears. Compare the actual BIOS option
settings with the default settings shown in Table 4-18. If there is any difference, select it
using and keys, and change the option setting by pressing or keys
so that it becomes the same as the default setting.

If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu, press key.

CAUTION If the Power Management Setup options are set incorrectly, the E5070B/E5071B may not
be turned on. In this case, perform the following procedure.

1. Turn the instrument on.

2. Set the jumper to the setting different from Figure 4-59 on page 263.

4. Troubleshooting
3. Turn the instrument off and turn it on again.
4. Restore jumper setting in Figure 4-59 on page 263.
5. Turn the instrument off and turn it on again.
6. Configure the BIOS from the beginning.

Chapter 4 273
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Figure 4-67 Power Management Setup window

Table 4-18

ACPI Function Disabled*1

Power Management User Define

Video Off Method DPMS

Video Off In Suspend Yes

Suspend Type Stop Grant

HDD Power Down 15 Min

Soft Off By Power Bttn Instant-Off

Wake-Up by PCI Card Disabled

Intruder# Detection Disabled

PWRON After PWR-Fail On*1

CPU Thermal Throttling 50.0%

Resume by Alarm Disabled

Reload Global Timer Events

³Primary IDE 0 Disabled

³Primary IDE 1 Disabled

³Secondary IDE 0 Disabled

274 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Table 4-18

³Secondary IDE 1 Disabled

³FDD, COM, LPT Port Disabled

³PCI PIRQ[A-D]# Disabled

*1.The setting is different from that of “Load Setting 2 Defaults” on
page 266

NOTE ³ means sub-menu.

PnP/PCI Configurations
PnP/PCI Configurations options are displayed by choosing "PnP/PCI Configurations"
using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main
menu. Then the window as shown in Figure 4-68 appears. Compare the actual BIOS option
settings with the default settings shown in Table 4-19. If there is any difference, select it
using and keys, and change the option setting by pressing or keys
so that it becomes the same as the default setting.

If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu, press key.

Figure 4-68 PnP/PCI Configurations window

4. Troubleshooting

Table 4-19

Reset Configuration Data Disabled

Resources Controlled By Auto(ESCD)

Chapter 4 275
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
PC Health Status

PC Health Status options are displayed by choosing "PC Health Status" using
keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu. Then the
window as shown in Figure 4-69 appears. Compare the actual BIOS option settings with
the default settings shown in Table 4-20. If there is any difference, change the option
setting by pressing or keys so that it becomes the same as the default
setting.

If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu, press key.

Figure 4-69 PC Health Status window

Table 4-20

CPU Warning Temperature 70°C/158°F

Frequency/Voltage Control
Frequency/Voltage Control options are displayed by choosing "Frequency/Voltage
Control" using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility
main menu. Then the window as shown in Figure 4-70 appears. Compare the actual BIOS
option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4-21. If there is any difference,
select it using and keys, and change the option setting by pressing or
keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting.

If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu, press key.

276 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Figure 4-70 Frequency/Voltage Control window

Table 4-21

Auto Detect DIMM / PCI Clock Enabled

Spread Spectrum ±0.2%(Cnt)

Change Supervisor Password

A password needs to be entered to execute the BIOS setup utility. If a password has not
been assigned in the E5070B/E5071B, set the password using this BIOS setup utility as
follows.

a. Select "Change Supervisor Password" using keys at the BIOS Setup

4. Troubleshooting
Utility main menu and press key.
b. Enter the password of "e507xa". Never set another password.

c. Press key.
d. If a message of "New supervisor password installed. Press any key to continue" is
displayed, press key.

Save & Exit Setup

When you want to change and save a BIOS option, Select "Save Settings and Exit" using
keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press key. Then, a
message of "SAVE to CMOS and EXIT (Y/N)?" is displayed. Press and keys.
The BIOS setup utility is closed after the current settings are saved.

Chapter 4 277
Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396
and below
Exit Without Saving
If you cancel the changes in the BIOS option settings, select "Exit Without Saving" using
keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press key. Then, a
message of "Quit Without Saving (Y/N)?" is displayed. Press and keys.
The BIOS setup utility is closed without saving the current settings.

278 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
MY42300633 and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above

To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for

E5070B : MY42300633 and above, E5071B : MY42301397
and above
When you replace the A20 digital motherboard, you need to confirm the jumper settings
for the specific CPU installed. The jumper settings information is provided in “Configure
the Motherboard” on page 279.
You also need to confirm the BIOS options using the BIOS setup utility procedure. The
BIOS setup procedure is described in “To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options” on page 280.

To Identify the Motherboard Installed

Confirm the splash screen is displayed in the beginning of the boot process as shown in
Figure 4-14.

Configure the Motherboard

There is a jumper on the A20 digital motherboard that must be configured to the correct
setting. Confirm that the jumper setting is “Normal” as shown in Figure 4-71.

Figure 4-71 A20 digital motherboard jumpers location and settings

4. Troubleshooting

Testing DRAM on the Motherboard

When the A20 digital motherboard is replaced with a new one, it is advisable to perform

Chapter 4 279
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
MY42300633 and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above
the DRAM test before proceeding to the BIOS setup utility procedure. Confirm the DRAM
count in accordance with the following procedure.

Step 1. Connect the external keyboard and mouse to the E5070B/E5071B rear panel connectors.

Step 2. Turn the instrument on. Wait until the E5070B/E5071B boots up. Do not press any key
until the E5070B/E5071B measurement view appears.

Step 3. Press key on the front panel.

Step 4. Click Misc Setup in the softkey menu.

Step 5. Click Control Panel... in the softkey menu.

Step 6. Scroll the function viewer to find "System" icon and double-click "System". This opens
"System Properties" window as shown in Figure 4-72.

Figure 4-72 System Properties window

Step 7. Verify that "522,292 KB RAM" is displayed in the Computer profile as shown in Figure
4-72. If it is not correct, the A20 board is faulty.

Step 8. Click "OK" button to close the window.

Step 9. Turn the E5070B/E5071B off before proceeding to the next step “To Confirm or Set the
BIOS Options”.

To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options

BIOS is the PC's built-in program describing the standard procedure of basic inputs and
outputs for the system hardware. BIOS involves the system BIOS, start-up program and
BIOS setup utility. The E5070B/E5071B starts up first with the BIOS when the power is
turned on. Use the following procedure to confirm or set the BIOS options, known as the
BIOS setup utility.

280 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
MY42300633 and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above
Run the BIOS setup utility
Use the external keyboard to select and set various options in the BIOS setup utility. Do not
operate the E5070B/E5071B front panel until you exit the BIOS option setup procedure.

Procedure Step 1. Connect the external keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B rear panel connector.

Step 2. Turn the instrument on.

Step 3. Press [F2] key as soon as the splash screen as shown in Figure 4-14 is displayed. Wait a
few seconds until the message "Enter CURRENT Password:" appears.

Step 4. Press key (The LED in the key lights.)

Step 5. Enter password "e507xa" and press . Then BIOS setup utility main menu is
displayed as shown in Figure 4-73.

Figure 4-73 BIOS setup utility main menu

4. Troubleshooting
Step 6. The BIOS setup utility has primary menus, most of which have sub-menus. Brief
descriptions and reference pages for these menus are provided in Table 4-22. The details of
the BIOS option settings in each menu and sub-menus are described on the page listed in
the table.

Step 7. Select a desired menu using keys. Select an item in the menu or sub-menu window
using keys. To perform an operation, use key.

NOTE If you want to exit the BIOS option setting and exit the BIOS setup utility without saving
changes in the setup, select "Exit Discarding Changes" and press key at the Exit
Menu.

Chapter 4 281
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
MY42300633 and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above

Table 4-22 BIOS setup utility primary menus and references

Menu Options Ref. page

Main Product description including processor and on

memory fitted page 281
Date and time
IDE disks found and sub-menus for extra
configuration

Advanced Start-up display mode (silent-boot etc.) on

Operating system type (ACPI etc.) page 283
Advanced chipset configuration
Processor cache control
PCI space configuration
I/O devices configuration
Advanced hard disk drive options
System monitoring
Version information

Security Passwords and permissions on

page 286

Power Action after AC-reconnect -

Power savings modes and timers

Boot Selects device boot order on

page 283

Exit Save with or without changes on

Load/save default settings (from flash ROM) page 286

Load Setup Defaults

NOTE Perform the following procedure only when the A20 digital motherboard is replaced. Jump
to “Advanced Menu” when you check whether the BIOS options are correctly set or not.

Exit menu shown below is displayed by choosing "Exit" using keys and by
pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu. Select “Load Setup Default”
using keys. The dialog box “Setup Comfirmation” prompts you to select Y (Yes)
or N (No). Press and to load the manufacture Setup Defaults into the BIOS
ROM. As a result, almost all of the BIOS options are automatically configured to the
optimal settings for the E5070B/E5071B.

282 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
MY42300633 and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above
Figure 4-74 Exit menu (for Load Setup Defaults)

Advanced Menu

The Advanced Menu shown below is displayed by choosing "Advanced" using

keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu.

If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu, press key.

Figure 4-75 Advanced Menu

4. Troubleshooting

• Advanced Chipset Control (for PCI Video Card)

Chapter 4 283
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
MY42300633 and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above

Select “Advanced Chipset Control” using keys. The current chipset control
states are displayed as shown in Figure 4-76.

Select “Video boot type” using keys, and change the setting to “Disable
Onboard Video” by pressing keys, and then, return to “Advanced Menu” as
shown in Figure 4-75.

Figure 4-76 Advanced Chipset Control Sub-menu

NOTE When PCI Video Card has not been installed, do not set Advanced Chipset Control.

• Advanced OS Options

Select “Advanced OS Options” using keys. The current setup states are
displayed as shown in Figure 4-77.

Select “Installed OS” using keys, and change the setting to “Plug and Play” by
pressing keys. Next step as, select “Enable ACPI” using keys, and
change the setting to “No” by pressing keys. And then, return to “Advanced
Menu” as shown in Figure 4-75.

284 Chapter 4
 Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
MY42300633 and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above
Figure 4-77 Advanced OS Options Sub-menu

Boot Menu

The Boot Menu shown below is displayed by choosing "Boot" using keys and by
pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu. The current setup states are
displayed as shown in Figure 4-78. If the setup is incorrect, select it using keys,
and change the setting by pressing keys.

If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu, press key.

Figure 4-78 Boot Menu

4. Troubleshooting

Chapter 4 285
Troubleshooting
To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for E5070B :
MY42300633 and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above
Change Supervisor Password
A password needs to be entered to execute the BIOS setup utility. If a password has not
been assigned in the E5070B/E5071B, set the password using this BIOS setup utility as
follows.

a. Select "Security" using keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press
key.

b. Select “Set Supervisor password” using keys and press key.

c. Enter the password of "e507xa". Never set another password.

d. Press key.
e. If a message of "New supervisor password installed. Press any key to continue" is
displayed, press key.

Save & Exit Setup

When you want to change and save a BIOS option, Select "Exit" using keys at the
BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press key. Select “Save CMOS to Flash” using
and press key. Then select “Exit Saving Changes” using and press
key. A message of "SAVE to CMOS and EXIT (Y/N)?" is displayed. Press and
keys.
The BIOS setup utility is closed after the current settings are saved.

Exit Without Saving

If you cancel the changes in the BIOS option settings, select "Exit Discarding Change"
using keys at the Exit Menu and press key. Then, a message of "Quit
Without Saving (Y/N)?" is displayed. Press and keys.
The BIOS setup utility is closed without saving the current settings.

286 Chapter 4
5 Replaceable Parts

This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the E5070B/E5071B
5. Replaceable Parts

ENA Series RF Network Analyzers.

287
Replaceable Parts
Ordering Information

Ordering Information
To order part listed in the replaceable part lists, quote the Agilent part number (with a
check digit), indicate the quantity required, and address the order to the nearest Agilent
office. The check digit will ensure accurate and timely processing of the order.
To order a part not listed in the replaceable part table, include the instrument model
number, the description and function of the part, and the quantity of parts required. Address
the order to the nearest Agilent office.

Direct Mail Order System

Within the USA, Agilent can supply parts through a direct mail order system. There are
several advantages to this system:

• Direct ordering and shipping from the Agilent Parts Center in Mountain View,
California.
• No maximum or minimum on any mail order (there is a minimum order amount for
parts ordered through a local Agilent office when the orders require billing and
invoicing)
• Prepaid transportation (there is a small handling charge for each order).
• No invoices.
In order for Agilent to provide these advantages, please send a check or money order with
each order.
Mail order forms and specific ordering information are available through your local
Agilent sales office. Addresses and telephone numbers are located in a separate document
shipped with the manuals.

288 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Exchange Assemblies

Exchange Assemblies
Under the rebuilt-exchange assembly program, certain factory-repaired and tested
assemblies are available on a trade-in basis. These assemblies are offered al lower cost than
a new assembly, but meet all factory specifications required of a new assembly.
The defective assembly must be returned for credit under the terms of the rebuilt-exchange
assembly program. Any spare assembly stock desired should be ordered using the new
assembly part number.

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 289
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632
and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B :

JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Top View (Major Assemblies)

Figure 5-1 Top View (Major Assemblies)

290 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632
and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below
Table 5-1 Top View (Major Assemblies)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0950-4773 3 1 A50 POWER SUPPLY

2 E5070-66521 5 1 A21 ANALOG INTERFACE BOAR

3 5185-3792 9 1 A24 GPIB CARD

4 54810-66525 1 1 A26 LCD INTERFACE CARD

5 E5070-66523 7 1 A23 HANDLER I/O BOARD

6 See service note 1 1 A20 DIGITAL MOTHERBOARD

E5070B-02D /
E5071B-02D

7 1818-8783 8 1 DIMM 32MX64

8 04287-61001 8 1 FAN ASSY

9 See Table 5-37 - 1 A28 FDD ASSEMBLY

10 E5070-61004 9 1 FAN ASSY

11 E5070-61005 0 1 FAN ASSY
12 See Table 5-38 - 1 A27 MASS STORAGE DISK DRIVE ASSEMBLY

13 E4991-66505 7 1 A5 CRYSTAL OVEN (Opt. 1E5)

14 See Table 5-46 - 1 A6 RF SWITCH/TEMP. CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 291
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632
and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Top View (Cables)

Figure 5-2 Top View (Cables)

292 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632
and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below
Table 5-2 Top View (Cables)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61622 7 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

2 04287-61607 0 1 FLAT CABLE

3 E5070-61616 9 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

4 E5070-61623 8 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

5 E5070-61624 9 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

6 E5070-61692 2 1 WIRE ASSY (Opt. 1E5)

7 E5070-61692 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY (Opt. 1E5)

1400-1334 6 1 CLAMP CABLE

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 293
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632
and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Top View (Miscellaneous Parts)

Figure 5-3 Top View (Miscellaneous Parts)

294 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632
and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below
Table 5-3 Top View (Miscellaneous Parts)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-0430 3 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

2 E5070-01229 4 1 ANGLE

3 0515-1946 8 4 SCREW

4 0515-0430 3 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

5 0515-1382 6 4 SCREW-MACH M3.5 x 6 FL T15

6 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

7 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

8 0515-1946 8 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 FL T10

9 0515-1402 1 2 SCREW-MACH M3.5 x 8 PN T15

10 1400-1051 4 1 SADDLE-WIRE

11 0403-1143 0 1 GUIDE-PC BD

12 1400-0866 7 1 CLAMP-CABLE

13 1400-3207 6 2 CABLE TIE

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 295
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632
and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Top View (Under Power Supply)

Figure 5-4 Top View (Under Power Supply)

296 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632
and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Table 5-4 Top View (Under Power Supply)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61661 4 1 WIRE ASSY

2 E5070-61663 6 1 FLAT CBL ASSY

3 E5070-61662 5 1 FLAT CBL ASSY

4 E5070-61664 7 1 FLAT CBL ASSY (Opt. 016)

5 E5070-61665 8 1 USB CABLE ASSY

6 E5070-61617 0 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY (Opt. x14)

7 E5070-61614 7 1 WIRE ASSY (YELLOW)

8 E5070-61613 6 1 WIRE ASSY (ORANGE) (Opt. 31x, 41x)

9 E5070-61612 5 1 WIRE ASSY (RED) (Opt. 31x, 41x)

10 E5070-61615 8 1 WIRE ASSY (BROWN) (Opt. 21x)

E5070-61611 4 1 WIRE ASSY (BROWN) (Opt. 31x, 41x)

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 297
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632
and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Top View (Motherboard and Other Parts)

Figure 5-5 Top View (Motherboard and Other Parts)

298 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632
and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below
Table 5-5 Top View (Motherboard and Other Parts)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-0372 2 8 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

2 1400-0611 0 1 CLAMP-CABLE

3 0515-2216 7 4 SCREW-MACH M4.0 x 40 PN T20

4 0361-1875 5 8 RIVET (PLASTIC)

5 1400-1334 6 1 CLAMP-CABLE

6 E5070-01267 7 1 BRACKET PS

7 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

8 1420-0356 - 1 BATTERY LITHIUM (CR2032), 3V, .22A-HR

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 299
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : MY42300633 and above,
E5071B : MY42301397 and above (A27 mass storage disk drive model)

Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B :

MY42300633 and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above
(A27 mass storage disk drive model)

Top View (Major Assemblies)

Figure 5-6 Top View (Major Assemblies)

300 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : MY42300633 and above,
E5071B : MY42301397 and above (A27 mass storage disk drive model)
Table 5-6 Top View (Major Assemblies)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0950-4773 3 1 A50 POWER SUPPLY

2 54810-66525 1 1 A26 LCD INTERFACE CARD

3 E5070-66521 5 1 A21 ANALOG INTERFACE BOAR

4 E5070-61007 9 1 A24 GPIB CARD

5 E5070-61006 7 1 A23 HANDLER I/O BOARD

6 0960-2432 1 1 A20 DIGITAL MOTHERBOARD

7 04287-61001 8 1 FAN ASSY

8 See Table 5-37 - 1 A28 FDD ASSEMBLY

9 E5070-61004 9 1 FAN ASSY

10 E5070-61005 0 1 FAN ASSY
11 See Table 5-37 - 1 A27 MASS STORAGE DISK DRIVE ASSEMBLY

12 E4991-66505 7 1 A5 CRYSTAL OVEN (Opt. 1E5)

13 See Table 5-46 - 1 A6 RF SWITCH/TEMP. CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 301
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : MY42300633 and above,
E5071B : MY42301397 and above (A27 mass storage disk drive model)

Top View (Cables)

Figure 5-7 Top View (Cables)

302 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : MY42300633 and above,
E5071B : MY42301397 and above (A27 mass storage disk drive model)
Table 5-7 Top View (Cables)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61622 7 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

2 04287-61607 0 1 FLAT CABLE

3 E5070-61616 9 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

4 E5070-61623 8 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

5 E5070-61624 9 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

6 E5070-61692 2 1 WIRE ASSY (Opt. 1E5)

7 E5070-61692 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY (Opt. 1E5)

1400-1334 6 1 CLAMP CABLE

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 303
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : MY42300633 and above,
E5071B : MY42301397 and above (A27 mass storage disk drive model)

Top View (Miscellaneous Parts)

Figure 5-8 Top View (Miscellaneous Parts)

304 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : MY42300633 and above,
E5071B : MY42301397 and above (A27 mass storage disk drive model)
Table 5-8 Top View (Miscellaneous Parts)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-0430 3 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

2 E5070-01229 4 1 ANGLE

3 0515-1946 8 4 SCREW

4 0515-0430 3 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

5 0515-1382 6 4 SCREW-MACH M3.5 x 6 FL T15

6 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

7 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

8 0515-1946 8 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 FL T10

9 0515-1402 1 2 SCREW-MACH M3.5 x 8 PN T15

10 1400-1051 4 1 SADDLE-WIRE

11 0403-1143 0 1 GUIDE-PC BD

12 1400-0866 7 1 CLAMP-CABLE

13 1400-3207 6 2 CABLE TIE

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 305
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : MY42300633 and above,
E5071B : MY42301397 and above (A27 mass storage disk drive model)

Top View (Under Power Supply)

Figure 5-9 Top View (Under Power Supply)

306 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : MY42300633 and above,
E5071B : MY42301397 and above (A27 mass storage disk drive model)

Table 5-9 Top View (Under Power Supply)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61661 4 1 WIRE ASSY

1400-0493 2 CLAMP-CABLE

2 E5070-61663 6 1 FLAT CBL ASSY

3 E5070-61662 5 1 FLAT CBL ASSY

4 E5070-61664 7 1 FLAT CBL ASSY (Opt. 016)

5 E5070-61667 1 USB CABLE ASSY

6 E5070-61617 0 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY (Opt. 214)

E5070-61618 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY (Opt. 314, 414)

7 E5070-61614 7 1 WIRE ASSY (YELLOW)

8 E5070-61613 6 1 WIRE ASSY (ORANGE) (Opt. 31x, 41x)

9 E5070-61612 5 1 WIRE ASSY (RED) (Opt. 31x, 41x)

10 E5070-61615 8 1 WIRE ASSY (BROWN) (Opt. 21x)

E5070-61611 4 1 WIRE ASSY (BROWN) (Opt. 31x, 41x)

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 307
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : MY42300633 and above,
E5071B : MY42301397 and above (A27 mass storage disk drive model)

Top View (Motherboard and Other Parts)

Figure 5-10 Top View (Motherboard and Other Parts)

308 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B : MY42300633 and above,
E5071B : MY42301397 and above (A27 mass storage disk drive model)
Table 5-10 Top View (Motherboard and Other Parts)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-0430 2 6 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

2 1400-0611 0 1 CLAMP-CABLE

3 0515-2216 7 4 SCREW-MACH M4.0 x 40 PN T20

4 0361-1875 5 8 RIVET (PLASTIC)

5 1400-1391 6 1 CLAMP-CABLE

6 E5070-01267 7 1 BRACKET PS

7 0515-1402 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.5 x 8 PN

8 1420-0356 - 1 BATTERY LITHIUM (CR2032), 3V, .22A-HR

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 309
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N

MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and
above

Top View (Removable Hard Disk Assemblies)

Figure 5-11 Top View (Removable Hard Disk Assemblies)

310 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above
Table 5-11 Top View (Removable Hard Disk Assemblies)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 See Table 5-56 - 1 REMOVABLE HARD DISK ASSEMBLY

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 311
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Top View (Major Assemblies)

Figure 5-12 Top View (Major Assemblies)

312 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above
Table 5-12 Top View (Major Assemblies)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0950-4773 3 1 A50 POWER SUPPLY

2 0960-2357 - 1 USB (USBTMC) INTERFACE CARD

3 E5070-66521 5 1 A21 ANALOG INTERFACE BOARD

4 E5070-61007 9 1 A24 GPIB CARD

5 E5070-61006 7 1 A23 HANDLER I/O BOARD

6 0960-2432 1 1 A20 DIGITAL MOTHERBOARD

7 04287-61001 8 1 FAN ASSY

8 See Table 5-37 - 1 A28 FDD ASSEMBLY

9 E5070-61004 9 1 FAN ASSY

10 E5070-61005 0 1 FAN ASSY

11 E4991-66505 7 1 A5 CRYSTAL OVEN (Opt. 1E5)

12 See Table 5-46 - 1 A6 RF SWITCH/TEMP. CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 313
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Top View (Cables)

Figure 5-13 Top View (Cables)

314 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above
Table 5-13 Top View (Cables)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61622 7 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

2 E5070-61616 9 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

3 E5070-61623 8 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

4 E5070-61624 9 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

5 E5070-61637 2 1 WIRE ASSY (Opt. 1E5)

6 E5070-61692 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY (Opt. 1E5)

1400-1334 6 1 CLAMP CABLE

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 315
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Top View (Miscellaneous Parts)

Figure 5-14 Top View (Miscellaneous Parts)

316 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above
Table 5-14 Top View (Miscellaneous Parts)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-0430 3 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

2 E5070-01256 - 1 ANGLE

3 0515-1946 8 4 SCREW

4 0515-0430 3 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

5 0515-1382 6 4 SCREW-MACH M3.5 x 6 FL T15

6 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

7 0515-1946 8 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 FL T10

8 0515-1402 1 2 SCREW-MACH M3.5 x 8 PN T15

9 1400-1051 4 1 SADDLE-WIRE

10 0403-1143 0 1 GUIDE-PC BD

11 1400-0866 7 1 CLAMP-CABLE

12 1400-3207 6 2 CABLE TIE

13 0515-0372 - 1 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

14 0515-0430 - 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 317
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Top View (Under Power Supply) for E5070B S/N from MY42401101 to
MY42401986, E5071B S/N from MY42402455 to MY42404509

Figure 5-15 Top View (Under Power Supply)

318 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Table 5-15 Top View (Under Power Supply)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61661 4 1 WIRE ASSY

1400-0493 2 CLAMP-CABLE

2 E5070-61663 6 1 FLAT CBL ASSY

3 E5070-61662 5 1 FLAT CBL ASSY

4 E5070-61664 7 1 FLAT CBL ASSY (Opt. 016)

5 E5070-61667 1 USB CABLE ASSY

6 E5070-61617 0 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY (Opt. 214)

E5070-61618 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY (Opt. 314, 414)

7 E5070-61614 7 1 WIRE ASSY (YELLOW)

8 E5070-61613 6 1 WIRE ASSY (ORANGE) (Opt. 31x, 41x)

9 E5070-61612 5 1 WIRE ASSY (RED) (Opt. 31x, 41x)

10 E5070-61615 8 1 WIRE ASSY (BROWN) (Opt. 21x)

E5070-61611 4 1 WIRE ASSY (BROWN) (Opt. 31x, 41x)

11 E5052-61626 1 FLAT FLEXIBLE CABLE DVI

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 319
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Top View (Under Power Supply) for E5070B S/N MY42401987 and
above, E5071B S/N MY42404510 and above

Figure 5-16 Top View (Under Power Supply)

320 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Table 5-16 Top View (Under Power Supply)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61661 4 1 WIRE ASSY

1400-0493 2 CLAMP-CABLE

2 E5070-61663 6 1 FLAT CBL ASSY

3 E5070-61662 5 1 FLAT CBL ASSY

4 E5070-61664 7 1 FLAT CBL ASSY (Opt. 016)

5 E5070-61667 1 USB CABLE ASSY

6 E5070-61617 0 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY (Opt. 214)

E5070-61618 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY (Opt. 314, 414)

7 E5070-61614 7 1 WIRE ASSY (YELLOW)

8 E5070-61613 6 1 WIRE ASSY (ORANGE) (Opt. 31x, 41x)

9 E5070-61612 5 1 WIRE ASSY (RED) (Opt. 31x, 41x)

10 E5070-61615 8 1 WIRE ASSY (BROWN) (Opt. 21x)

E5070-61611 4 1 WIRE ASSY (BROWN) (Opt. 31x, 41x)

11 E5052-61626 1 FLAT FLEXIBLE CABLE DVI

12 1400-3361 1 CLAMP-CABLE

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 321
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Top View (Motherboard and Other Parts)

Figure 5-17 Top View (Motherboard and Other Parts)

322 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Top View) for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above
Table 5-17 Top View (Motherboard and Other Parts)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-0430 2 6 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

2 1400-0611 0 1 CLAMP-CABLE

3 0515-2216 7 4 SCREW-MACH M4.0 x 40 PN T20

4 0361-1875 5 8 RIVET (PLASTIC)

5 1400-1391 6 1 CLAMP-CABLE

6 E5070-01267 7 1 BRACKET PS

7 0515-1402 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.5 x 8 PN

8 1420-0356 - 1 BATTERY LITHIUM (CR2032), 3V, .22A-HR

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 323
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix

JP1KK, and MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421

Front View (Analog)

Figure 5-18 Front View (Analog)

324 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Table 5-18 Front View (Analog)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 See service note 1 A4 POWER AMP MODULE (Opt. 31x, 41x)

E5070B-06B /
1 A4 POWER AMP MODULE (Opt. 213, 214)
E5071B-06B

2 See Table 5-41 - 1 A8 RF SWITCH ASSEMBLY

3 See Table 5-47 - 1 A2 RECEIVER BOARD

4 See Table 5-47 - 1 A2 RECEIVER BOARD (Opt. 31x, 41x)

5 E5071-61003 9 1 A3 LEVEL VERNIER

6 5087-7137 7 1 A8 RF SWITCH SPDT (Opt. 31x, 41x)

7 E5071-66571 2 1 A1 SOURCE BOARD

E5071-69571 8 1 A1 SOURCE BOARD (Exchange)

8 See Table 5-43 - 1 STEP ATTENUATOR ASSEMBLY (Opt. 214, 314, 414)

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 325
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Front View (Miscellaneous Parts)

Figure 5-19 Front View (Miscellaneous Parts)

Table 5-19 Front View (Miscellaneous Parts)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-1410 1 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 20 PN T10

2 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

3 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

4 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10 (Opt. 31x, 41x)

5 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

6 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

7 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10 (Opt. 214, 314, 414)

8 E5070-01222 5 1 PLATE

9 0515-0372 2 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

326 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 213)

Figure 5-20 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 213)

Table 5-20 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 213)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

2 E5070-61672 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

3 E5070-61606 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

4 E5070-61603 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

5 E5070-61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

6 E5070-61605 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

7 E5070-61604 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

8 0955-0208 5 1 U-WAVE ATTN 4DB

9 E5070-61671 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

5. Replaceable Parts

10 E5070-61687 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

11 1810-0118 1 2 TERMINATION-COAX

Chapter 5 327
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 214)

Figure 5-21 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 214)

328 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Table 5-21 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 214)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

2 E5070-61674 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

3 E5070-61606 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

4 E5070-61603 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

5 E5070-61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

6 E5070-61605 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

7 E5070-61604 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

8 E5070-61673 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

9 E5070-61687 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

10 0955-0208 5 1 U-WAVE ATTN 4DB

11 1810-0118 1 2 TERMINATION-COAX

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 329
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 313)

Figure 5-22 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 313)

330 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Table 5-22 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 313)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

2 E5070-61677 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

3 E5070-61678 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

4 E5070-61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

5 E5070-61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

6 E5070-61632 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

7 E5070-61646 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

8 E5070-61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

9 E5070-61688 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

10 E5070-61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

11 E5070-61679 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

12 E5070-61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

13 E5070-61675 0 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

14 0955-0301 9 1 U-WAVE ATTN 2DB

15 E5070-61676 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

16 E5070-61687 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

17 1810-0118 1 4 TERMINATION-COAX

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 331
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 314)

Figure 5-23 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 314)

332 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Table 5-23 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 314)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

2 E5070-61677 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

3 E5070-61678 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

4 E5070-61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

5 E5070-61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

6 E5070-61632 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

7 E5070-61646 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

8 E5070-61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

9 E5070-61688 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

10 E5070-61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

11 E5070-61679 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

12 E5070-61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

13 E5070-61673 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

14 E5070-61687 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

15 0955-0301 1 1 U-WAVE ATTN 2DB

16 E5070-61656 0 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

17 1810-0118 1 4 TERMINATION-COAX

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 333
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 413)

Figure 5-24 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 413)

334 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Table 5-24 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 413)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

2 E5070-61677 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

3 E5070-61678 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

4 E5070-61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

5 E5070-61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

6 E5070-61653 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

7 E5070-61654 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

8 E5070-61647 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

9 E5070-61646 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

10 E5070-61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

11 E5070-61652 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

12 E5070-61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

13 E5070-61679 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

14 E5070-61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

15 E5070-61675 0 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

16 0955-0301 9 1 U-WAVE ATTN 2DB

17 E5070-61676 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

18 E5070-61687 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

19 1810-0118 1 1 TERMINATION-COAX

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 335
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 414)

Figure 5-25 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 414)

336 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, and
MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, and MY421

Table 5-25 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 414)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

2 E5070-61677 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

3 E5070-61678 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

4 E5070-61685 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

5 E5070-61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

6 E5070-61653 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

7 E5070-61654 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

8 E5070-61647 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

9 E5070-61646 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

10 E5070-61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

11 E5070-61652 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

12 E5070-61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

13 E5070-61679 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

14 E5070-61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

15 E5070-61673 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

16 E5070-61687 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

17 0955-0301 9 1 U-WAVE ATTN 2DB

18 E5070-61656 0 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

19 1810-0118 1 1 TERMINATION-COAX

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 337
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above

Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix

MY422 and above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above

Front View (Analog)

Figure 5-26 Front View (Analog)

338 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above

Table 5-26 Front View (Analog)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5071-65008 1 A4 POWER AMP MODULE (Opt. 31x, 41x)

E5071-65009 1 A4 POWER AMP MODULE (Opt. 213, 214)

2 See Table 5-42 - 1 A8 RF SWITCH ASSEMBLY

3 See Table 5-47 - 1 A2 RECEIVER BOARD

4 See Table 5-47, Table - 1 A2 RECEIVER BOARD (Opt. 31x, 41x)

5-48

5 E5071-61003 9 1 A3 LEVEL VERNIER

6 5087-7137 7 1 A8 RF SWITCH SPDT (Opt. 31x, 41x)

7 E5071-66571 2 1 A1 SOURCE BOARD

E5071-69571 8 1 A1 SOURCE BOARD (Exchange)

8 See Table 5-44, Table - 1 STEP ATTENUATOR ASSEMBLY (Opt. 214, 314, 414)
5-45

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 339
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above

Front View (Miscellaneous Parts)

Figure 5-27 Front View (Miscellaneous Parts)

Table 5-27 Front View (Miscellaneous Parts)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-1410 1 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 20 PN T10

2 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

3 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

4 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10 (Opt. 31x, 41x)

5 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

6 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

7 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10 (Opt. 214, 314, 414)

8 E5070-01222 5 1 PLATE (Opt. 214)

E5070-01223 1 PLATE (Opt. 314, 414)

9 0515-0372 2 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

340 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above

Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 214)

Figure 5-28 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 214)

Table 5-28 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 214)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61633 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

2 E5070-61634 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

3 E5070-61606 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

4 E5070-61603 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

5 E5070-61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

6 E5070-61605 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

7 E5070-61604 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

8 E5070-61671 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

9 E5070-61687 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

5. Replaceable Parts

10 E5070-61672 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

11 0955-0208 5 1 U-WAVE ATTN 4DB

12 1810-0118 1 2 TERMINATION-COAX

Chapter 5 341
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above

Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 314)

Figure 5-29 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 314)

342 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above

Table 5-29 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 314)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61633 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

2 E5070-61677 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

3 E5070-61678 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

4 E5070-61635 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

5 E5070-61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

6 E5070-61632 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

7 E5070-61646 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

8 E5070-61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

9 E5070-61688 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

10 E5070-61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

11 E5070-61679 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

12 E5070-61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

13 E5070-61634 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

14 E5070-61687 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

15 0955-0301 1 1 U-WAVE ATTN 2DB

16 E5070-61636 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

17 E5070-61675 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

18 E5070-61676 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

19 1810-0118 1 4 TERMINATION-COAX

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 343
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above

Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 414)

Figure 5-30 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 414)

344 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Front View) for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above

Table 5-30 Front View (Semirigid Cables) (Opt. 414)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61633 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

2 E5070-61677 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

3 E5070-61678 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

4 E5070-61635 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

5 E5070-61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

6 E5070-61653 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

7 E5070-61654 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

8 E5070-61647 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

9 E5070-61646 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

10 E5070-61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

11 E5070-61652 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

12 E5070-61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

13 E5070-61679 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

14 E5070-61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

15 E5070-61634 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

16 E5070-61687 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

17 0955-0301 9 1 U-WAVE ATTN 2DB

18 E5070-61636 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

19 E5070-61675 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

20 E5070-61676 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD

21 1810-0118 1 1 TERMINATION-COAX

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 345
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Front Panel

Figure 5-31 Front Panel

346 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Table 5-31 Front Panel

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-66522 6 1 A22 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD (with Video Card)

E5070-66529 1 A22 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD (without Video Card)

(for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, for E5071B
S/N MY42402455 and above)

2 E5070-25101 1 1 KEYPAD RUBBER

3 E5070-01231 8 1 ANGLE-N-CONN

4 86290-60005 7 1 CONN TP N ASSY

2190-0104 0 1 WSHR-LK INTL T

2950-0132 6 1 NUT-HEX-DUB-CHAM

5 E5070-00202 1 1 PANEL SUB

6 E5070-00211 2 1 PANEL FRONT (E5070B Opt. 21x)

E5070-00213 4 1 PANEL FRONT (E5070B Opt. 31x)

E5070-00214 5 1 PANEL FRONT (E5070B Opt. 41x)

E5071-00211 3 1 PANEL FRONT (E5071B Opt. 21x)

E5071-00213 5 1 PANEL FRONT (E5071B Opt. 31x)

E5071-00214 6 1 PANEL FRONT (E5071B Opt. 41x)

7 5182-7594 2 1 KNOB

8 E5070-66533 8 1 A33 USB Adapter

0515-0430 2 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

9 See Table 5-54 - 1 STANDBY SWITCH ASSEMBLY

10 E5070-60101 5 1 LCD-FILTER ASSY (Standard)

E5070-60102 6 1 LCD-TPANEL ASSY (Opt. 016)

2090-0888 5 1 BACKLIGHT (included in LCD ASSY)

11 0950-4091 2 1 A52 INVERTER LS700

0515-1974 2 2 SCREW-MACH M2.5 x 4 PN T8

12 E5070-01211 4 1 BRACKET INVERTER

13 E5070-00621 8 1 COVER SHIELD

5. Replaceable Parts

14 0371-3953 4 1 KEY CAP

15 3100-3711 1 SWITCH-ROTARY

Chapter 5 347
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Rear View

Figure 5-32 Rear View

348 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Table 5-32 Rear View

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

2 0515-0430 3 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

3 1250-0252 6 1 BNC CONNECTOR (Opt. 1E5)

2950-0035 8 1 NUT-HEX-DBL-CHAM (Opt. 1E5)

2190-0102 9 1 WSHR-LK INTL T (Opt. 1E5)

6960-0041 1 1 PLUG HOLE (Opt. UNQ)

4 2950-0054 1 2 NUT-HEX-DBL-CHAM

2190-0102 9 2 WSHR-LK INTL T

5 0515-1402 1 6 SCREW-MACH M3.5 x 8 PN T15

6 0515-0430 3 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

7 E5070-01228 1 BRACKET (for E5070B S/N JP1KKxxxxx or

MY42300632 and below, for E5071B S/N JP1KKxxxxx
or MY42301396 and below)

E5070-01270 1 BRACKET (for E5070B S/N from MY42300633 to

MY42399999, for E5071B S/N from MY42301397 to
MY42399999)

E5070-01271 1 BRACKET (for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,

for E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above)

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 349
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Side View

Figure 5-33 Side View

Table 5-33 Side View

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-60022 7 1 COVER ASSY (for E5070B Serial Prefix JP1KK,

MY423 and below, for E5071B Serial Prefix JP1KK,
MY423 and below)

E5070-04023 - 1 COVER ASSY (for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and

above, for E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above)

2 08720-00081 0 2 STRAP HANDLE

3 5041-9187 5 2 STRAP HANDLE REAR

0515-2049 8 2 SCREW-MACH M5.0 x 16 FL T20

4 E5100-40002 0 4 STANDOFF

0515-1402 5 4 SCREW-MACH M3.5 x 8 PN T15

5 5041-9167 1 4 FOOT FL

1460-1345 5 2 WIREFORM

6 5041-9173 9 2 SIDE TRIM 221.5

7 5041-9186 4 2 STRAP HANDLE FRT

0515-2049 8 2 SCREW-MACH M5.0 x 16 FL T20

350 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Cover Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, MY423 and

below, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, MY423 and below
Figure 5-34 Cover Assembly

Table 5-34 Cover Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-60022 9 1 COVER ASSY

2 0515-1382 6 4 SCREW-MACH M3.5 x 6 FL T15

3 0515-0430 3 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 351
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Cover Assembly for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,

E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above
Figure 5-35 Cover Assembly (bottom view)

Table 5-35 Cover Assembly (bottom view)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-04023 - 1 COVER ASSY

2 0515-1382 6 4 SCREW-MACH M3.5 x 6 FL T15

3 0515-0430 3 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

Figure 5-36 Cover Assembly (HDD cover on top view)

Table 5-36 Cover Assembly (HDD cover on top view)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

4 E5070-01252 - 1 REMOVABLE HDD COVER

5 0515-2146 - 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 4 FL T10

352 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

A28 FDD Assembly

Figure 5-37 A28 FDD Assembly

Table 5-37 A28 FDD Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-01203 4 1 HOLDER FDD

2 0950-3334 4 1 A28 FDD 3.5

3 E5070-04005 0 1 COVER FDD

4 0515-2146 2 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 4 FL T10

5 0515-2146 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 4 FL T10

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 353
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly for E5070B serial prefix
JP1KK, MY423 and below, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, MY423 and
below

Figure 5-38 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK, MY423 and
below, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, MY423 and below

Table 5-38 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK,
MY423 and below, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, MY423 and below

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-82201 1 HDD INSTALLED

2 E5070-01205 6 1 HOLDER HDD

3 E5070-66530 6 1 DISK DR

4 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

354 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Figure 5-39 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Mount Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK,
MY423 and below, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, MY423 and below

Table 5-39 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Mount Assembly for E5070B serial prefix
JP1KK, MY423 and below, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK, MY423 and below

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 1410-1580 4 BUSHING

2 E5070-24011 0 4 SPACER

3 0515-0665 6 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 14 PN T10

4 E5070-01206 7 1 BRACKET HDD

5 0515-0374 4 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 10 PN T10

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 355
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

A4 Power Amp. Module Assembly

Figure 5-40 A4 Power Amp. Module Assembly

Table 5-40 A4 Power Amp. Module Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-0372 2 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

2 1400-1334 6 1 CABLE CLAMP

356 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

A8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK or MY421,

E5071B serial prefix JP1KK or MY421

Figure 5-41 A8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK or MY421, E5071B serial
prefix JP1KK or MY421

Table 5-41 A8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix or MY421, E5071B serial
prefix JP1KK or MY421

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 5087-7137 1 SWITCH RF SPDT (Opt. 21x, 31x, 41x)

2 0515-1410 1 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 20 PN T10 (Opt. 21x, 31x, 41x)

3 5087-7137 1 SWITCH RF SPDT (Opt. 31x, 41x)

4 0515-1410 1 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 20 PN T10 (Opt. 31x, 41x)

5 E5070-01265 0 1 PLATE SWITCH

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 357
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

A8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above,

E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above

Figure 5-42 A8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above, E5071B serial
prefix MY422 and above

Table 5-42 A8 RF Switch Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above, E5071B
serial prefix MY422 and above

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 5087-7272 1 SWITCH RF SPDT (Opt. 21x, 31x, 41x)

2 0515-1410 1 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 20 PN T10 (Opt. 21x, 31x, 41x)

3 5087-7272 1 SWITCH RF SPDT (Opt. 31x, 41x)

4 0515-1410 1 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 20 PN T10 (Opt. 31x, 41x)

5 E5070-01265 0 1 PLATE SWITCH

358 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK

or MY421, E5071B serial prefix JP1KK or MY421 (Opt. 214, 314, 414)

Figure 5-43 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix JP1KK or MY421,
E5071B serial prefix JP1KK or MY421 (Opt. 214, 314, 414)

Table 5-43 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix or MY421,
E5071B serial prefix JP1KK or MY421 (Opt. 214, 314, 414)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 See service note 8 1 A7 SOURCE STEP ATTENUATOR

E5071B-12C

2 E5070-01213 6 1 PLATE

3 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 359
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422

and above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above (Opt. 214)

Figure 5-44 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above,
E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above (Opt. 214)

Table 5-44 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above (Opt. 214)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 See service note 8 1 A7 SOURCE STEP ATTENUATOR

E5071B-12C

2 E5070-01213 6 1 PLATE

3 0515-0372 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

360 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422

and above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above (Opt. 314, 414)

Figure 5-45 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and above,
E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above (Opt. 314, 414)

Table 5-45 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly for E5070B serial prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B serial prefix MY422 and above (Opt. 314, 414)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 See service note 8 1 A7 SOURCE STEP ATTENUATOR

E5071B-12C

2 E5070-01214 6 1 PLATE

3 0515-0372 2 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 361
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

A6 RF Switch/Tempereature Controller Assembly

Figure 5-46 A6 RF Switch/Temperature Controller Assembly

Table 5-46 A6 RF Switch/Temperature Controller Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-66586 2 1 A6 RF SWITCH/TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

2 E5070-01266 9 1 BRACKET

3 0515-1946 8 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 FL T10

362 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

A2 Receiver Board Assembly

Figure 5-47 A2 Receiver Board Assembly

Table 5-47 A2 Receiver Board Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5071-61015 2 1 A15 RECEIVER- RF BOARD (Opt. 21x)

E5071-69015 8 1 A15 RECEIVER- RF BOARD (Exchange)

2 0515-1403 2 3 SCREW-MACH M4.0 x 6 FL T15 (Opt. 21x)

3 E5071-66517 0 1 A17 RECEIVER-IF BOARD (Opt. 21x)

4 0515-1403 2 4 SCREW-MACH M4.0 x 6 FL T15 (Opt. 21x)

1 E5071-61015 2 2 A15 RECEIVER-RF BOARD (Opt. 31x, 41x)

E5071-69015 8 1 A15 RECEIVER-RF BOARD (Exchange)

2 0515-1403 2 6 SCREW-MACH M4.0 x 6 FL T15 (Opt. 31x, 41x)

5. Replaceable Parts

3 E5071-66517 0 2 A17 RECEIVER-IF BOARD (Opt. 31x, 41x)

4 0515-1403 2 8 SCREW-MACH M4.0 x 6 FL T15 (Opt. 31x, 41x)

Chapter 5 363
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Receiver Module Assembly (Opt. 31x, 41x)

Figure 5-48 Receiver Module Assembly (Opt. 31x, 41x)

Table 5-48 Receiver Module Assembly (Opt. 31x, 41x)

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-20031 6 2 BLOCK

2 0515-1864 9 8 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 22 FL T10

3 E5070-25031 6 4 SHEET THERMAL

364 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Analog Motherboard Assembly

Figure 5-49 Analog Motherboard Assembly

Table 5-49 Analog Motherboard Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-66540 8 1 ANALOG MOTHER BOARD

2 0515-0372 2 9 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 365
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Chassis Assembly

Figure 5-50 Chassis Assembly

Table 5-50 Chassis Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-60023 8 1 CHASSIS

2 5022-1190 4 1 FRONT FRAME

3 0515-2113 3 6 SCREW-MACH M4.0 x 8 PN T20

4 8160-0641 3 1 GASKET (125 cm)

366 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Keyboard Assembly

Figure 5-51 Keyboard Assembly

Table 5-51 Keyboard Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-0430 5 8 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 367
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

LCD and Inverter Assembly for E5060B S/N MY42401986 and below,
for E5061B S/N MY42404509 and below

Figure 5-52 LCD and Inverter Assembly

Table 5-52 LCD and Inverter Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-1402 5 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T15

2 E5070-61627 2 1 WIRE ASSY

368 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

LCD and Inverter Assembly for E5070B S/N MY42401987 and above,
for E5071B S/N MY42404510 and above

Figure 5-53 LCD and Inverter Assembly

Table 5-53 LCD and Inverter Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 0515-1402 5 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T15

2 E5070-61627 2 1 WIRE ASSY

3 5188-4418 2 SELF-TAPPING SCREW

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 369
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Standby Switch Assembly for E5070B S/N MY42401986 and below, for
E5071B S/N MY42404509 and below

Figure 5-54 Standby Switch Assembly

Table 5-54 Standby Switch Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61901 5 1 WIRE ASSY W/STANDBY SWITCH

0371-3953 1 KEY CAP

2 0515-2028 9 2 SCREW-MACH M2.5 x 6 FL T8

3 E5062-61612 1 FLAT FLEXIBLE CABLE-LCD (for E5070B S/N

MY42401101 and above, for E5071B S/N MY42402455
and above)

4 1400-1334 2 CLAMP CABLE

370 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Standby Switch Assembly for E5070B S/N MY42401987 and above, for
E5071B S/N MY42404510 and above

Figure 5-55 Standby Switch Assembly

Table 5-55 Standby Switch Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61901 5 1 WIRE ASSY W/STANDBY SWITCH

0371-3953 1 KEY CAP

2 0515-2028 9 2 SCREW-MACH M2.5 x 6 FL T8

3 E5062-61612 1 FLAT FLEXIBLE CABLE-LCD (for E5070B S/N

MY42401101 and above, for E5071B S/N MY42402455
and above)

4 1400-1334 1 CLAMP CABLE

5 1400-3360 2 CLAMP CABLE

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 371
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Removable Hard Disk Assemblies for E5070B S/N MY424 1101and

above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Figure 5-56 Removable Hard Disk Assemblies for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B
S/N MY42402455 and above

372 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Table 5-56 Removable Hard Disk Assemblies for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-01254 - 1 HDD BOX

2 E5070-01253 - 1 INNER COVER

3 E5070-66534 - 1 INTERFACE BD PCA

4 0515-0430 - 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

5 0515-0430 - 3 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

6 0515-0430 - 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

7 0515-0372 - 1 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 8 PN T10

8 E5070-66535 - 1 CONNECTOR BD PCA

9 E5070-01255 - 1 HDD BRACKET

10 0515-2028 - 2 SCREW-MACH M2.5 x 6 FL T8

11 E5070-82201 - 1 HDD INSTALLED

12 E5070-25061 - 1 HEAT TRANSFER SHEET

13 E5070-61638 - 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY

14 0515-2146 - 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 4 FL T10

15 0515-0374 - 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 10 PN T10

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 373
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Cover Assembly (1)

Figure 5-57 Cover Assembly

Table 5-57 Cover Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61657 8 1 FLAT CBL ASSY (Opt. 016)

2 0515-0374 4 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 10 PN T10 (Opt. 016)

3 5183-4184 2 1 CNTR TOUCH PANEL (Opt. 016)

4 0515-0430 2 2 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10 (Opt. 016)

5 1400-3156 4 2 SADDLE EDGE (Opt. 016)

6 E5070-00621 8 1 COVER

7 0515-0430 2 4 SCREW-MACH M3.0 x 6 PN T10

374 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Cover Assembly (2)

Figure 5-58 Cover Assembly

Table 5-58 Cover Assembly

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-61628 3 1 WIRE ASSY

2 1400-1334 6 2 CLAMP-CABLE

3 1400-1391 1 CLAMP-CABLE

4 E5070-66531 7 1 LCD ADAPTER

5 1400-0611 0 1 CLAMP-CABLE (for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and

above, for E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above)

6 1400-0611 0 1 CLAMP-CABLE

7 E5070-61622 7 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 375
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Label on Rear Face

Figure 5-59 Label on Rear Face

Table 5-59 Label on Rear Face

Ref. Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

Desig.

1 E5070-87107 7 1 LABEL (E5070B)

E5071-87102 2 1 LABEL (E5071B)

2 5185-3713 5 1 LABEL (OPTION 213)

5185-3714 6 1 LABEL (OPTION 214)

5185-3715 7 1 LABEL (OPTION 313)

5185-3716 8 1 LABEL (OPTION 314)

5185-3717 9 1 LABEL (OPTION 413)

5185-3718 0 1 LABEL (OPTION 414)

5185-3720 4 1 LABEL (OPTION 016)

5185-3722 6 1 LABEL (OPTION 1E5)

5080-3939 5 1 LABEL (OPTION 010)

5185-3719 - 1 LABEL (OPTION 015)

5185-3795 - 1 LABEL (OPTION 008)

3 E5070-87103 3 1 LABEL (NOTE for Switch)

376 Chapter 5
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Others)

Other Parts
Table 5-60 Other Parts

Agilent Part Number C/D Qty. Description

E5070-900x0*1 6 1 USER’S GUIDE

E5070-900x1*1 7 1 INSTALLATION AND QUICK START GUIDE

E5070-900x2*1 8 1 PROGRAMMER’S GUIDE

E5070-900x3*1 9 1 VBA PROGRAMMER’S GUIDE

E5070-903x0*1 7 1 SERVICE MANUAL*2

E5070-9050x*1 1 1 CD-ROM (DOCUMENTATION)

1150-7846 6 1 MOUSE

1150-7970 7 1 KEYBOARD
*1. The number indicated by “x” in the part number of each manual, sample program disk, or CD-ROM, 0 for the first
edition, is incremented by 1 each time a revision is made. The latest edition comes with the product.
*2.Opt. 0BW only

5. Replaceable Parts

Chapter 5 377
 Replaceable Parts
Power Cables and Plug Configurations

Power Cables and Plug Configurations

Figure 5-60 Power Cables and Plug Configurations

378 Chapter 5
 6. Replacement Procedure

6 Replacement Procedure

This chapter provides procedure for removing and replacing the major assemblies in
the E5070B/E5071B ENA Series Network Analyzer.

379
 Replacement Procedure
Replacing an Assembly

Replacing an Assembly
The following steps show the sequence for replacing an assembly in a E5070B/E5071B RF
Network Analyzer.

1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, “Troubleshooting.”

2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 5, “Replaceable Parts.”
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
This chapter and Chapter 7, “Post-Repair Procedures.”
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustment.”
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, “Performance Tests.”

WARNING These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To avoid
electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.

WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages.
Disconnect the instrument from its power supply.

CAUTION Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage from
ESD(electrostatic discharge). Perform the following procedures only at a static-safe
workstation and wear a grounding strap.

380 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
Required Tools

Required Tools
The following tools are required for repair of E5070B/E5071B.
Table 6-1 Required Tools
Assembly TORX screwdriver flat edge torque cutting file hex key open wrench open torque
screwdriver screwdriver plier wrench*1
TORX T10
T8 T10 T15 T20 1.5 mm 9/16 in. 5/8 in. 5/16 in.

Outer Cover √ √ √
Front Panel √ √ √ √
Mass Storage √ √ √
Removable Hard Disk
√ √ √ √
Drive
Removable Hard Disk
√ √ √
Assembly
FDD √ √ √
Power Supply √ √ √ √
Handler I/O √ √ √
CPU √ √ √
DIMM √ √ √ √
Digital Mother Board √ √ √ √
Source Board √ √ √ √ √ √
Receiver Board √ √ √ √ √
Level Vernier √ √ √ √ √
Fan & Switch Control
√ √ √
Board
Fan √ √ √ √ √
Attenuator √ √ √ √ √
Switch √ √ √ √ √
Power Amp. √ √ √ √ √
Analog Motherboard √ √ √ √ √ √
Analog Interface
√ √ √
Board
GPIB Board √ √ √
USB (USBTMC)
√ √ √
Interface Card
Display Board √ √ √
Front Keyboard √ √ √ √ √
Inverter √ √ √ √ √
LCD √ √ √ √
LCD Backlight √ √ √ √
Reference Oven √ √ √
N connector √ √ √ √ √ √ √

*1. It’s recommended to use E5070-65100 if you want to wrench nuts easily.

Chapter 6 381
 Replacement Procedure
Outer Cover Removal

Outer Cover Removal

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20

Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-1 for this procedure.

Step 1. Disconnect the power cable from the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 2. Put a plastic cover (p/n 5959-8096, item 1) on the front panel of the analyzer and place the
analyzer on flat table with its front panel down.

Step 3. Remove the four bottom feet (item 2).

Step 4. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 3) from the bottom.

Step 5. Remove the four TORX T20 screws (item 4) fastening the side strap handles.

Step 6. Remove the four TORX T15 screws (item 5) fastening the four rear foot

Step 7. Remove the six TORX T15 screws (item 6) fastening the cover.

Step 8. Slide up the outer cover and remove it carefully.

382 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
Outer Cover Removal

Figure 6-1 Outer Cover Removal

Chapter 6 383
 Replacement Procedure
Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below,
E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,

MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42301396 and below

Tools required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• flat edge screwdriver

Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-2 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Release the cable (item 8) from the cable clamp (item 1)

Step 3. Remove the top trim (item 2) using a flat edge driver.

Step 4. Remove the eight TORX T15 screws (item 3) fastening front panel.

Step 5. Gradually push the front panel assembly towards the outside.

Step 6. Release the mylar cable (item 4) from the cable clamp (item 5).

Step 7. Disconnect the three cables (item 6, 7 and 8) from the front panel.

NOTE Keep the mylar cable (item 4) connected.

384 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below,
E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below
Figure 6-2 Front Panel Removal

Chapter 6 385
 Replacement Procedure
Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454

Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru

MY4231100, E5071B : MY42301397 thru MY4232454

Tools required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• flat edge screwdriver

Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-3 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Release the cable (item 8) from the cable clamp (item 1)

Step 3. Remove the top trim (item 2) using a flat edge driver.

Step 4. Remove the eight TORX T15 screws (item 3) fastening front panel.

Step 5. Gradually push the front panel assembly towards the outside.

Step 6. Release the mylar cable (item 4) from the cable clamp (item 5).

Step 7. Disconnect the three cables (item 6, 7 and 8) from the front panel.

NOTE Keep the mylar cable (item 4) connected.

386 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454
Figure 6-3 Front Panel Removal

Chapter 6 387
 Replacement Procedure
Front Panel Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above

Front Panel Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and

above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Tools required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• flat edge screwdriver

Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-4 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Release the cable (item 8) from the cable clamp (item 1)

Step 3. Remove the top trim (item 2) using a flat edge driver.

Step 4. Remove the eight TORX T15 screws (item 3) fastening front panel.

Step 5. Gradually push the front panel assembly towards the outside.

Step 6. Release the mylar cable (item 4) from the cable clamp (item 5).

Step 7. Disconnect the three cables (item 6, 7 and 8) from the front panel.

NOTE Keep the mylar cable (item 4) connected.

The mylar cable and its connector are very fragile. It’s recommended that you should
replace the mylar cable when the cable is disconnected and reconnected frequently.

388 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
Front Panel Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above
Figure 6-4 Front Panel Removal

Chapter 6 389
 Replacement Procedure
A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Replacement

A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-5 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 1) fastening the A27 mass storage disk drive.

Step 3. Lift the mass storage disk drive.

Figure 6-5 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Removal

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

Step 2. Restore backup files onto the new mass storage disk drive as described in “Restore Backup
Files onto the New Mass Storage Disk Drive” on page 391.

Step 3. Calibrate the touch screen as described in “Calibration of the Touch Screen” on page 391.

390 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Replacement

Restore Backup Files onto the New Mass Storage Disk Drive
The Backup files is stored in the flash ROM on the analog interface board. The file must be
restored in the new mass storage disk drive with the adjustment program. For detail of the
adjustment program, refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustment,” on page 193.

Step 1. Run the adjustment program.

Step 2. Input the GPIB address of the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 3. Input the serial number of the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 4. Choose Spot Adjustment.

Step 5. Choose HDD.

Calibration of the Touch Screen

When you have replaced the HDD on a E5070B/E5071B equipped with an Option 016
touch screen, you have to calibrate the touch screen. Follow the procedure described below
to calibrate the touch screen.

Step 1. Press .

Step 2. Press Service Menu.

Step 3. Press Test Menu.

Step 4. Press Adjust Touch Screen.

The touch screen calibration screen (Figure 6-6) appears.

Figure 6-6 Touch Panel Calibration Screen

Step 5. Touch the x mark on the upper left with your finger. The mark x appears also on the lower
left, upper right, and lower right. Touch the x marks in that order with your finger.

Touching the four locations described above with your finger automatically concludes the
touch screen calibration.

NOTE With no operation on the touch screen calibration screen for a preset time, it automatically
closes and the previous measurement screen reappears.

Chapter 6 391
 Replacement Procedure
Removable Hard Disk Drive Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and
above, for E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Removable Hard Disk Drive Replacement for E5070B S/N

MY42401101 and above, for E5071B S/N MY42402455 and
above

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T8, T10, T15, and T20

Removal procedure
Refer to Figure 6-7 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 1), and remove the removable hard disk drive’s
lid (item 2).

Step 2. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 3) fastening the HDD bracket.

Step 3. Remove the two TORX T8 screws (item 4).

Step 4. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 5), and remove the HDD bracket.

Step 5. Remove the hard disk drive from the connector board.

Figure 6-7 Removable Hard Disk Drive Removal

392 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
Removable Hard Disk Drive Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and
above, for E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Paste the heat transfer sheet to the hard disk drive rear side (Refer to Figure 6-8).

Figure 6-8 Heat Transfer Sheet

Step 2. Replace the removable hard disk drive by inverse procedure of removal.

Step 3. Restore backup files onto the new removable hard disk drive as described in “Restore
Backup Files onto the New Removable Hard Disk Drive” on page 394.

Step 4. Calibrate the touch screen as described in “Calibration of the Touch Screen” on page 395.

Chapter 6 393
 Replacement Procedure
Removable Hard Disk Drive Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and
above, for E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Restore Backup Files onto the New Removable Hard Disk Drive
The Backup files is stored in the flash ROM on the analog interface board. The file must be
restored in the new removable hard disk drive with the adjustment program. For detail of
the adjustment program, refer to Chapter 3, “Adjustment,” on page 193.

Step 1. Run the adjustment program.

Step 2. Input the GPIB address of the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 3. Input the serial number of the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 4. Choose Spot Adjustment.

Step 5. Choose HDD.

394 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
Removable Hard Disk Drive Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and
above, for E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Calibration of the Touch Screen

When you have replaced the HDD on a E5070B/E5071B equipped with an Option 016
touch screen, you have to calibrate the touch screen. Follow the procedure described below
to calibrate the touch screen.

Step 1. Press .

Step 2. Press Service Menu.

Step 3. Press Test Menu.

Step 4. Press Adjust Touch Screen.

The touch screen calibration screen (Figure 6-9) appears.

Figure 6-9 Touch Panel Calibration Screen

Step 5. Touch the x mark on the upper left with your finger. The mark x appears also on the lower
left, upper right, and lower right. Touch the x marks in that order with your finger.

Touching the four locations described above with your finger automatically concludes the
touch screen calibration.

NOTE With no operation on the touch screen calibration screen for a preset time, it automatically
closes and the previous measurement screen reappears.

Chapter 6 395
 Replacement Procedure
Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and
above, for E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S/N

MY42401101 and above, for E5071B S/N MY42402455 and
above

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20

Removal procedure
Refer to Figure 6-10 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the TORX T10 screw (item 1).

Step 3. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 2) fastening the angle.

Step 4. Lift the angle with the removable hard disk assembly.

CAUTION Lift the angle with the removable hard disk assembly slowly to prevent tension from
cables.

Step 5. Remove three TORX T10 screws (item 3) and remove the removable hard disk assembly
from the angle.

Step 6. Disconnect the cable (item 4) connected to the power supply.

Step 7. Disconnect the cable (item 5) connected to the crystal oven board.

Step 8. Disconnect the flat cable (item 6) connected to the mother board.

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the removable hard disk assembly by inverse procedure of removal.

396 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and
above, for E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above
Figure 6-10 Removable Hard Disk Assembly Removal

Chapter 6 397
 Replacement Procedure
A28 FDD (Floppy Disk Drive) Replacement

A28 FDD (Floppy Disk Drive) Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20

Removal procedure
Refer to Figure 6-11 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the clamp (item 1) from the angle.

Step 3. Disconnect the cable (item 2) connected from the power supply.

Step 4. Remove three TORX T10 screws (item 3).

Step 5. Slide the A28 FDD assembly backward.

CAUTION Slide the assembly slowly to prevent tension from cables

Step 6. Disconnect the flat cable (item 4) from the FDD.

Step 7. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 5) fastening the FDD to the mount.

Step 8. Remove the two TORX T10 screws (item 6) fastening the plate.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Fasten the plate to the new FDD, and then fasten it to the mount as shown in Figure 6-11.

Step 2. Replace the FDD assembly by inverse procedure of removal.

398 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A28 FDD (Floppy Disk Drive) Replacement

Figure 6-11 A28 FDD Removal

Chapter 6 399
 Replacement Procedure
A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Replacement

A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• torque screwdriver, TORX T10 (set to 7 in-lb)

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-12 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the removable hard disk assembly as described in “Removable Hard Disk
Assembly Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, for E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above” on page 396.

NOTE If it is a version where the E5070B/71B doesn't have the removable hard disk assembly,
skip this step.

Step 3. Release the cables from the clamp (item 1) on the angle.

Step 4. Disconnect the power supply cables (item 2 and 3).

Step 5. Remove the two TORX T15 screws (item 4) fastening the power supply holder.

Step 6. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 5) from the rear panel.

Step 7. Lift the A50 ATX power supply assembly toward front side.

Step 8. Disconnect the power supply cables (item 6).

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the A50 ATX power supply assembly by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Fasten the TORX T10 screws (item 5) using a torque screwdriver.

400 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Replacement

Figure 6-12 A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal

Chapter 6 401
 Replacement Procedure
A23 Handler I/O Board Replacement

A23 Handler I/O Board Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-13 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the removable hard disk assembly as described in “Removable Hard Disk
Assembly Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, for E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above” on page 396.

NOTE If it is a version where the E5070B/71B doesn't have the removable hard disk assembly,
skip this step.

Step 3. Disconnect the flat cable (item 1) from the A23 handler I/O board.

Step 4. Remove the two TORX T10 screws (item 2) fastening the A23 handler I/O board.

Step 5. Slide the A23 handler I/O board toward backward.

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the A23 handler I/O board by inverse procedure of removal.

402 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A23 Handler I/O Board Replacement

Figure 6-13 A23 Handler I/O Board Removal

Chapter 6 403
 Replacement Procedure
DIMM Module Replacement for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and
below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

DIMM Module Replacement for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,

MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42301396 and below
There are two DIMM256MB memory module on the A20 digital motherboard.

NOTE It cannot replace only DIMMs, when an E5070B serial number is after MY42300633, or
when an E5071B serial number is after MY42301397. It is necessary to replace an A20
digital motherboard.

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Cutting plier or scissors

Removal Procedure
Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the removable hard disk assembly as described in “Removable Hard Disk
Assembly Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, for E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above” on page 396.

NOTE If it is a version where the E5070B/71B doesn't have the removable hard disk assembly,
skip this step.

Step 3. Remove the A26 LCD Interface as described in “A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for
E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK,
MY4232454 and below” on page 444.

Step 4. Cut the cable tie (item 1).

Step 5. Unlatch the two clips and remove the DIMM memory.

404 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
DIMM Module Replacement for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and
below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below
Figure 6-14 DIMM Module Removal

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Install the DIMM memory in the socket and latch the clips.

Step 2. Clamp the two clips using the new cable tie as shown in Figure 6-14.

Step 3. Replace the DIMM memory by inverse procedure of removal.

Chapter 6 405
 Replacement Procedure
A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B :

JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Cutting plier or scissors

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-15 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the mouse, the external keyboard and the parallel printer cable if they are
connected to the rear panel.

Step 2. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382

Step 3. Remove the removable hard disk assembly as described in “Removable Hard Disk
Assembly Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, for E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above” on page 396.

NOTE If it is a version where the E5070B/71B doesn't have the removable hard disk assembly,
skip this step.

Step 4. Remove the following assemblies.

• A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly (refer to “A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly
Replacement” on page 400.)
• A23 Handler I/O board (refer to “A23 Handler I/O Board Replacement” on page 402.)
• A21 Analog Interface board (refer to “A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement” on
page 440.)
• A24 GPIB board (refer to “A24 GPIB Card Replacement” on page 442.)
• A26 LCD Interface Card (refer to “A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B
S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4232454
and below” on page 444.)

Step 5. Disconnect the following cables.

• Connected to the Front Panel (item 1).

• Connected from the A10 Analog Mother Board (item 2).
• Connected from the A28 FDD (item 3).
• Connected from the mass storage disk assembly, or the removable hard disk assembly
(item 4).
• Connected to the A32 USB connector (item 5).

Step 6. Remove three TORX T10 screws (item 6) fastening the guide plate.

Step 7. Remove eight TORX T10 screws (item 7) fastening the digital motherboard.

Step 8. Lift the digital motherboard.

406 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Remove the replaceable parts on the old board.

a. Remove the DIMM modules as described in “DIMM Module Replacement for E5070B
: JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and
below” on page 404.
b. Disassemble the guide plate from rear side of the mother board.

Step 2. Assemble the removed parts on the new board.

Step 3. Install the new board by the reverse procedure of removal.

Figure 6-15 A20 Digital Motherboard Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and
below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below

Chapter 6 407
 Replacement Procedure
A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B : MY42300633 thru
MY4231100, E5071B : MY42301397 thru MY4232454

A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B :

MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B : MY42301397 thru
MY4232454

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Cutting plier or scissors

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-16 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the mouse, the external keyboard and the parallel printer cable if they are
connected to the rear panel.

Step 2. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382

Step 3. Remove the removable hard disk assembly as described in “Removable Hard Disk
Assembly Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, for E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above” on page 396.

NOTE If it is a version where the E5070B/71B doesn't have the removable hard disk assembly,
skip this step.

Step 4. Remove the following assemblies.

• A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly (refer to “A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly
Replacement” on page 400.)
• A23 Handler I/O board (refer to “A23 Handler I/O Board Replacement” on page 402.)
• A21 Analog Interface board (refer to “A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement” on
page 440.)
• A24 GPIB board (refer to “A24 GPIB Card Replacement” on page 442.)
• A26 LCD Interface Card (refer to “A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B
S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4232454
and below” on page 444.)

Step 5. Disconnect the following cables.

• Connected to the Front Panel (item 1).

• Connected from the A10 Analog Mother Board (item 2).
• Connected from the A28 FDD (item 3).
• Connected from the mass storage disk assembly, or the removable hard disk assembly
(item 4).
• Connected to the A32 USB connector (item 5).

Step 6. Remove three TORX T10 screws (item 6) fastening the guide plate.

Step 7. Remove eight TORX T10 screws (item 7) fastening the digital motherboard.

Step 8. Lift the digital motherboard.

408 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B : MY42300633 thru
MY4231100, E5071B : MY42301397 thru MY4232454

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Disassemble the guide plate from rear side of the mother board.

Step 2. Assemble the removed part on the new board.

Step 3. Clamp the two clips using the new cable tie for DIMM memorys.

Step 4. Install the new board by the reverse procedure of removal.

Figure 6-16 A20 Digital Motherboard Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 and above, E5071B :
MY42301397 and above

Chapter 6 409
 Replacement Procedure
A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and
above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B S/N

MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and
above

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Cutting plier or scissors

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-17 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the mouse, the external keyboard and the parallel printer cable if they are
connected to the rear panel.

Step 2. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382

Step 3. Remove the removable hard disk assembly as described in “Removable Hard Disk
Assembly Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above, for E5071B S/N
MY42402455 and above” on page 396.

NOTE If it is a version where the E5070B/71B doesn't have the removable hard disk assembly,
skip this step.

Step 4. Remove the following assemblies.

• A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly (refer to “A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly
Replacement” on page 400.)
• A23 Handler I/O board (refer to “A23 Handler I/O Board Replacement” on page 402.)
• A21 Analog Interface board (refer to “A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement” on
page 440.)
• A24 GPIB board (refer to “A24 GPIB Card Replacement” on page 442.)
• A26 LCD Interface Card (refer to “A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B
S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4232454
and below” on page 444.)

Step 5. Disconnect the following cables.

• Connected to the Front Panel (item 1).

• Connected from the A10 Analog Mother Board (item 2).
• Connected from the A28 FDD (item 3).
• Connected from the mass storage disk assembly, or the removable hard disk assembly
(item 4).
• Connected to the A32 USB connector (item 5).
• Connected to the Front Panel (display)(item 6).

NOTE The mylar cable (item 6) and its connector are very fragile. It’s recommended to replace
the mylar cable when the cable is disconnedted and connected frequently.

410 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and
above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above
Step 6. Remove three TORX T10 screws (item 7) fastening the guide plate.

Step 7. Remove eight TORX T10 screws (item 8) fastening the digital motherboard.

Step 8. Lift the digital motherboard.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Disassemble the guide plate from rear side of the mother board.

Step 2. Assemble the removed part on the new board.

Step 3. Clamp the two clips using the new cable tie for DIMM memorys.

Step 4. Install the new board by the reverse procedure of removal.

Figure 6-17 A20 Digital Motherboard Removal

Chapter 6 411
 Replacement Procedure
A1 Source Board Replacement

A1 Source Board Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver
• Box wrench, 5/8 inch
• Open-end torque wrench, 5/16 inch (set to 10 in-lb) (for reconnecting SMA connector)

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-18 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 384,
or “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 386.

Step 2. Remove the two 5/8 inch nuts (item 1) fastening the BNC connector on the rear panel.

Step 3. Disconnect the all semi-rigid cables and the termination connected to the board referring to
the figures as shown in Table 6-2.

NOTE The label on the semi-rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number.

Table 6-2 Reference Figure

Option Figure

213 Figure 5-20 on page 327

214 Figure 5-21 on page 328 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-28 on page 341 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

313 Figure 5-22 on page 330

314 Figure 5-23 on page 332 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-29 on page 342 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

413 Figure 5-24 on page 334

414 Figure 5-25 on page 336 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-30 on page 344 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

Step 4. Remove the two TORX T10 screws fastening the extractor. (item 2)

412 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A1 Source Board Replacement

Step 5. Slide the A1 source board using the extractor.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Replace the A1 source board by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement.

Figure 6-18 A1 Source Board Removal

Chapter 6 413
 Replacement Procedure
A2 Receiver Board Replacement

A2 Receiver Board Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10
• Flat edge screwdriver
• Open-end torque wrench, 9/16 inch
• Open-end torque wrench, 5/16 inch (set to 10 in-lb) (for reconnecting SMA connector)

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-19 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 384,
or “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 386.

Step 2. Remove the N-connector holder as described in “N Connector Replacement” on page 462.

Step 3. Disconnect the semi-rigid cables and the termination from the receiver module as shown in
Table 6-3.

NOTE The label on the semi-rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number.

Table 6-3 Reference Figure

Option Figure

213 Figure 5-20 on page 327

214 Figure 5-21 on page 328 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-28 on page 341 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

313 Figure 5-22 on page 330

314 Figure 5-23 on page 332 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-29 on page 342 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

413 Figure 5-24 on page 334

414 Figure 5-25 on page 336 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-30 on page 344 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

Step 4. Remove the all TORX T10 screws fastening the extractor . (item 1)

414 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A2 Receiver Board Replacement

Step 5. Slide the receiver module using the extractor.

NOTE Slide the two board at once if two A2 receiver boards are slotted.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Replace the A2 receiver boards by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement.

Figure 6-19 A2 Receiver Removal

Chapter 6 415
 Replacement Procedure
A2 Receiver Board Replacement

Module Disassemble Procedure

Skip this procedure if the option 213 or 214 is installed.
Refer to Figure 6-20 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the eight TORX T10 screws (item 1) fastening the A2 receiver boards.

Step 2. Separate the two A2 receiver boards.

Board Disassemble Procedure

Refer to Figure 6-20 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the seven TORX T15 screws (item 2) fastening the A15 Receiver-RF board (item
3) and the A17 Receiver-IF board (item 4).

Step 2. Separate the two boards.

416 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A2 Receiver Board Replacement

Figure 6-20 Receiver Disassemble

Chapter 6 417
 Replacement Procedure
A3 Level Vernier Replacement

A3 Level Vernier Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver
• Open-end wrench, 5/8 inch
• Open-end torque wrench, 5/16 inch (set to 10 in-lb) (for reconnecting SMA connector)

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-21 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 384,
or “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 386.

Step 2. Disconnect the all semi-rigid cables and the termination connected to the boards referring
to the figures as shown in Table 6-4.

NOTE The label on the semi-rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number.

Table 6-4 Reference Figure

Option Figure

213 Figure 5-20 on page 327

214 Figure 5-21 on page 328 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-28 on page 341 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

313 Figure 5-22 on page 330

314 Figure 5-23 on page 332 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-29 on page 342 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

413 Figure 5-24 on page 334

414 Figure 5-25 on page 336 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-30 on page 344 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

Step 3. Remove the two TORX T10 screws fastening the extractor. (item 2)

Step 4. Slide the A3 level vernier using the extractor.

418 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A3 Level Vernier Replacement

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the A3 level vernier by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement.

Figure 6-21 A3 Level Vernier Removal

Chapter 6 419
 Replacement Procedure
B1 Fan & A6 Switch Control Board Replacement

B1 Fan & A6 Switch Control Board Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-22 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the power supply as described in “A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly
Replacement” on page 400.

Step 3. Disconnect the all cables from the board.

Step 4. Remove two TORX T10 screws (item 1) fastening the board.

Step 5. Remove the board.

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the B1 fun & switch control board by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Connect the cables as Figure 6-22.

420 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
B1 Fan & A6 Switch Control Board Replacement

Figure 6-22 B1 Fan & A6 Switch Control Board Removal

Chapter 6 421
 Replacement Procedure
B1 Fan Replacement

B1 Fan Replacement
There are three fans as shown in Figure 6-23.

Figure 6-23 The location and direction of the fan 1, fan 2, and fan 3

422 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
B1 Fan Replacement

Fan 1 and 2

Tools Required

• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20

• Flat edge screwdriver
• A fine stick such as Hex key, 1.5 mm

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-24 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the front panel as described in“Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 384,
or “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 386.

Step 3. Remove the three TORX T10 screws (item 1) fastening the fan plate.

Step 4. Disconnect the fan cable from the fan & switch control board.

Step 5. Remove parts and cables which may block operation.

Step 6. Remove the eight rivet (plastic) fastening the fan as shown in Figure 6-24.

Figure 6-24 Fan 1 and 2 Removal

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the fan by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Fasten the fan in the direction as shown in Figure 6-23.

Chapter 6 423
 Replacement Procedure
B1 Fan Replacement

Fan 3

Tools Required

• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-25 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Disconnect the fan cable from the fan & switch control board.

Step 3. Remove parts and cables which may block operation.

Step 4. Remove the three TORX T10 screws (item 1) fastening the fan assembly.

Step 5. Slide the fan assembly as shown in Figure 6-25

Step 6. Remove the four TORX T20 screws (item 2) fastening the fan.

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Fasten the new fan to the fan assembly.

Step 2. Replace the fan assembly by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Fasten the fan in the direction as shown in Figure 6-23.

424 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
B1 Fan Replacement

Figure 6-25 Fan 3 Removal

Chapter 6 425
 Replacement Procedure
A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK or
MY421, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421 (Option 214, 314 and 414)

A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S/N

prefix JP1KK or MY421, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK or
MY421 (Option 214, 314 and 414)

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver
• Open-end torque wrench, 5/16 inch (set to 10 in-lb) (for reconnecting SMA connector)

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-26 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 384,
or “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 386.

Step 3. Remove the three TORX T10 screws (item 1) fastening the fan plate.

Step 4. Disconnect the semi-rigid cables (item 2 and 3) from the A7 source step attenuator.

NOTE The label on the semi-rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number.

Step 5. Disconnect the flat cable (item 4) from the attenuator.

Step 6. Remove the two TORX T10 screws (item 5) fastening the A7 source step attenuator holder
from the front side.

Step 7. Remove the two TORX T10 screws (item 6) fastening the A7 source step attenuator to the
holder.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Fasten the new source step attenuator to the holder as shown in Figure 6-26.

Step 2. Replace the A7 source step attenuator holder by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement.

426 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK or
MY421, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421 (Option 214, 314 and 414)
Figure 6-26 A7 Source Step Attenuator Removal

Chapter 6 427
 Replacement Procedure
A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B S/N prefix MY422 and above (Option 214, 314 and 414)

A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S/N

prefix MY422 and above, E5071B S/N prefix MY422 and
above (Option 214, 314 and 414)

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver
• Open-end torque wrench, 5/16 inch (set to 10 in-lb) (for reconnecting SMA connector)

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-27 for Opt.214, and Figure 6-28 for Opt.314, or 414 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 384,
or “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 386.

Step 3. Remove the three TORX T10 screws (item 1) fastening the fan plate.

Step 4. Disconnect the semi-rigid cables (item 2 and 3) from the A7 source step attenuator.

NOTE The label on the semi-rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number.

Step 5. Disconnect the flat cable (item 4) from the attenuator.

Step 6. Remove the two TORX T10 screws (item 5) fastening the A7 source step attenuator holder
from the front side.

Step 7. Remove the two TORX T10 screws (item 6) fastening the A7 source step attenuator to the
holder.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Fasten the new source step attenuator to the holder as shown in Figure 6-27 or Figure 6-28.

Step 2. Replace the A7 source step attenuator holder by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement.

428 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B S/N prefix MY422 and above (Option 214, 314 and 414)
Figure 6-27 A7 Source Step Attenuator Removal for Opt.214

Chapter 6 429
 Replacement Procedure
A7 Source Step Attenuator Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix MY422 and
above, E5071B S/N prefix MY422 and above (Option 214, 314 and 414)

Figure 6-28 A7 Source Step Attenuator Removal for Opt.314, or 414

430 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A8 RF Switch Replacement

A8 RF Switch Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver
• Open-end torque wrench, 5/16 inch (set to 10 in-lb) (for reconnecting SMA connector)

A8 RF Switch (source board side)

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-29 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 384,
or “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 386.

Step 2. Remove the three TORX T10 screws (item 1) fastening the fan plate.

Step 3. Disconnect the all semi-rigid cables from the switch on the left side. (refer to the figure as
shown in Table 6-5)

NOTE The label on the semi-rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number.

Chapter 6 431
 Replacement Procedure
A8 RF Switch Replacement

Table 6-5 Reference Figure

Option Figure

213 Figure 5-20 on page 327

214 Figure 5-21 on page 328 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-28 on page 341 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

313 Figure 5-22 on page 330

314 Figure 5-23 on page 332 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-29 on page 342 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

413 Figure 5-24 on page 334

414 Figure 5-25 on page 336 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-30 on page 344 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

Step 4. Disconnect the semi-rigid cables (item 1 and 2 in Figure 6-27) from the A7 source step
attenuator if the option 214, 314 or 414 is installed.

Step 5. Disconnect the switch cable from the switch.

Step 6. Remove the two TORX T10 screws fastening the switch. (item 2)

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the switch by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Fasten the semi-rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement.

432 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A8 RF Switch Replacement

Figure 6-29 A8 RF Switch (source board side) Replacement

Chapter 6 433
 Replacement Procedure
A8 RF Switch Replacement

A8 RF Switch (receiver board side)

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-30 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the A4 power amp. module assembly.

a. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.
b. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and
below” on page 384.
c. Remove the floppy disk drive as described in “A28 FDD (Floppy Disk Drive)
Replacement” on page 398.
d. Remove the three TORX T10 screws (item 1 in Figure 6-29) fastening the fan plate.
e. Release the cables from the cable clamp (item 1).
f. Disconnect the all semi-rigid cables from the switches on the left side and the A4
power amp. module. (refer to the figure as shown in Table 6-5 on page 432)

NOTE The label on the semi-rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number.

g. Remove the two TORX T10 screws (item 2) fastening the A4 power amp. module
assembly.
h. Release the cables from the cable clamp (item 3).
i. Disconnect the cables from the switches and the A4 power amp. module.

Step 2. Remove the TORX T10 screws (item 4) fastening the switches.

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Fasten the new switches to the A4 power amp. module assembly as shown in Figure 6-30.

Step 2. Replace the assembly by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Confirm that the cables are connected as shown in Figure 6-30 on page 435
Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement.

434 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A8 RF Switch Replacement

Figure 6-30 A8 RF Switch (receiver board side) Replacement

Chapter 6 435
 Replacement Procedure
A4 Power Amp. Module Replacement

A4 Power Amp. Module Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver
• Open-end torque wrench, 5/16 inch (set to 10 in-lb) (for reconnecting SMA connector)

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-31 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the A4 power amp. module assembly as described in Step 1 in “A8 RF Switch
(receiver board side)” on page 434.

Step 2. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 1) fastening the A4 power amp. module.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Fasten the new amp. module as shown in Figure 6-31.

Step 2. Replace the A4 power amp. module assembly by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Confirm that the cables are connected as shown in Figure 6-30 on page 435.
Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement.

436 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A4 Power Amp. Module Replacement

Figure 6-31 A4 Power Amp. Module (Opt. 31x/41x) Replacement

Chapter 6 437
 Replacement Procedure
A10 Analog Motherboard Replacement

A10 Analog Motherboard Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver
• Open-end wrench, 5/16 inch and 5/8 inch
• Open-end torque wrench, 5/16 inch (set to 10 in-lb) (for reconnecting SMA connector)

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-32 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the front frame as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 384,
or “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 386.

Step 3. Remove the source board as described in “A1 Source Board Replacement” on page 412.

Step 4. Remove the receiver board as described in “A2 Receiver Board Replacement” on
page 414.

Step 5. Remove the level vernier as described in “A3 Level Vernier Replacement” on page 418.

Step 6. Remove the power supply as described in “A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly
Replacement” on page 400

Step 7. Disconnect the cables connected to the A10 analog motherboard.

Step 8. Remove the nine TORX T10 screws (item 1) fastening the A10 analog mother board.

438 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A10 Analog Motherboard Replacement

Figure 6-32 A10 Analog Motherboard Removal

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the A10 analog mother board by inverse procedure of removal.

Chapter 6 439
 Replacement Procedure
A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement

A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-33 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove four TORX T10 screw (item 1) fastening the angle to the side panels.

Step 3. Disconnect the cables (item 2, 3 and 4) from the A21 Analog Interface board.

Step 4. Remove a TORX T10 screw (item 5) fastening the board to the rear panel.

Step 5. Lift the A21 analog interface board.

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the A21 analog interface board by inverse procedure of removal.

440 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A21 Analog Interface Board Replacement

Figure 6-33 A21 Analog Interface Board Removal

NOTE Refer to Chapter 5, “Replaceable Parts,” on page 287 for the latest cabling too.

Chapter 6 441
 Replacement Procedure
A24 GPIB Card Replacement

A24 GPIB Card Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-34 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the TORX T10 screw (item 1) fastening the card to the rear panel.

Step 3. Lift the A24 GPIB card.

CAUTION Be careful not to injure the cable connecting the display board to the front assembly.

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the A24 GPIB card by inverse procedure of removal.

442 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A24 GPIB Card Replacement

Figure 6-34 A24 GPIB Card Removal

NOTE Refer to Chapter 5, “Replaceable Parts,” on page 287 for the latest cabling too.

Chapter 6 443
 Replacement Procedure
A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK,
MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4232454 and below

A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S/N

prefix JP1KK, MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N prefix
JP1KK, MY4232454 and below

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-36 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Disconnect the mylar cables (item 1) from the display board.

NOTE Use the following procedure when you handle the mylar ribbon cable. The mylar cable and
their connector are very fragile. It’s recommended to replace the mylar cable when you are
instructed to disconnect and connect the mylar cable frequently.

a. Pry up the retainer slightly at either end of the connector as shown in Figure 6-35, using
a small flat edge screwdriver.

Figure 6-35 pry up the retainer

b. Pull the mylar ribbon cable out of the connector.

Step 3. Remove the TORX T10 screw (item 2) fastening the card to the rear panel.

Step 4. Lift the A26 LCD interface card.

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the A26 LCD interface card by inverse procedure of removal.

444 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A26 LCD Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK,
MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4232454 and below

Figure 6-36 A26 LCD Interface Card Removal for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4231100 and
below, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4232454 and below

NOTE Refer to Chapter 5, “Replaceable Parts,” on page 287 for the latest cabling too.

Chapter 6 445
 Replacement Procedure
USB (USBTMC) Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and
above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

USB (USBTMC) Interface Card Replacement for E5070B

S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and
above

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-37 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the TORX T10 screw fastening the card (item 1) to the rear panel.

Step 3. Remove the flat cable (item 2) from the A21 analog interface board.

Step 4. Lift the USB (USBTMC) interface card.

CAUTION Be careful not to injure the cable connecting the display board to the front assembly.

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the USB (USBTMC) interface card by inverse procedure of removal.

446 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
USB (USBTMC) Interface Card Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and
above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Figure 6-37 USB (USBTMC) Interface Card Removal for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

NOTE Refer to Chapter 5, “Replaceable Parts,” on page 287 for the latest cabling too.

Chapter 6 447
 Replacement Procedure
A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK,
MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4232454 and below

A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S/N

prefix JP1KK, MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N prefix
JP1KK, MY4232454 and below

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver
• Hex key, 1.5 mm

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-38 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 384,
or “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 386.

Step 2. Release the clamped cables from the clamps (item 1) on the cover.

NOTE Keep the mylar cable connected.

Step 3. Disconnect the cables (item 2 and 3) from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is
installed.

Step 4. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 4) fastening the cover to the front panel.

Step 5. Disconnect the cable (item 5 and 6) connected through the cover.

NOTE The item 6 is not connected in the E5070B/E5071B without the option 016.

Step 6. Disconnect the two cables (item 7 and 8) from the front keyboard.

Step 7. Remove the knob from the front panel with a 1.5 mm hex key.

Step 8. Remove the two TORX T15 screws (item 9) fastening the inverter assembly.

Step 9. Remove the eight TORX T10 screws (item 10) fastening the A22 front panel keyboard.

Step 10. Separate the keyboard into the board and the rubber key.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Insert the whole jut of the rubber key into the hole on the new A22 front panel keyboard.

Step 2. Replace the A22 front panel keyboard by inverse procedure of removal.

448 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK,
MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4232454 and below
Figure 6-38 A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal

Chapter 6 449
 Replacement Procedure
A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and
above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S/N

MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and
above

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver
• Hex key, 1.5 mm

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-39 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B S/N
MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above” on page 388.

Step 2. Release the clamped cables from the clamps (item 1) on the cover.

NOTE Keep the mylar cable connected.

Step 3. Disconnect the cables (item 2 and 3) from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is
installed.

Step 4. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 4) fastening the cover to the front panel.

Step 5. Disconnect the cable (item 5) connected through the cover.

NOTE The item 5 is not connected in the E5070B/E5071B without the option 016.

Step 6. Disconnect the four cables (item 6,7,8 and 9) from the front keyboard.

Step 7. Remove the knob from the front panel with a 1.5 mm hex key.

Step 8. Remove the two TORX T15 screws (item 10) fastening the inverter assembly.

Step 9. Remove the eight TORX T10 screws (item 11) fastening the A22 front panel keyboard.

Step 10. Separate the keyboard into the board and the rubber key.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Insert the whole jut of the rubber key into the hole on the new A22 front panel keyboard.

Step 2. Replace the A22 front panel keyboard by inverse procedure of removal.

450 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A22 Front Panel Keyboard Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and
above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above
Figure 6-39 A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal

Chapter 6 451
 Replacement Procedure
A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4231100
and below, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4232454 and below

A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix

JP1KK, MY4231100 and below, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK,
MY4232454 and below

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T8, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-40 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 384,
or “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 386.

Step 2. Release the clamped cables from the clamps (item 1) on the cover.

NOTE Keep the mylar cable connected.

Step 3. Disconnect the cables (item 2 and 3) from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is
installed.

Step 4. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 4) fastening the cover to the front panel.

Step 5. Disconnect the cable (item 5 and 6) connected through the cover.

NOTE The item 6 is not connected in the E5070B/E5071B without the option 016.

Step 6. Disconnect the two cables (item 7 and 8) from the inverter.

Step 7. Remove the two TORX T15 screws (item 9) fastening the inverter assembly.

Step 8. Remove the two TORX T8 screws (item 10) fastening the inverter to the holder.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Fasten the new A52 inverter board to the holder.

Step 2. Replace the inverter assembly by inverse procedure of removal.

452 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4231100
and below, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY4232454 and below
Figure 6-40 A52 Inverter Board Removal

Chapter 6 453
 Replacement Procedure
A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S/N

MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and
above

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T8, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-41 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B S/N
MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above” on page 388.

Step 2. ase the clamped cables from the clamps (item 1) on the cover.

NOTE Keep the mylar cable connected.

Step 3. Disconnect the cables (item 2 and 3) from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is
installed.

Step 4. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 4) fastening the cover to the front panel.

Step 5. Disconnect the cable (item 5 ) connected through the cover.

NOTE The item 5 is not connected in the E5070B/E5071B without the option 016.

Step 6. Disconnect the two cables (item 6 and 7) from the inverter.

Step 7. Remove the two TORX T15 screws (item 8) fastening the inverter assembly.

Step 8. Remove the two TORX T8 screws (item 9) fastening the inverter to the holder.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Fasten the new A52 inverter board to the holder.

Step 2. Replace the inverter assembly by inverse procedure of removal.

454 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A52 Inverter Board Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above
Figure 6-41 A52 Inverter Board Removal

Chapter 6 455
 Replacement Procedure
A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY42300632
thru MY4231100, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY42301397 thru MY4232454

A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix

JP1KK, MY42300632 thru MY4231100, E5071B S/N prefix
JP1KK, MY42301397 thru MY4232454

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-42 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 384,
or “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 386.

Step 2. Release the clamped cables from the clamps (item 1) on the cover.

Step 3. Disconnect the cables (item 2 and 3) from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is
installed.

Step 4. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 4) fastening the cover to the front panel.

Step 5. Disconnect the two cables (item 5 and 6) connected through the cover.

NOTE The item 6 is not connected in the E5070B/E5071B without the option 016.

Step 6. Release the cable from the clamps (item 7) on the LCD.

Step 7. Disconnect the cable (item 8) connected to the inverter.

Step 8. Remove the four TORX T15 screws (item 9) fastening the A51 LCD display to the front
panel.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Replace the A51 LCD display by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Fasten the TORX T15 screws (item 9) using a torque screwdriver ( set to 1.02 N-m / 9.0
lb-in).

Step 2. When you have replaced the LCD on a E5070B/E5071B equipped with an Option 016
touch screen, you have to calibrate the touch screen. Follow the procedure described on
“Calibration of the Touch Screen” on page 391.

456 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY42300632
thru MY4231100, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK, MY42301397 thru MY4232454

Figure 6-42 A51 LCD Removal

Chapter 6 457
 Replacement Procedure
A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B

S/N MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and
above

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-43 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B S/N
MY42401101 and above, E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above” on page 388.

Step 2. Release the clamped cables from the clamps (item 1) on the cover.

Step 3. Disconnect the cables (item 2 and 3) from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is
installed.

Step 4. Remove the four TORX T10 screws (item 4) fastening the cover to the front panel.

Step 5. Disconnect the cables (item 5) connected through the cover.

NOTE The item 5 is not connected in the E5070B/E5071B without the option 016.

Step 6. Release the cable from the clamps (item 6) on the LCD.

Step 7. Disconnect the cable (item 7) connected to the front panel keyboard.

Step 8. Disconnect the cable (item 8) connected to the inverter.

Step 9. Remove the four TORX T15 screws (item 9) fastening the A51 LCD display to the front
panel.

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Replace the A51 LCD display by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Fasten the TORX T15 screws (item 9) using a torque screwdriver ( set to 1.02 N-m / 9.0
lb-in).

Step 2. When you have replaced the LCD on a E5070B/E5071B equipped with an Option 016
touch screen, you have to calibrate the touch screen. Follow the procedure described on
“Calibration of the Touch Screen” on page 391.

458 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B S/N MY42401101 and above,
E5071B S/N MY42402455 and above

Figure 6-43 A51 LCD Removal

Chapter 6 459
 Replacement Procedure
LCD Backlight Replacement

LCD Backlight Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-44 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the A51 LCD display as described in“A51 LCD Display Replacement for E5070B
S/N prefix JP1KK, MY42300632 thru MY4231100, E5071B S/N prefix JP1KK,
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 456.

Step 2. Push the stopper (item 1) and slide the backlight as shown in Figure 6-44.

Figure 6-44 LCD Backlight Removal

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the backlight by inverse procedure of removal.

460 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
A5 Crystal Oven Board (Opt.1E5) Replacement

A5 Crystal Oven Board (Opt.1E5) Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15 and T20

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-45 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the outer cover as described in “Outer Cover Removal” on page 382.

Step 2. Remove the two cables (item 1 and 2) connected to the crystal oven board.

Step 3. Remove three TORX T10 screws (item 3) fastening the crystal oven board from the
outside.

Figure 6-45 A5 Crystal Oven Board Removal

Replacement Procedure

Step 1. Replace the crystal oven board by inverse procedure of removal.

Chapter 6 461
 Replacement Procedure
N Connector Replacement

N Connector Replacement

Tools Required
• TORX screwdriver, T10, T15, and T20
• Flat edge screwdriver
• Open-end wrench, 9/16
• Open-end torque wrench, 5/16 inch (set to 10 in-lb) (for reconnecting SMA connector)
• File

Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 6-46 for this procedure.

Step 1. Remove the front panel as described in “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 384,
or “Front Panel Removal for E5070B : MY42300633 thru MY4231100, E5071B :
MY42301397 thru MY4232454” on page 386.

Step 2. Remove the trim from the right side of the front panel.

Step 3. Remove the TORX T15 screw (item 1) fastening the N-connector holder from the right
side.

Step 4. Remove the two TORX T15 screws (item 2) from the bottom.

Step 5. Disconnect the semi-rigid cables from the N connector. (refer to the figure as shown in
Table 6-6)

NOTE The label on the semi-rigid cable shows the last two digits of the part number.

Table 6-6 Reference Figure

Option Figure

213 Figure 5-20 on page 327

214 Figure 5-21 on page 328 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-28 on page 341 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

313 Figure 5-22 on page 330

314 Figure 5-23 on page 332 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-29 on page 342 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

413 Figure 5-24 on page 334

462 Chapter 6
 6. Replacement Procedure
Replacement Procedure
N Connector Replacement

Table 6-6 Reference Figure

Option Figure

414 Figure 5-25 on page 336 for E5070B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
, for E5071B with S/N prefix JP1KK or MY421
Figure 5-30 on page 344 for E5070B with S/N prefix MY422 and
above, for E5071B with S/N prefix MY422 and above

Step 6. Remove the washers and nuts from the N connectors.

Step 7. Remove the N connector from the holder.

Figure 6-46 N Connector Removal

Chapter 6 463
 Replacement Procedure
N Connector Replacement

Replacement Procedure
Step 1. Fasten the new N connector to the holder.

NOTE Match the dents on the holder and the juts on the connector.

File the hole of the holder smooth if the new N connector cannot be inserted into the hole
easily.

Step 2. Replace the N-connector holder by inverse procedure of removal.

NOTE Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement.

464 Chapter 6
 7. Post-Repair Procedures

7 Post-Repair Procedures

This chapter lists the procedures required to verify the E5070B/E5071B operation after an
assembly is replaced with a new one.

465
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Post-Repair Procedures
Table 7-1 Post Repair Procedures lists the required procedures that must be performed
after the replacement of an assembly, CPU or DIMM(Memory). These are the
recommended minimum procedures to ensure that the replacement is successfully
completed.
Table 7-1 Post-Repair Procedures

Replaced Required Adjustments Verification

Assembly or Part Correction Constants (CC)

A1 Source Board Perform the following required “To Execute the Internal Test” on page 219
adjustments using “Source Board” in “To Execute the External Test” on page 240
Spot Adjustment of the program.
Frequency Accuracy Test
Frequency Reference Adjustment RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test
Source Power Adjustment RF Output Level Linearity Test
Test Port Characteristics Adjustment Trace Noise CW Test
Crosstalk Test
System Dynamic Range Test
Dynamic Accuracy Test
Uncorrected System Performance Test

A3 Level Vernier Perform the following required “To Execute the Internal Test” on page 219
Board adjustments using “Level Vernier” in “To Execute the External Test” on page 240
Spot Adjustment of the program.
RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test
Source Power Adjustment RF Output Level Linearity Test
Test Port Characteristics Adjustment Trace Noise CW Test
Crosstalk Test
System Dynamic Range Test
Dynamic Accuracy Test
Uncorrected System Performance Test

A4 Power Amp Perform the following required “To Execute the Internal Test” on page 219
Module adjustments using “Power Amp “To Execute the External Test” on page 240
Module” in Spot Adjustment of the
RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test
program.
RF Output Level Linearity Test
Source Power Adjustment Trace Noise CW Test
Test Port Characteristics Adjustment Crosstalk Test
System Dynamic Range Test
Dynamic Accuracy Test
Uncorrected System Performance Test

466 Chapter 7
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Table 7-1 Post-Repair Procedures

Replaced Required Adjustments Verification

Assembly or Part Correction Constants (CC)

A15 Receiver-RF Perform the following required “To Execute the Internal Test” on page 219
Board adjustments using “Receiver (RF) “To Execute the External Test” on page 240
Board” in Spot Adjustment of the
RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test
program.

7. Post-Repair Procedures
RF Output Level Linearity Test
Source Power Adjustment Trace Noise CW Test
Test Port Characteristics Adjustment Crosstalk Test
System Dynamic Range Test
Dynamic Accuracy test
Uncorrected System Performance Test

A17 Receiver-IF Perform the following required “To Execute the Internal Test” on page 219
Board adjustments using “Receiver (IF) “To Execute the External Test” on page 240
Board” in Spot Adjustment of the
Trace Noise CW Test
program.
Crosstalk Test
IF Range Gain/Phase Adjustment System dynamic range Test
Source Power Adjustment Dynamic accuracy test
Test Port Characteristics Adjustment Uncorrected system performance

A5 Crystal Oven Perform the following required Frequency Accuracy Test(with Option 1E5)
(for 1E5) adjustment using “Crystal Oven (for
1E5)” in Spot Adjustment of the
program.
Oven Reference Adjustment (Opt. 1E5)

A8 Source Swich Perform the following required “To Execute the Internal Test” on page 219
adjustments using “RF SW” in Spot “To Execute the External Test” on page 240
Adjustment of the program.
Trace Noise CW Test
Source Power Adjustment Crosstalk Test
Test Ports Characteristics Adjustment System dynamic range Test
Dynamic accuracy test
Uncorrected system performance

A6 RF Switch / No adjustment needed “To Execute the Internal Test” on page 219
Temperature
Controller Board

A7 Source Step Perform the following required “To Execute the Internal Test” on page 219
Attenuator (Opt. adjustments using “Att (for “To Execute the External Test” on page 240
214/314/414) 214/314/414)” in Spot Adjustment of
RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test
the program.
RF Output Level Linearity Test
Source Power Adjustment Trace Noise CW Test
Test Port Characteristics Adjustment Crosstalk Test
System Dynamic Range Test
Dynamic Accuracy Test
Uncorrected System Performance Test

Chapter 7 467
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Table 7-1 Post-Repair Procedures

Replaced Required Adjustments Verification

Assembly or Part Correction Constants (CC)

A10 Analog No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process

Motherboard
When the symptom of failure is out of
specification, perform the performance test.
A20 Digital Set jumpers and BIOS parameters on Inspect the Booting Process
Motherboard the A20. For details, see “To configure
the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS
for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42300632 and below, E5071B :
JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and
below” on page 262.

A21 Analog Perform the following required Inspect the Booting Process
Interface Board adjustments using “Analog Interface” in
“To Check the Front Panel” on page 230
Spot Adjustment of the program.
“To Check the External Trigger Input” on
Writing ID page 233
A22 Front Panel No adjustment needed “To Execute the External Test” on page 240
Keyboard “To Check the Front Panel” on page 230

A23 Handler I/O No adjustment needed “To Execute the External Test” on page 240
Board
A24 GPIB Board No adjustment needed “To Check the GPIB” on page 238
USB (USBTMC) No adjustment needed “To Check the USB (USBTMC) Interface
Interface Card Card” on page 238
A26 Display Board No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process
“To Execute the External Test” on page 240
“To Check the Video output” on page 233
A27 Mass Storage Perform “HDD” (Hard Disk Drive) in Inspect the Booting Process
Disk Drive Spot Adjustment of the program.
Calibration of the Touch Screen (for opt.
016)
Removable Hard Perform “HDD” (Hard Disk Drive) in Inspect the Booting Process
Disk Drive Spot Adjustment of the program.
Calibration of the Touch Screen (for opt.
016)
A28 FDD No adjustment needed “To Check the FDD” on page 232
A50 Power Supply No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process
Assembly

468 Chapter 7
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Table 7-1 Post-Repair Procedures

Replaced Required Adjustments Verification

Assembly or Part Correction Constants (CC)

A51 LCD Not adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process

“To Execute the External Test” on page 240
“To Check the LCD” on page 231

7. Post-Repair Procedures
Touch panel (for Calibration of the Touch Screen Inspect the Booting Process
Opt. 016)
“To Execute the External Test” on page 240
“To Check the LCD” on page 231
A52 Inverter Board No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process
“To Execute the External Test” on page 240

DIMM No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process

Chapter 7 469
Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

470 Chapter 7
 A. Manual Changes

A Manual Changes

This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to versions or
configurations of the E5070B/E5071B manufactured earlier than the current printing date
of this manual. The information in this manual applies directly to E5070B/E5071B units
with the serial number that is printed on the title page of this manual.

471
 Manual Changes
Manual Changes

Manual Changes
To adapt this manual to your E5070B/E5071B, refer to Table A-1 and Table A-2.
Table A-1 Manual Changes by Serial Number

Serial Prefix or Number Make Manual Changes

Table A-2 Manual Changes by Firmware Version

Version Make Manual Changes

The ten-character serial number is stamped on the serial number plate (Figure A-1) on the
rear panel.

Figure A-1 Serial Number Plate

472 Appendix A
 B. System Recovery

B System Recovery

This appendix describes how to recover the operating system (Windows 2000) when the
operating system has been damaged.

473
System Recovery
System Recovery

System Recovery
By executing system recovery, you can return the system of the E5070B/E5071B (the
Windows operating system and the firmware) to the factory state (at the time of
purchase*1).

Types of system recoveries

The following 2 types of system recoveries are available.

R Factory recovery
Returns the contents of the C drive to the factory state.

R User recovery*2
Returns the contents of the C drive to a user-specified state. To use this function, you
must prepare for recovery in advance. For information on the preparation, see
“Procedure to create the user backup image” on page 481 or on page 484 for
information on the execution, see “Procedure to execute the user recovery function” on
page 487 or on page 490.

Notes on executing the factory recovery function

Executing the factory recovery function causes the following:

R In addition to the Windows operating system and the firmware, the following settings
of the E5070B/E5071B are returned to the factory state or a user specified state.

• Network setting
• GPIB setting
• Printer setting
R The driver for the supported printer installed after purchase is deleted.
R You need to execute initial registration again.
Files you created using the save function (files in the D drive) are not affected, but we
recommend backing them up before executing system recovery for precautionary
purposes. For more information on backup, refer to “Making Backup Files” as described in
E5070B/E5071B User’s Guide.

*1.If the hard disk failed and has been replaced after purchase, the state when the replacement
was performed is recovered.
*2.This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is CP600 or higher.

474 Appendix B
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Procedure to execute the factory recovery for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,

MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and
below
This section describes how to return the contents of the C drive to the factory state.

NOTE You need the keyboard for this operation.

Step 1. Shut down the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 2. Connect the keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 3. Insert the disk for the system recovery which is furnished with the E5070B/E5071B into
the floppy disk drive of the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 4. Press the standby switch of the E5070B/E5071B to turn it on.

Step 5. When the screen as shown in the figure below appears, press and hold of the
keyboard until this screen disappears.

B. System Recovery
NOTE After several seconds, the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any
key, so do not miss it.

If the above message does not appear, the instrument is at fault; contact your local Agilent
customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor.

Appendix B 475
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Step 6. The following screen appears. Check that Floppy is selected (highlighted) (if Floppy is not
selected, select it with of the keyboard), and press of the keyboard.

Step 7. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard. If you want to cancel the
factory recovery, press here.
Agilent Technologies System Utilities
Recovery & Backup Options (for the E5070/71B)

Choose One of the following:

_________________________________________________________________
1. Recover Factory Backup Image
2. Create User Backup Image
3. Recover User Backup Image
4. Exit
_________________________________________________________________
Enter a Choice: _

NOTE If the above message does not appear, the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is
at fault; contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or
distributor.

476 Appendix B
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Step 8. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard. If you want to cancel the
factory recovery, press here.
You chose to Restore your system by installing the original factory
installed OS and system software.

WARNING: Press C to Continue only if you are sure that you want
to proceed. The C: Drive will be completely overwritten with no
chance of recovering any data. Use Option 1 to recover the system
from a serious malfunction caused by corrupted or inadvertently
deleted files on the system's primary C: partition.

Press C to Continue or E to Exit: _

Step 9. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard to start the factory
recovery. If you want to cancel the factory recovery, press here.
CAUTION! Interrupting this process may leave the system in an
unstable state. Allow the software to complete the
backup and recovery process. This may take up to 20
minutes depending on the system configuration.

Press C to Continue or E to Exit: _

CAUTION Never turn off the power during the system recovery because doing so may cause
serious damage to the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 10. The factory recovery will be complete in about 5 minutes. When the factory recovery is
complete, the message as shown below appears. Press , , and of the
keyboard at the same time to restart.
Remove the disk and Press CLT+ALT+DEL to restart your
system.

NOTE If the above message does not appear, the instrument is at fault; contact your local Agilent
customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor.

B. System Recovery
Step 11. After restart, the screen for initial registration appears. Execute initial registration. For
information on the execution procedure, refer to “Initial Registration of E5070B/E5071B”
on page 493.

Step 12. For the E5070B/E5071B equipped with the Option 016 touch screen, execute the
calibration of the touch screen. For information on the execution procedure, refer to
“Calibration of the Touch Screen” on page 496.

Appendix B 477
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Procedure to execute the factory recovery for E5070B : MY42300633,

and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above

NOTE You need the keyboard for this operation.

Step 1. Shut down the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 2. Connect the keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 3. Insert the disk for the system recovery which is furnished with the E5070B/E5071B into
the floppy disk drive of the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 4. Press the standby switch of the E5070B/E5071B to turn it on.

Step 5. When the screen as shown in the figure below appears, press and hold of the keyboard
until this screen disappears.

NOTE After several seconds, the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any
key, so do not miss it.

If the above message does not appear, the instrument is at fault; contact your local Agilent
customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor.

478 Appendix B
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Step 6. The following screen appears. Select “+Removable Devices” with of the
keyboard, and press of the keyboard.

Step 7. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard. If you want to cancel the
factory recovery, press here.
Agilent Technologies System Utilities
Recovery & Backup Options (for the E5070B/E5071B)

Choose One of the following:

_________________________________________________________________
1. Recover Factory Backup Image
2. Create User Backup Image

B. System Recovery
3. Recover User Backup Image
4. Exit
_________________________________________________________________
Enter a Choice: _

NOTE If the above message does not appear, the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is
at fault; contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or
distributor.

Appendix B 479
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Step 8. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard. If you want to cancel the
factory recovery, press here.
You chose to Restore your system by installing the original factory
installed OS and system software.

WARNING: Press C to Continue only if you are sure that you want
to proceed. The C: Drive will be completely overwritten with no
chance of recovering any data. Use Option 1 to recover the system
from a serious malfunction caused by corrupted or inadvertently
deleted files on the system's primary C: partition.

Press C to Continue or E to Exit: _

Step 9. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard to start the factory
recovery. If you want to cancel the factory recovery, press here.
CAUTION! Interrupting this process may leave the system in an
unstable state. Allow the software to complete the
backup and recovery process. This may take up to 20
minutes depending on the system configuration.

Press C to Continue or E to Exit: _

CAUTION Never turn off the power during the system recovery because doing so may cause
serious damage to the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 10. The factory recovery will be complete in about 5 minutes. When the factory recovery is
complete, the message as shown below appears. Press , , and of the
keyboard at the same time to restart.
Remove the disk and Press CLT+ALT+DEL to restart your
system.

NOTE If the above message does not appear, the instrument is at fault; contact your local Agilent
customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor.

Step 11. After restart, the screen for initial registration appears. Execute initial registration. For
information on the execution procedure, refer to “Initial Registration of E5070B/E5071B”
on page 493.

Step 12. For the E5070B/E5071B equipped with the Option 016 touch screen, execute the
calibration of the touch screen. For information on the execution procedure, refer to
“Calibration of the Touch Screen” on page 496.

480 Appendix B
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Procedure to create the user backup image for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx,

MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and
below
This section describes how to create the user backup image. The C drive contents saved in
this creation are recalled when the user recovery function is executed.

NOTE This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is CP600 or higher.

NOTE You need the keyboard for this operation.

Step 1. Shut down the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 2. Connect the keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 3. Insert the disk for the system recovery into the floppy disk drive of the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 4. Press the standby switch of the E5070B/E5071B to turn it on.

Step 5. When the screen as shown in the figure below appears, press and hold of the
keyboard until this screen disappears.

B. System Recovery

NOTE After several seconds, the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any
key, so do not miss it.

If the above message does not appear, the instrument is at fault; contact your local Agilent
customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor.

Appendix B 481
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Step 6. The following screen appears. Check that Floppy is selected (highlighted) (if Floppy is not
selected, select it with of the keyboard), and press of the keyboard.

Step 7. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard. If you want to cancel the
create user backup image, press here.
Agilent Technologies System Utilities
Recovery & Backup Options (for the E5070/71B)

Choose One of the following:

_________________________________________________________________
1. Recover Factory Backup Image
2. Create User Backup Image
3. Recover User Backup Image
4. Exit
_________________________________________________________________
Enter a Choice: _

NOTE If the above message does not appear, the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is
at fault; contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or
distributor.

482 Appendix B
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Step 8. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard. If you want to cancel the
create user backup image, press here.
You chose to create a backup image file of your system.

The system will perform a quick integrity check of the file

structure on the C: Drive. It will then copy the C: partition to
an image file and store it on the System Recovery partition.

Press C to Continue or E to Exit: _

Step 9. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard to start the create user
backup image. If you want to cancel the create user backup image, press here.
CAUTION! Interrupting this process may leave the system in an
unstable state. Allow the software to complete the
backup and recovery process. This may take up to 20
minutes depending on the system configuration.

Press C to Continue or E to Exit: _

CAUTION Never turn off the power during the create user backup image because doing so may
cause serious damage to the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 10. The create user backup image will be complete in about 5 minutes. When the create user
backup image is complete, the message as shown below appears. Press , , and
of the keyboard at the same time to restart.
Remove the disk and Press CLT+ALT+DEL to restart your
system.

NOTE If the above message does not appear, the instrument is at fault; contact your local Agilent
customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor.

B. System Recovery

Appendix B 483
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Procedure to create the user backup image for E5070B : MY42300633,

and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above
This section describes how to create the user backup image. The C drive contents saved in
this creation are recalled when the user recovery function is executed.

NOTE This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is CP600 or higher.

NOTE You need the keyboard for this operation.

Step 1. Shut down the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 2. Connect the keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 3. Insert the disk for the system recovery into the floppy disk drive of the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 4. Press the standby switch of the E5070B/E5071B to turn it on.

Step 5. When the screen as shown in the figure below appears, press and hold of the keyboard
until this screen disappears.

NOTE After several seconds, the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any
key, so do not miss it.

If the above message does not appear, the instrument is at fault; contact your local Agilent
customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor.

484 Appendix B
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Step 6. The following screen appears. Select “+Removable Devices” with of the
keyboard, and press of the keyboard.

Step 7. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard. If you want to cancel the
create user backup image, press here.
Agilent Technologies System Utilities
Recovery & Backup Options (for the E5070/71B)

Choose One of the following:

_________________________________________________________________
1. Recover Factory Backup Image
2. Create User Backup Image

B. System Recovery
3. Recover User Backup Image
4. Exit
_________________________________________________________________
Enter a Choice: _

NOTE If the above message does not appear, the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is
at fault; contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or
distributor.

Appendix B 485
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Step 8. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard. If you want to cancel the
create user backup image, press here.
You chose to create a backup image file of your system.

The system will perform a quick integrity check of the file

structure on the C: Drive. It will then copy the C: partition to
an image file and store it on the System Recovery partition.

Press C to Continue or E to Exit: _

Step 9. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard to start the create user
backup image. If you want to cancel the create user backup image, press here.
CAUTION! Interrupting this process may leave the system in an
unstable state. Allow the software to complete the
backup and recovery process. This may take up to 20
minutes depending on the system configuration.

Press C to Continue or E to Exit: _

CAUTION Never turn off the power during the create user backup image because doing so may
cause serious damage to the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 10. The create user backup image will be complete in about 5 minutes. When the create user
backup image is complete, the message as shown below appears. Press , , and
of the keyboard at the same time to restart.
Remove the disk and Press CLT+ALT+DEL to restart your
system.

NOTE If the above message does not appear, the instrument is at fault; contact your local Agilent
customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor.

486 Appendix B
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Procedure to execute the user recovery function for E5070B :

JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx,
MY42301396 and below
Returns the contents of the C drive to a user-specified state. To use this function, you must
create the user backup image in advance. For more information, see the description
“Procedure to create the user backup image for E5070B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42300632 and
below, E5071B : JP1KKxxxxx, MY42301396 and below” on page 481.

NOTE This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is CP600 or higher.

NOTE You need the keyboard for this operation.

Step 1. Shut down the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 2. Connect the keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 3. Insert the disk for the system recovery into the floppy disk drive of the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 4. Press the standby switch of the E5070B/E5071B to turn it on.

Step 5. When the screen as shown in the figure below appears, press and hold of the
keyboard until this screen disappears.

B. System Recovery

NOTE After several seconds, the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any
key, so do not miss it.

If the above message does not appear, the instrument is at fault; contact your local Agilent
customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor.

Appendix B 487
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Step 6. The following screen appears. Check that Floppy is selected (highlighted) (if Floppy is not
selected, select it with of the keyboard), and press of the keyboard.

Step 7. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard. If you want to cancel the
user recovery, press here.
Agilent Technologies System Utilities
Recovery & Backup Options (for the E5070/71B)

Choose One of the following:

_________________________________________________________________
1. Recover Factory Backup Image
2. Create User Backup Image
3. Recover User Backup Image
4. Exit
_________________________________________________________________
Enter a Choice: _

NOTE If the above message does not appear, the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is
at fault; contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or
distributor.

488 Appendix B
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Step 8. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard. If you want to cancel the
user recovery, press here.
You chose to recover your own system backup image file.

WARNING: Press C to Continue only if you are sure that you want
to proceed. The C: partition will be completely overwritten with
no
chance of recovering any data. Use Option 3 to recover the system
from a serious malfunction caused by corrupted or inadvertently
deleted files on the system's primary C: partition.

Press C to Continue or E to Exit: _

Step 9. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard to start the user recovery.
If you want to cancel the user recovery, press here.
CAUTION! Interrupting this process may leave the system in an
unstable state. Allow the software to complete the
backup and recovery process. This may take up to 20
minutes depending on the system configuration.

Press C to Continue or E to Exit: _

CAUTION Never turn off the power during the system recovery because doing so may cause
serious damage to the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 10. The user recovery will be complete in about 5 minutes. When the user recovery is
complete, the message as shown below appears. Press , , and of the
keyboard at the same time to restart.
Remove the disk and Press CLT+ALT+DEL to restart your
system.

NOTE If the above message does not appear, the instrument is at fault; contact your local Agilent
customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor.

B. System Recovery

Appendix B 489
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Procedure to execute the user recovery function for E5070B :

MY42300633, and above, E5071B : MY42301397 and above
Returns the contents of the C drive to a user-specified state. To use this function, you must
create the user backup image in advance. For more information, see the description
“Procedure to create the user backup image for E5070B : MY42300633, and above,
E5071B : MY42301397 and above” on page 484.

NOTE This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is CP600 or higher.

NOTE You need the keyboard for this operation.

Step 1. Shut down the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 2. Connect the keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 3. Insert the disk for the system recovery into the floppy disk drive of the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 4. Press the standby switch of the E5070B/E5071B to turn it on.

Step 5. When the screen as shown in the figure below appears, press and hold of the keyboard
until this screen disappears.

NOTE After several seconds, the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any
key, so do not miss it.

If the above message does not appear, the instrument is at fault; contact your local Agilent
customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor.

490 Appendix B
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Step 6. The following screen appears. Select “+Removable Devices” with of the
keyboard, and press of the keyboard.

Step 7. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard. If you want to cancel the
user recovery, press here.
Agilent Technologies System Utilities
Recovery & Backup Options (for the E5070/71B)

Choose One of the following:

_________________________________________________________________

B. System Recovery
1. Recover Factory Backup Image
2. Create User Backup Image
3. Recover User Backup Image
4. Exit
_________________________________________________________________
Enter a Choice: _

NOTE If the above message does not appear, the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is
at fault; contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or
distributor.

Appendix B 491
 System Recovery
System Recovery

Step 8. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard. If you want to cancel the
user recovery, press here.
You chose to recover your own system backup image file.

WARNING: Press C to Continue only if you are sure that you want
to proceed. The C: partition will be completely overwritten with no
chance of recovering any data. Use Option 3 to recover the system
from a serious malfunction caused by corrupted or inadvertently
deleted files on the system's primary C: partition.

Press C to Continue or E to Exit: _

Step 9. The message as shown below appears. Press of the keyboard to start the user recovery.
If you want to cancel the user recovery, press here.
CAUTION! Interrupting this process may leave the system in an
unstable state. Allow the software to complete the
backup and recovery process. This may take up to 20
minutes depending on the system configuration.

Press C to Continue or E to Exit: _

CAUTION Never turn off the power during the system recovery because doing so may cause
serious damage to the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 10. The user recovery will be complete in about 5 minutes. When the user recovery is
complete, the message as shown below appears. Press , , and of the
keyboard at the same time to restart.
Remove the disk and Press CLT+ALT+DEL to restart your
system.

NOTE If the above message does not appear, the instrument is at fault; contact your local Agilent
customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor.

492 Appendix B
 System Recovery
Initial Registration of E5070B/E5071B

Initial Registration of E5070B/E5071B

When you start up the E5070B/E5071B for the first time or after executing system
recovery, you need to perform the initial registration of the Windows 2000 operating
system of the E5070B/E5071B.

NOTE You cannot use the front panel keys during the initial registration of the E5070B/E5071B
therefore connect the mouse and the keyboard before turning on the power.

NOTE If you perform the following procedure incorrectly, a message asking you whether to
return to the previous registration screen and perform the registration appears. In this case,
follow the instruction to return to the previous registration screen.

Step 1. Turns on the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 2. The Windows 2000 Professional Setup wizard appears. Click the Next > button (Figure
B-1).

Figure B-1 Windows 2000 Professional Setup wizard

B. System Recovery

Appendix B 493
 System Recovery
Initial Registration of E5070B/E5071B

Step 3. In the Windows 2000 Professional Setup dialog box, select the I accept this agreement
box and click the Next >button (Figure B-2). Then, the Windows 2000 operating system is
restarted automatically.

Figure B-2 Windows 2000 Professional Setup dialog box

Step 4. The Network Identification wizard appears. Click the Next > button (Figure B-3).

Figure B-3 Network Identification wizard

494 Appendix B
 System Recovery
Initial Registration of E5070B/E5071B

Step 5. In the Network Identification Wizard dialog box (1/2), select the Windows always
assumes the following user has logged on to this computer box and check that agena
is in the User Name box. If not, type in agena. Finally, click the Next> button (Figure
B-4).

Figure B-4 Network Identification Wizard dialog box (1/2)

Step 6. In the Network Identification Wizard dialog box (2/2), click the Finish button to finish the
initial registration of the E5070B/E5071B (Figure B-4). Then, the measurement display of
theE5070B/E5071B appears.

Figure B-5 Network Identification Wizard dialog box (2/2)

B. System Recovery

Appendix B 495
 System Recovery
Calibration of the Touch Screen

Calibration of the Touch Screen

When you have executed system recovery on the E5070B/E5071B equipped with an
Option 016 touch screen, you have to calibrate the touch screen. Follow the procedure
described below to calibrate the touch screen.

Step 1. Press .

Step 2. Press Service Menu.

Step 3. Press Test Menu.

Step 4. Press Adjust Touch Screen.

The touch screen calibration screen (Figure 7-1) appears.

Figure 7-1 Touch Panel Calibration Screen

Step 5. Touch the x mark on the upper left with your finger. The mark x appears also on the lower
left, upper right, and lower right. Touch the x marks in that order with your finger.

Touching the four locations described above with your finger automatically concludes the
touch screen calibration.

NOTE With no operation on the touch screen calibration screen for a preset time, it automatically
closes and the previous measurement screen reappears.

496 Appendix B
C Firmware Update

This appendix describes how to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware. When you want to
C. Firmware Update

update the E5070B/E5071B firmware, refer to this appendix.

497
 Firmware Update
Firmware Update for revision A.06.51 or lower

Firmware Update for revision A.06.51 or lower

Required Equipment
• E5070B or E5071B (with keyboard and mouse).
• Several blank floppy disks (DOS format).

How to make E5070B/E5071B Firmware Installation Disk

The following is the procedure to make the E5070B/E5071B Firmware Installation Disk.

Step 1. Copy the following files from Agilent Technologies web site to the several floppy disks
using your computer’s FDD.

NOTE You need the same number of floppy disks as that of cab files. Where, “n” indicates the
maximum number of floppy disks.

• disk1(1 of n)-- e5070.msi, e507001.cab

• disk2(2 of n)-- e507002.cab

• disk3(3 of n)-- e507003.cab

• :

• diskn(n of n)-- e5070xx.cab

Step 2. Assign the Label name as follows using the properties of your computer’s Windows
Explorer as shown in Figure C-1.

• DISK_1 (for disk1)

• DISK_2 (for disk2)

• DISK_3 (for disk3)

• :

• DISK_n (for diskn)

Figure C-1 Windows Explorer (example)

498 Appendix C
 Firmware Update
Firmware Update for revision A.06.51 or lower

1. Insert the disk1 into the FDD of your computer.

2. On the Windows Explorer, click 3 1/2 Floppy [A:] and confirm the files.

3. Right click on 3 1/2 Floppy [A:], then click Properties. The Properties dialog box
appears.

4. Enter the Label name in the Label box of properties dialog box (General) for the disk1
as shown in Figure C-2, and press the OK button.

Figure C-2 Properties Dialog Box (example)

5. Perform 1 through n for each disk.

NOTE If the label name is not assigned, the firmware update for the E5070B/E5071B will not be
done correctly.

How to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware

It is possible to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware, but not the following software by
this procedure.

• OS (Operating System)
• VBA (Visual Basic for Application)
• Calibration Constant Data
The following is the procedure to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware.

Step 1. Prepare the E5070B/E5071B firmware installation disks.

Step 2. Connect the mouse and the keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B rear panel. Then turn the
E5070B/E5071B on.
C. Firmware Update

Step 3. Insert the E5070B/E5071B firmware installation disk1 into the FDD of the
E5070B/E5071B.

Step 4. Update the E5070B/E5071B firmware.

Appendix C 499
 Firmware Update
Firmware Update for revision A.06.51 or lower

1. Press key.

2. Press Service Menu - Update Firmware on the menu bar, and the Password dialog box
will appear.

NOTE If you do not see “Update Firmware” soft key, execute log-off, and re-login as “agena”.

3. Enter the password e507xa into the Password box, then click OK.

4. Open dialog box apperas. Confirm that E5070.msi is displayed at the File name
column. Press the Open button, and the Windows instoller will appear.

5. After the disk 1 installation is finished, insert the firmware installation disk 2 (2 of n)
into the FDD of the E5070B/E5071B, then click OK.

6. Repeat 5 for the number of floppy disks.

Step 5. After the disk n installation is finished, the instrument will be restarted and the
measurement view will appear.

Step 6. Press -Firmware Revision. Confirm the firmware revision you have just installed.

500 Appendix C
 Firmware Update
Firmware Update for revision A.08.01 and A.08.11

Firmware Update for revision A.08.01 and A.08.11

Required Equipment
• E5070B or E5071B (with keyboard and mouse).
• Several blank floppy disks (DOS format).

How to make E5070B/E5071B Firmware Installation Disk

The following is the procedure to make the E5070B/E5071B Firmware Installation Disk.

Step 1. Copy the following files from Agilent Technologies web site to the several floppy disks
using your computer’s FDD.

NOTE You need the same number of floppy disks as that of cab files. Where, “n” indicates the
maximum number of floppy disks.

NOTE Copy the msi file to each of the floppy disks.

• disk1(1 of n)-- e5070.msi, e507001.cab

• disk2(2 of n)-- e5070.msi, e507002.cab

• :

• diskn(n of n)-- e5070.msi, e5070xx.cab

How to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware

It is possible to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware, but not the following software by
this procedure.

• OS (Operating System)
• VBA (Visual Basic for Application)
• Calibration Constant Data
The following is the procedure to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware.

Step 1. Prepare the E5070B/E5071B firmware installation disks.

Step 2. Connect the mouse and the keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B rear panel. Then turn the
E5070B/E5071B on.

Step 3. Insert the E5070B/E5071B firmware installation disk1 into the FDD of the
E5070B/E5071B.
C. Firmware Update

Step 4. Update the E5070B/E5071B firmware.

1. Press key.

2. Press Service Menu - Update Firmware on the menu bar, and the Password dialog box

Appendix C 501
 Firmware Update
Firmware Update for revision A.08.01 and A.08.11

will appear.

NOTE If you do not see “Update Firmware” soft key, execute log-off, and re-login as “agena”.

3. Enter the password e507xa into the Password box, then click OK.

4. Open dialog box apperas. Confirm that E5070.msi is displayed at the File name
column. Press the Open button, and the Windows instoller will appear.

5. After the disk 1 installation is finished, insert the firmware installation disk 2 (2 of n)
into the FDD of the E5070B/E5071B, then click OK.

6. Repeat 5 for the number of floppy disks.

Step 5. After the disk n installation is fininshed, the instrument will be restarted and the
measurement view will appear.

Step 6. Press -Firmware Revision. Confirm the firmware revision you have just installed.

502 Appendix C
 Firmware Update
Firmware Update for revision A.09.10 or later

Firmware Update for revision A.09.10 or later

Required Equipment
• E5070B or E5071B (with keyboard and mouse).
• USB mass storage device.

Location of the latest E5070B/71B Firmware

Step 1. The latest firmware can be downloaded from the following site.

• http:\\www.agilent.com/find/ena_support

How to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware

It is possible to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware, but not the following software by
this procedure.

• OS (Operating System)
• VBA (Visual Basic for Application)
• Calibration Constant Data
The following is the procedure to update the E5070B/E5071B firmware.

NOTE User should log in as “agena“, and user should have administrator authority when
performing firmware update.

Step 1. Download the latest firmware from the donload site. It is prepared as execusion file
(E507071B_xx.yy.exe).

Step 2. Run the “E507071B_xx.yy.exe” to extract the E5070.msi. Then, save the E5070.msi to
USB mass storage device using PC.

NOTE For E5070B/71B firmware revision 9.10 or later, there is only 1 .msi file and no .cab files.

Step 3. Connect the mouse and the keyboard to the E5070B/E5071B rear panel. Then turn the
E5070B/E5071B on.

Step 4. Connect the USB mass storage device into the front USB port of the E5070B/71B.

Step 5. Copy e5070.msi from the USB mass storage device to the directory under D:\ drive.

NOTE Do not use “space“ for directory name.

C. Firmware Update

Step 6. Update the E5070B/E5071B firmware.

1. Press key.

2. Press Service Menu - Update Firmware on the menu bar, and the Password dialog box
will appear.

Appendix C 503
 Firmware Update
Firmware Update for revision A.09.10 or later

Figure C-3 Service Menu soft key

Figure C-4 Update Firmware soft key

NOTE If you do not see “Update Firmware” soft key, execute log-off, and re-login as “agena”.

3. When prompted for a password, enter the password e507xa into the Password box,
then click OK.

Figure C-5 Password Box

504 Appendix C
 Firmware Update
Firmware Update for revision A.09.10 or later

4. Press Cancel if you are asked to insert a disk into drive A and select the D:\ drive from
Look in.

5. Confirm that E5070.msi is displayed at the File name column. Select it, then press the
Open button and the Windows installer will appear.

Step 7. After installation is fininshed, the instrument will be restarted and the measurement view
will appear.

Step 8. Press -Firmware Revision. Confirm the firmware revision you have just installed.

Figure C-6 Firmware Revision soft key

Step 9. To unplug USB mass storage device, press Ctrl & ESC on the keyboard. The Windows
toolbar should appear. There should be the “Unplug/Eject Hardware“ (a green arrow) icon
in the system tray.

Figure C-7 Windows toolbar

Step 10. Left click on the icon to stop USB mass storage device, or right click on the icon then
“Unplug or eject “ to show “Unplug or Eject Hardware“ screen. C. Firmware Update

Appendix C 505
 Firmware Update
Firmware Update for revision A.09.10 or later

Figure C-8 Unplug or eject hardware

506 Appendix C
 D. Computer Virus Check

D Computer Virus Check

This appendix describes an example of how to check the system of E5070B/E5071B for
computer viruses using computer viruses check software.

507
 Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check

Computer Virus Check

The E5070B/E5071B should be protected against computer viruses. If you need to check
the system of E5070B/E5071B for computer viruses, it’s recommended that an external PC
installed anti-virus software is used to access E5070B/E5071B’s built-in drive (C and D)
via LAN and perform virus scan.
The E5070B/E5071B has no virus function nor anti-virus software installed. The Windows
operating system installed in this instrument is customized for more effective operation.
Installing Windows-based software (including anti-virus software) for ordinary PCs into
this instrument may affect the behavior of the instrument during measurement.

Required equipment
• E5070B or E5071B (with keyboard and mouse).
• An external PC installed anti-virus software such as “Norton AntiVirus®”.
• A crossed LAN cable (It enables the peer-to-peer communication between the
E5070B/E5071B and the PC.)

How to check the drive C and D of E5070B/E5071B

The following is an example procedure to check the drive C and D of E5070B/E5071B
using the external PC.

Step 1. Set up the E5070B/E5071B for file sharing.

1. Connect the E5070B/E5071B to the PC using the crossed LAN cable.

2. Press key.

3. Press Misc Setup - Network Setup - Network Configuration. The Network and
Dial-up Connections window will appear.

Figure D-1 Network and Dial-up Connections window

4. Double-click the Local Area Connection icon (1 in Figure D-1) in the Network and
dial-up connections window to enable the network connection function. The Local
Area Connection Status dialog box appears. Click the Properties button.

508 Appendix D
 D. Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check

Figure D-2 Local Area Connection Status dialog box

5. The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box (Figure D-3) appears. Select
(highlight) Internet protocol (TCP/IP) (1 in Figure D-3) and then click the Properties
button (2 in Figure D-3).

Figure D-3 Local Area Connection Properties dialog box

6. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box (Figure D-4 ) appears. If Obtain
an IP address automatically has been selected, you select Use the following IP
address (1 in Figure D-4) and then enter the IP address 192.168.0.1 (2 in Figure D-4)
and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 (3 in Figure D-4).

If a specific IP address and subnet mask have been assigned, press the OK button.

Appendix D 509
 Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check

Figure D-4 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box

7. In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog vbox, click the OK button (6 in
Figure D-4 ).

8. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click the OK button (3 in Figure
D-3).

9. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, click the Close button (3 in Figure
D-2).

10. Click the x button (2 in Figure D-1) in the upper right of the Network and Dial-up
Connection window.

Step 2. Confirm the computer name of the E5070B/E5071B.

1. Press key.

2. Press Misc Setup - Network Setup - Network Identification.

3. The System Properties dialog box as shown in Figure D-5 will appear. Click the
Properties button (1 in Figure D-5).

510 Appendix D
 D. Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check

Figure D-5 System Properties dialog box

4. The Identification Change dialog box (Figure D-6) appears. Confirm the computer
name in the Computer Name box (1 in Figure D-6).

Figure D-6 Identification Change dialog box

5. Turn the E5070B/E5071B power off and then turn it on.

Step 3. Set for sharing the hard disk (C or D drive) in the E5070B/E5071B.

1. Press ., and then press Explore ....

2. The Windows Explorer opens. Right click on (C:) or USER (D:) and then click
Properties in the File menu.

3. The (C:) or USERS(D:) Properties dialog box (Figure D-7) appears. Select the Sharing
tab.

Appendix D 511
 Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check

Figure D-7 USERS(D:) Properties dialog box (General tab)

4. Select the Share this folder if (C:) is selected. Click the New Share button (1 in Figure
D-8).

Figure D-8 USERS(D:) Properties dialog box (Sharing tab)

5. The New Share dialog box (Figure D-9) appears. Enter the share name (name used
when accessed from the external PC) in the Share Name box (1 in Figure D-9) and
click the OK button (2 in Figure D-9).

512 Appendix D
 D. Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check

Figure D-9 New Share dialog box

6. In the (C:) or USERS(D:) Properties dialog box, click the OK button (2 in Figure D-8).

Step 4. Set up the external PC’s IP address and subnet mask.

1. Double-click “My Computer” icon on Windows desktop of the external PC. And
double-click Control Panel. The Control Panel window will appear.

2. In the Control Panel window, double-click Network. The Network dialog box shown in
fig will appear. In the Configuration tab, select TCP/IP (display it in revers video) and
press the Properties button.

3. The dialog box appears. If Specify an IP address has been selected, record the IP
address and sbnet mask.

4. If the Obtain an IP address automatically has been selected, select the Speccify an IP
address. Enter the IP address xxx.xxx.xxx.y and subnet mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx as
shown in Figure D-10. The letters x represent the IP address and subnet mask of the
E5070B/E5071B. The letter y is different from the IP address of the E5070B/E5071B.
Press the OK button.

Figure D-10 Network Dialog Box (“IP Address” Tab)

Step 5. Connect the drive of E5070B/E5071B to the PC, and check the drive using anti-virus
software.

1. Click Programs -Window Explorer on the Start Menu to start up the PC’s Explorer.

Appendix D 513
 Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check

Click Tools - Map Network Drive on the menu of the Explorer.

2. Select a suitable drive name, enter the network path as shown in Figure D-11, and then
press the OK button. For example, the network path is \\C_NAME\S_NAME.

Figure D-11 Map Network Drive Dialog Box

C_NAME in the network path is the computer name of the E5070B/E5071B you
confirmed on 4 of Step2.

S_NAME in the share name of the C or D drive of the E5070B/E5071B you enterd on 5
of Step 3.

3. The dialog box to enter the user name and the password appears. Enter the user name
agena and then click the OK button.

4. The network path will appear on the PC’s Explorer. Confirm that the network path you
enter is connected to the PC.

5. Execute the anti-virus software on the PC, and the menu for the anti-virus software will
appear. Check the drive you entered on 2 of Step 5. For the operation of anti-virus
software, refer to its manual.

6. Check if the drives C and D are infected.

Step 6. Disconnect the drives of E5070B/E5071B from the PC.

1. Click Programs -Window Explorer on the Start Menu to start up the PC’s Explorer.
Click Tools - Disconnect Network Drive on the menu of the Explorer. Disconnect
Network dialog box will appear.

2. Select Network Drive you checked, and press the OK button. The drive will disappear
from the Explorer.

NOTE If no drive has been infected, proceed the next step.

If the drive C or D has been infected, replace the A27 mass storage of the E5070B/E5071B.

Step 7. Change the IP address and subnet mask of the E5070B/E5071B if you select Use the
following IP address and entered the IP address and subnet mask on the 6 of Step 1.

1. Press key.

2. Press Misc Setup - Network Setup - Network Configuration.

3. Double-click the Local Area Connection icon (1 in Figure D-1) in the Network and
Dial-up Connections window. The Local Area Connection Status dialog box (Figure
D-2) appears. Click the Properties button (2 in Figure D-2).

4. The dialog box (Figure D-12) appears. Select Obtain an IP address automatically and

514 Appendix D
 D. Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check

press the OK button.

Figure D-12 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box

5. In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog vbox, click the OK button (6 in
Figure D-4 ).

6. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, click the OK button (3 in Figure
D-3).

7. The Local Network dialog box will appear, press the Yes button to restart the
instrument.

Step 8. Change the IP address and subnet mask of the external PC.

1. Double-click “My Computer” icon on Windows desktop of the external PC. And
double-click Control Panel. The Control Panel window will appear.

2. In the Control Panel window, double-click Network. The Network dialog box appears.
In the Configuration tab, select TCP/IP (display it in revers video) and press the
Properties button.

3. The dialog box appears. If Specify an IP address has been selected on Step 4, enter
the IP address and sbnet mask you recorded on 3 of Step 4.

4. If the Obtain an IP address automatically has been selected on Step 4, select the
Obtain an IP address automatically.

5. Press the OK button.

Step 9. Disable the C drive of the E5070B/E5071B when you checked the C drive.

1. Press ., and then press Explore ....

2. The Windows Explorer opens. Select (highlight) (C:) and then click Properties in the
File menu.

3. The (C:) Properties dialog box (Figure D-7) appears. Select the Sharing tab.

Appendix D 515
 Computer Virus Check
Computer Virus Check

4. Select the Do not share this folder, and then OK button.

Figure D-13 (C:) Properties dialog box (Sharing tab)

5. Turn the E5070B/E5071B power off.

516 Appendix D
 E. Power Requirement

E Power Requirement

517
 Power Requirement
Preparation for Power Supply

Preparation for Power Supply

Before turning on power to the equipment, be sure to verify the following:

Power Requirements
The E5070B/E5071B requires the following power source:

Requirements

Voltage 90 to 132 VAC or 198 to 264 VAC *1

Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

Maximum power consumption 350 VA

*1. Switched automatically by the E5070B/E5071B in conformity to the voltage.

Power Cable
In accordance with international safety standards, this instrument is equipped with a
three-wire power cable. When connected to an appropriate ac power outlet, this cable
grounds the instrument frame. The type of power cable shipped with each instrument
depends on country of destination. Refer to Figure E-1 for the part numbers of the power
cables available.

WARNING For protection from electrical shock, the power cable ground must not be defeated.
The power plug must be plugged into an outlet that provides a protective earth
ground connection.

518 Appendix E
 Power Requirement
Preparation for Power Supply

Figure E-1 Power cable options

E. Power Requirement

Appendix E 519
 Power Requirement
Turning the Power ON and OFF

Turning the Power ON and OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the power ON or OFF.

Turning the power ON

Step 1. If the standby switch ( ) in the lower-left part of the front panel is in the pressed down

( ) position, press the switch to the popped up position ( ).

Step 2. Press the standby switch to the pressed down position ( ).

This operation turns ON the power, and the E5070B/E5071B starts the self-test.

Step 3. Confirm that the self-test indicates normal operation.

Normal operation is confirmed by the self-test if no error message appears.

Turning the power OFF

Step 1. Use either of the following methods to turn OFF the E5070B/E5071B.

• Press the standby switch ( ) in the lower-left part of the front panel (now in the

pressed down ( ) position) to the popped up ( ) position.

• Send the shutdown command from an external controller.

These operations will start the E5070B/E5071B shutdown process (required software and
hardware processes for turning the power off), and the power will turn OFF after a few
seconds.

NOTE Under normal circumstances, always press the standby switch ( ), or send the shutdown
command from the external controller, to actuate the E5070B/E5071B shutdown process.
Never cut off the power supply directly by disconnecting the power cable plug from
the rear panel of the unit.

If the power supply is cut off directly by disconnecting the power cable plug or by
disconnecting the power supply to the AC outlet, the shutdown process will not be carried
out, and there is a risk of damage to the software or hardware of the E5070B/E5071B.

520 Appendix E
 F. Messages

F Messages

The E5070B/5071B can display error messages as well as messages that indicate the
internal operating status of the equipment. This appendix explains what these messages
mean by listing them in alphabetical order.
Messages showing the status of the E5070B/5071B are displayed in the lower-left area of
the E5070B/5071B LCD screen. These messages include error messages that occur during

521
Messages

the execution of GPIB commands and others that indicate the internal status of the
equipment.
Error messages are indicated following the character string “[Err]” and can be read out by a
GPIB command. Other kinds of messages are indicated without the “[Err]” character string
and cannot be read out by a GPIB command. This section explains the meaning of each
message and how to resolve the problem it indicates.

522 Appendix F
 Messages
Additional standard needed

Error Messages
An error message is displayed against a red background in the instrument message/warning
area in the lower left part of the screen. Pushing a front panel key or executing :DISP:CCL
command clears the error message. Errors caused by the operation of a front panel key
simply appear on the display. They are not stored in the error queue with some exceptions.
An error with a positive error number is one uniquely defined for this instrument. On the
other hand, an error with a negative error number is basically one defined for common
GPIB devices in IEEE488.2

A
20 Additional standard needed
The GPIB command that turns ON the calibration function has been sent before all of the
data measurements needed to calculate the calibration factor have been completed. In
1-port calibration, for example, when measurements completed for OPEN and SHORT
standards but not yet for LOAD standard,
You have tried to turn on the calibration function by calculating 1-port calibration
coefficient using SENS:CORR:COLL:SAVE or SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:SAVE.Be
sure to measure all necessary calibration data before sending commands.This error is not

F. Messages
generated by front key operations.

B
-168 Block data not allowed
An block-data element has been received at a position where this instrument does not
accept one.

C
240 Calibration data lost
This error occurs when a file containing the system calibration data is not found or in a
damaged state at time of the startup of this instrument, indicating a failure of this
instrument. Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you
bought the instrument.
22 Calibration method not selected
This error occurs when the command for validating the calibration data,
SENS:CORR:COLL:SAVE or SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:SAVE is executed before the
command for selecting a calibration type, SENS:CORR:COLL:METH:xxxx or
SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:METH:xxxx, is executed.This error is not generated by front
key operations.
-148 Character data not allowed
A character data element (not violating the standard) has been received at a position where
this instrument does not accept one. Double quotes (“) are omitted where it is necessary to
place a parameter in double quotes (“), for example.

Appendix F 523
 Messages
Command error

-100 Command error

A comprehensive syntax error has occurred showing that this instrument cannot detect a
more detailed error. This code simply shows that a command error defined in 11.5.1.1.4,
IEEE488.2 has occurred.
60 Continuous switching may damage source attenuator
This error occurs when different source attenuator (power range) settings are present
during measurement on two or more channels. Performing such measurement for a long
time is not recommended because of the possibility of the source attenuator being
damaged. The measurement value is normal. This error occurs only on models with the
extended power output (Option 214, 314, and 414). In firmware 3.60 and later, Auto Power
Range set function may cause this error according to a channel setting. Refer to “Setting
power level with Auto Power Range set function” as described in E5070B/5071B User’s
Guide.

D
-222 Data out of range
A data element (not violating the standard) outside the range defined by this instrument has
been received. This error occurs when an integer-based command for which the parameter
can be rounded exceeds the range of -65536 to +65536 or when a real-number-based
command for which the parameter can be rounded exceeds the range of -9.9e37 to +9.9e37,
for example.
This error occurs also when a numeric value other than a specified one is entered into a
command in which the “port number” and “CalKit number” are specified as parameters
and hence the parameters are not rounded. Such commands are, for example,
CALC:FSIM:BAL:TOP:BBAL:PPOR, SENS:CORR:COLL:ACQ:OPEN,
SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:SOLT3, SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:ORD:LOAD, etc.
-104 Data type error
The parser has recognized a data element that must not exist. Block data has been sent
instead of numeric value data or character string data that had been expected, for example.

E
32 ECal module not in appropriate RF path
This error occurs when an ECal command, SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:SOLTn or
SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:ECAL:xxxx, is executed with the port on the ECal module not
connected correctly to the instrument.
-200 Execution error
An error associated with execution has been generated for which this instrument cannot
specify the error message. This code shows that an error associated with execution defined
in 11.5.1.1.5, IEEE488.2 has occurred. This error occurs also when a calibration
measurement is aborted.
-123 Exponent too large
The absolute value of the exponent exceeds 32,000 (see 7.7.2.4.1, IEEE488.2).

524 Appendix F
 Messages
Expression data not allowed

-178 Expression data not allowed

An expression-data element has been received at a position where this instrument does not
accept one.
-170 Expression error
When the expression data is put to syntactic analysis, an error not corresponding to one of
Error Numbers -171 through -179 occurs.

F
31 Failed to configure ECal module
This error occurs when the control of the ECal module fails at time of executing an ECal
command, SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:SOLTn or SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:ECAL
:xxxx. The failure results from the failure to connect the ECal module to the USB port,
failure of the ECal module, etc.
76 Failed to control signal generator
This error occurs when the external signal source fails to respond during measurement,
though it is enabled (SENS:OFFS:LOC:STAT ON and SENS:OFFS:LOC:CONT ON).
Ensure the connection of the external signal source.
102 Failed to copy file

F. Messages
This error occurs when copying a file (MMEM:COPY command) fails.
104 Failed to create directory
This error occurs when creating a directory (MMEM:MDIR command) fails.
103 Failed to delete file
This error occurs when deleting a file (MMEM:DEL command) fails.
100 Failed to read file
This error occurs when a 2-port touchstone file
(CALC:FSIM:SEND:PMC:PORT:USER:FIL command), the formatted data array
(MMEM:LOAD:FDAT command) and limit table (MMEM:STOR:LIM command) for the
active trace on the active channel, segment sweep table (MMEM:LOAD:SEGM
command) for the active channel, a VBA project file (MMEM:LOAD:PROG command),
etc. cannot be read normally.
101 Failed to write file
This error occurs when the formatted data array (MMEM:STOR:FDATcommand) and
limit table (MMEM:STOR:LIM command) for the active trace on the active channel,
segment sweep table (MMEM:STOR:SEGM command) for the active channel, display
image (MMEM:STOR:IMAG command) for the LCD screen, a VBA project file
(MMEM:STOR:PROG command), etc. cannot be written normally.
-257 File name error
A file name error. This message appears when an error exists in the file name and hence a
command is not executed correctly. This error occurs when you try to copy to an unsuitable
file name, for example.

Appendix F 525
 Messages
File name not found

-256 File name not found

The file name specified is not found and hence the command is not executed correctly.
This error occurs when you try to read a file that does not exist in a disk or a disk is not
correctly inserted into the drive to read or write a file, for example.
107 File transfer failed
This error occurs when writing data into or reading data from a file (MMEM:TRAN
command) fails.
56 Fixture Simulator not allowed
This error occurs when the fixture simulator is executed (CALC:FSIM:STAT ON) under
the condition of the frequency offset is enabled (SENS:OFFS ON).
The fixture simulator is allowed to use when the frequency offset is not enabled.
24 Frequency offset enabled
This error occurs when the normal calibration (SENS:CORR:COLL:OPEN etc.) is
performed under the condition of the frequency offset is enabled (SENS:OFFS ON).
25 Frequency offset not enabled
This error occurs when the scalar-mixer calibration (SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:OPEN
etc.) is performed under the condition of the frequency offset is not enabled (SENS:OFFS
OFF).
62 Frequency out of range
This error occurs when the setting of frequency exceeds output frequency range under the
condition of the frequency offset is enabled (SENS:OFFS ON).

G
-105 GET not allowed
A group execution trigger (GET) has been received in the program message (see 7.7,
IEEE488.2).

H
-114 Header suffix out of range
The unit of the header is outside the range. The header is invalid in the unit for numeric
parameters following a SCPI command.

I
-224 Illegal parameter value
The parameter value is not suitable. This error occurs when the CALC:PAR:DEF
command is used to specify an S-parameter that does not exist in the model (S44 in the
case of a 2-port model), for example.
-282 Illegal program name
This error occurs when a nonexistent VBA program name is specified by the
PROG:SEL:NAME command.

526 Appendix F
 Messages
Init ignored

-213 Init ignored

Because another measurement is in progress, the request for initiating a measurement
(“INIT” command) is ignored.
35 Insufficient ECal module memory
This error occurs when the embedded memory is insufficient to save the user property in
ECal module during the user definition ECal processing.
-161 Invalid block data
Block data has been expected, but the block data that appears is invalid for some reason
(see 7.7.6.2, IEEE488.2). The END message is received before the length of block data has
been filled, for example.
28 Invalid calibration method
If the type of calibration is not specified or not correct when partial overwrite is executed
with the GPIB command, this error occurs. This error does not occur for operation with
front keys.
-101 Invalid character
An invalid character exists in the program message character string.
-141 Invalid character data
An invalid character is found in the character data element, or the parameter received is

F. Messages
not valid.
-121 Invalid character in number
A character that is invalid for the data type subject to syntactic analysis has been received.
For example, a letter is found in a decimal numeric value or a numeric character “9” in
octal data.
500 Invalid equation expression
This error occurs when the invalid equation is specified in the equation of the equation
editor.
501 Invalid equation label
This error occurs when the invalid equation label is specified in the equation of the
equation editor.
A space is not available for the equation label.
-171 Invalid expression
The expression-data element is invalid (see 7.7.7.2, IEEE488.2). Parentheses are not
paired, or illegal characters are used, for example.
-103 Invalid separator
The parser (a syntactic analysis program) had been expecting a delimiter, but a character
that is not a delimiter has been sent.
-151 Invalid string data
Character string data has been expected, but the character string data that appears is invalid
for some reason (see 7.7.5.2, IEEE488.2). The END message is received before the ending
quotation mark character appears, for example.

Appendix F 527
 Messages
Invalid suffix

-131 Invalid suffix

The suffix does not comply with the syntax defined in 7.7.3.2, IEEE488.2. Or it does not
suit E5070B/5071B.

L
53 Log sweep requires 2 octave minimum span
The span of sweep range is not satisfied the requirement for logarithmic sweep. The sweep
type is automatically changed to linear sweep when this error occurs.
For example, this error occurs when, with the start and stop frequency are set 1 MHz and 2
MHz respectively, the sweep type is changed to logarithmic sweep.
Set the stop frequency to more than four times as many as the start frequency. And then
select logarithmic sweep.

M
-109 Missing parameter
The number of parameters is less than that required for the command, or the parameter has
not been entered. For example, the command SENS{1-6}:SWE:POIN requires one more
parameter.
Therefore, when a message “SENS1:SWE:POIN” is sent to a correct program message
“SENS1:SWE:POIN 201” this instrument receives the former message as an invalid one
because all parameters have not been entered. Enter command parameters correctly.

N
70 No GPIB system controller
The GPIB system controller is not set properly.
This error occurs when USB/GPIB interface is not connected or the interface setting is
improper, during the measurement for power calibration data or for that in scalar-mixer
calibration.
It also occurs when USB/GPIB interface is not connected or the interface setting is
improper, though the control of the external signal source is enabled.
Ensure the connection of USB/GPIB interface and its setting.
52 No valid memory trace
This error occurs when you have executed either DISP:WIND:TRAC:MEM ON command
to display memory trace, or any other command to enable data caqlculation using memory
trace (CALC:MATH:FUNC command with other than NORM is specified), though no
valid data exists in memory trace.This error is not generated by front key operations.
-120 Numeric data error
An error resulting from the numeric value data (including numeric value data having no
decimal point representation) has occurred. A numeric value error other than Errors -121
through -129 has occurred.
-128 Numeric data not allowed

528 Appendix F
 Messages
Option not installed

An numeric-value-data element (not violating the standard) has been received at a position
where this instrument does not accept one.

O
200 Option not installed
The command received has been ignored because of the mismatch between the contents of
an option for this instrument and the command.
For example, this error occurs when the source attenuator (power range) is set at a value
other than zero (SOUR:POW:ATT command) in a model not having the extended power
output option.
It also occurs when you try to enable the time domain function in a model not having the
time domain option.This holds true for the frequency offset option.
This error is not generated by front key operations.
-225 Out of memory
Insufficient memory is available in this instrument to perform the required operation.

P
-220 Parameter error

F. Messages
When a parameter-related error other than Errors -221 through -229 occurs, that error is
displayed.
-108 Parameter not allowed
The number of parameters exceeds that required for the command.
For instance, when a program message “:SENS1:SWE:TYPE LIN, SEGM” is sent instead
of a correct program message with a command “:SENS1:SWE:TYPE LIN” which requires
a parameter, the instrument receives the message as the number of parameters is invalid.
See the command reference to confirm the required number of parameters.
41 Peak not found
This error occurs when, after specifying a peak and executing the
CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC and CALC:FUNC:EXEC commands, the specified peak is
not found in the marker search analysis.
220 Phase lock loop unlocked
This error occurs when the PLL circuit of this instrument becomes unlocked while the
measurement is in progress. The measurement value is not correct. This error may occur
when an external reference out of specification is connected to this instrument. Should an
error occur with an external reference not connected, this instrument is faulty. Contact an
Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument.
221 Port 1 receiver overload
The input to Test Port 1 exceeds the maximum input level. The measurement value is not
correct. When a DUT is an amplifier or the like, this error may occur, damaging the
receiver in the worst case. Should this error occur with a passive part used as the DUT or
with nothing connected to the test port, this instrument is faulty. Contact an Agilent
Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument.

Appendix F 529
 Messages
Port 2 receiver overload

If this error occurs, the stimulus signal output is automatically turned to off.
222 Port 2 receiver overload
The input to Test Port 2 exceeds the maximum input level. The measurement value is not
correct. When a DUT is an amplifier or the like, this error may occur, damaging the
receiver in the worst case. Should this error occur with a passive part used as the DUT or
with nothing connected to the test port, this instrument is faulty. Contact an Agilent
Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument.
If this error occurs, the stimulus signal output is automatically turned to off.
223 Port 3 receiver overload (for Options 313, 314, 413, and 414 only)
The input to Test Port 3 exceeds the maximum input level. The measurement value is not
correct. When a DUT is an amplifier or the like, this error may occur, damaging the
receiver in the worst case. Should this error occur with a passive part used as the DUT or
with nothing connected to the test port, this instrument is faulty. Contact an Agilent
Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument.
If this error occurs, the stimulus signal output is automatically turned to off.
224 Port 4 receiver overload (For Options 413 and 414 only)
The input to Test Port 4 exceeds the maximum input level. The measurement value is not
correct. When a DUT is an amplifier or the like, this error may occur, damaging the
receiver in the worst case. Should this error occur with a passive part used as the DUT or
with nothing connected to the test port, this instrument is faulty. Contact an Agilent
Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument.
If this error occurs, the stimulus signal output is automatically turned to off.
73 Power meter not settled
The measurement value of the power meter is unstable, or it goes outside the tolerance.
This error occurs when the power meter’s measurement value does not become stable
within about 10 seconds during measurement for power calibration data or that for
scalar-mixer calibration data.
This error also occurs when the power calibration value exceeds the set tolerance.
In addition, it occurs when the power meter fails to respond for any reason, such as
power-down for example, during measurement under the same conditions.
Ensure a firm connection of the power sensor.
241 Power on test failed
This error occurs when the power-on test fails, indicating a failure of this instrument.
Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the
instrument.
61 Power unleveled
The out power level exceeds available range.
For example, if the level after correction exceeds the power level that can be outputted
when correcting the power level with the power calibration and power slope feature, this
error occurs.
Check that the power level is set correctly, the power calibration has been performed
correctly and the correction value of the power slope is set correctly.

530 Appendix F
 Messages
Printer error

120 Printer error

This error occurs when the previous printing is still in progress or the printer fails (offline,
short of paper, etc.) at time of outputting the display image on the LCD screen to the
printer (HCOP:IMM command).
121 Print failed
This error occurs when printing fails for reasons other than Error 120, Printer error.
-284 Program currently running
This error occurs when the PROG:SEL:STAT RUN command is executed with the VBA
program in the Run state.
-112 Program mnemonic too long
The length of the header exceeds 12 characters (see 7.6.1.4.1, IEEE488.2).
-286 Program runtime error
An error occurring when VBA is executed.

Q
-430 Query DEADLOCKED
The state that generates a “DEADLOCKED” Query error (see 6.3.1.7, IEEE488.2). This

F. Messages
error occurs when both input and output buffers have become full, preventing the
instrument from continuing processing, for example.
-400 Query error
A comprehensive query error has occurred showing that this instrument cannot detect a
more detailed error. This code simply shows that a query error defined in 11.5.1.1.7 and
6.3, IEEE488.2 has occurred.
-410 Query INTERRUPTED
The state that generates a “INTERRUPTED” Query error (see 6.3.2.3, IEEE488.1). This
error occurs when data bytes (DAB) or GET are received before the transmission of the
response after a query has not been completed, for example.
-420 Query UNTERMINATED
The state that generates an “UNTERMINATED” Query error (see 6.3.2, IEEE488.2). This
error occurs when this instrument is designated as the talker and an incomplete program
message is received, for example.
-440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response
After a query asking for an indefinite response has been run, another query is received in
the same program message (See 6.5.7.5.7, IEEE488.2).
-350 Queue overflow
The queue contains a specific code in place of the code which caused this error. The code
indicates that the error occurred because of no space available in the queue, but the error is
not recorded.

Appendix F 531
 Messages
Recall failed

R
105 Recall failed
This error occurs when reading an instrument status file (State01.sta, etc.)
(MMEM:LOAD:STAT command) fails.

S
106 Save failed
This error occurs when writing an instrument status file (State01.sta, etc.)
(MMEM:STOR:STAT command) fails.
33 Selected parameter not valid for confidence check
This error occurs when the mix mode S parameter has been selected for the S parameter
you want to check, while using the confidence check function for calibration coefficient.
57 SnP request not valid for selected measurement
This error occurs when you try to save data to a Touchstone file but no measurement has
been executed.
This error also occurs when you try to save a Touchstone file with power sweep
measurement specified or with the frequency offset function set to ON.
50 Specified channel hidden
This error occurs when an attempt is made to activate a channel not on display using the
DISP:WIND:ACT command. This error is not generated by front key operations.
23 Specified error term does not exist
The error occurs when the calibration coefficient type of the parameter specified in the
read/write command of the calibration coefficient (SENS:CORR:COEF) is invalid for the
calibration type selected by the calibration type selection command
(SENS:CORR:COEF:METH:xxxx). This error is not generated by front key operations.
21 Specified ports overlapped
This error occurs when a port number is duplicated in a command requiring two or more
port numbers as parameters. Such commands are, for example,
CALC:FSIM:BAL:TOP:SSB:PPOR 1,2,3,3. Specify port setup correctly to avoid
duplication of ports. This error is not generated by front key operations.
51 Specified trace dose not exist
This error occurs when CALC:PAR:SEL command is executed to activate more traces than
specified by CALC:PAR:COUN command.This error is not generated by front key
operations.
26 Standard not selected
This error occurs when you execute the measurement under the condition that the standard
is not selected for the subclass (the standard number is set to 0).
-150 String data error
When a character-string-data element is put to syntactic analysis, an error not
corresponding to one of Error Numbers -151 through -159 occurs.

532 Appendix F
 Messages
String data not allowed

-158 String data not allowed

A character-string-data element has been received at a position where this instrument does
not accept one.
-138 Suffix not allowed
A suffix is attached to a numeric value element to which a suffix is not allowed to be
attached.
-134 Suffix too long
The unit is too long.
The unit is expressed in 12 or more characters (see 7.7.3.4, IEEE488.2).
55 Sweep mode changed to stepped sweep
You cannot change the sweep mode to the swept mode.
This error occurs when you change the sweep mode to the swept mode/high speed swept
mode under the conditions where the sweep type is set to power sweep, power slope
function is enabled (ON, correction coefficient is other than zero), power calibration is ON,
frequency offset is enabled, spurious avoidance of frequency offset is enabled, or external
signal source control is enabled.
-102 Syntax error
A command or data type that is not recognized exists.

F. Messages
-310 System error
One of the errors designated as “system errors” in this instrument has occurred.

T
40 Target value not found
This error occurs when the target is not found during the marker search analysis after
specifying the target and executing the CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC and
CALC:FUNC:EXEC commands. This error occurs also when the bandwidth is not found
after executing the bandwidth marker command, CALC:MARK:BWID:DATA?
-124 Too many digits
The number of digits of the argument of the decimal numeric-value-data element exceeds
255 with the preceding 0 removed (see 7.7.2.4.1, IEEE488.2).
-223 Too much data
The block-, expression-, or character-string-type program data that has been received
conforms with the standard. But it exceeds the amount that can be processed under the
condition of the memory or conditions specific to memory-related devices. In this
instrument, this error occurs when the number of characters exceeds 254 in a
character-string parameter.

Appendix F 533
 Messages
Transform, Gate not allowed

54 Transform, Gate not allowed

This message appears when you turn on the gating/conversion function of the time domain
feature, while frequency offset is enabled, measurement points are set to two, or sweep
type is set to other than linear sweep
Turn off the frequency offset (SENS:OFFS OFF command), set the measurement points to
three or more and the sweep type to linear sweep, and then turn on the gating/conversion
function.
-211 Trigger ignored
This instrument receives and detects a trigger command (“TRIG”) or an external trigger
signal. But it is ignored due to the timing condition (This instrument is not in the wait-for-
trigger state, for example). Change the setup so that a trigger command or an external
trigger signal can be sent after the instrument has entered the wait-for- trigger state.

U
300 Unable to estimate adapter length
Adapter length can not be estimated at zero span. Change the frequency span other than 0.
-113 Undefined header
A command not defined in this instrument, though not illegal in the syntactic structure, has
been received. For example, when a message “:DISP:WIND1:TABL:MEM ON” is sent to
a correct program message “:DISP:WIND1:TRAC1:MEM ON,” the message sent is
received as an undefined command by this instrument. See the command reference and use
correct commands.
This error occurs also when a port not existing on this model is specified in a command
specifying a port number as an index. Such commands are
CALC:FSIM:SEND:DEEM:PORTn:xxxx, CALC:FSIM:SEND:PMC:PORTn:xxxx,
CALC:FSIM:SEND:ZCON:PORTn:Z0:R, and SENS:CORR:EXT:PORTn:TIME; they
include PORTn as a part.
34 User characterization not found in module
This error occurs when the selected user profile is not detected in the ECal memory, while
reading it from the ECal module, written by the user definition ECal.

V
30 Valid Ecal module not found
This error occurs when the number of ports of the ECal module connected is less than the
necessary number of ports. This error occurs, for example, when a 4-port Cal executing
command, SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:SOLT4, is executed with a 2-port ECal module
connected. This error is not generated by front key operations.
71 Valid power meter not found
Valid power meter is not connected. (refer to “Power Calibration” as described in
E5070B/E5071B User’s Guide)
This error occurs when the E5070B/5071B and the power meter is not connected with
USB/GPIB interface, the GPIB addresses do not match between the power meter and the
E5070B/5071B’s power meter, or the power meter is turned off, during the measurement

534 Appendix F
 Messages
Valid power sensor not found

for power calibration data or for that in scalar-mixer calibration.

It also occurs when inoperable power meter is connected.
Ensure the connection of the power meter, GPIB addresses and power supply.
72 Valid power sensor not found
No valid sensor is connected to the power meter.
This error occurs when no power sensor is connected to the specified channel of the power
meter, during the measurement for power calibration data or for that in scalar-mixer
calibration.
Ensure the connection of the power sensor.
75 Valid signal generator not found
No valid external signal source is connected.
This error occurs when the specified type of external signal source is not connected to the
specified GPIB address, though the control of the external signal source is enabled
(SENS:OFFS:LOC:STAT ON and SENS:OFFS:LOC:CONT ON).
It also occurs when USB/GPIB interface is set but not connected.
Ensure the external signal source and the connection of USB/GPIB interface.

F. Messages

Appendix F 535
Messages
Auto port extension not allowed

Warning Message
A warning message is displayed in the instrument message/Warning area in the lower left
part of the display against a gray background. Pushing a front panel key or executing
:DISP:CCL command clears the message.
This message simply appears on the display, being not known to a remote environment
such as a GPIB. This message is not displayed when another error (against a red
background) has already been displayed in the instrument message/Warning area.
The warning messages for this instrument are as follows:
Auto port extension not allowed
This message appears when you try to execute the auto port extension when the sweep type
is the power sweep or the frequency offset function is ON.
If this message is displayed, the auto port extension is not available.
Calibration extrapolated
The frequency range that can be calibrated with the ECal module is exceeded. In this case,
the calibration data for the minimum frequency or maximum frequency are used instead of
the data exceeding the allowable frequency range for calibration.
Fixture simulator not allowed
This message appears when enabling the frequency offset, while the fixture simulator
function is turned on.
If this message is displayed, the fixture simulator function is automatically turned off.
Log sweep requires 2 octave minimum span
If you change the sweep range that does not satisfy the necessary condition of the
frequency span (the stop frequency is about 4 times or more of the start frequency) when
the sweep type is set to the log sweep, this message is displayed.
If this message is displayed, the sweep type is automatically set to the linear sweep.
For example, if you attempt to change the log type to the log sweep when the start
frequency is set to 1 MHz and the stop frequency to 2 MHz, this error occurs.
Set the stop frequency to a value of about 4 times or more the start frequency and then set
the low seep.
Peak not found
This warning message is displayed when, with the tracking turned on, the peak specified by
the marker search has not been found by the time the sweep is finished (with the tracking
executed).
Segment table changed
This warning message is displayed when the setting specified segment by segment in the
segment table is automatically changed by a change in the other setting.
For example, this warning message is displayed when, with the power specified segment
by segment in the segment table, the power setting for a segment is adjusted by a change in
the power range setting.

536 Appendix F
 Messages
Sweep mode changed to stepped sweep

Sweep mode changed to stepped sweep

This message appears when you set the sweep type to power sweep, power slope function
to enabled (ON, correction coefficient is other than zero), power calibration to ON,
frequency offset to enabled, spurious avoidance of frequency offset to enabled, or external
signal source control to enabled, while the sweep mode is set to swept mode or high speed
swept mode.
When this message is displayed, the sweep mode is automatically set to step mode (during
swept mode) or high speed step mode (during high speed swept mode).
Target value not found
This warning message is displayed when, with the tracking turned on, the target specified
by the marker search has not been found by the time the sweep is finished (with the
tracking executed).
This warning message is displayed also when, with the bandwidth marker displayed, the
setting for the bandwidth marker is changed at the end of the sweep, or when, with the
active marker changed or moved, the bandwidth is not found.
Transform, Gate not allowed
This message appears when you have set the measurement points to two, sweep type to
other than linear sweep, or frequency offset to enabled, while the gating/conversion
function of the time domain feature is turned on.

F. Messages
If this message is displayed, the gating/conversion function is automatically turned off.
User Preset File not found
This warning message is displayed if no user preset file (D:\UserPreset.sta) exists when
executing the SYST:UPR command.
If this message is displayed, a normal preset (SYST:PRES) will be performed.

Appendix F 537
Messages
User Preset File not found

538 Appendix F
 REGIONAL SALES AND SUPPORT OFFICES
For more information about Agilent Technologies test and measurement products, applications, services, and
for a current sales office listing, visit our web site: http://www.agilent.com/find/tmdir. You can also contact one
of the following centers and ask for a test and measurement sales representative. 21/01/2004

United States: Australia/New Zealand:

Test and Measurement Call Center (tel) (61 3) 9210-5555 (Australia)
(tel) 1 800 452-4844 (fax) (61 3) 9210-5899
(fax) 1 888 900-8921 (tel) (64 4) 939-0636 (New Zealand)
(fax) (64 4) 972-5364

Canada:
Test and Measurement Call Center Asia Pacific:
(tel) 1 877 894-4414 (tel) (65) 6375-8100
(fax) 1 888 900-8921 (fax) (65) 6836-0252
Email: [email protected]

China:
(tel) 800 810-0189
(fax) 800 820-2816

Europe:
(tel) (31 20) 547-2323
(fax) (31 20) 547-2390

Japan:
Call Center
(tel) 0120 421-345
(tel) (81) 426 56-7832
(fax) (81) 426 56-7840

Korea:
(tel) (82 2) 2004-5004
(fax) (82 2) 2004-5115

Latin America:
(tel) (305) 269-7500
(fax) (305) 269-7599

Taiwan:
(tel) 0800 047 866
(fax) 0800 286 331